Bild in Der Größe 215X70 Mm Einfügen

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Bild in der Größe 215x70 mm einfügen

Operator’s Manual C-Class

2045841181 Information Provided by: Order No. 6515 0614 13 Part No. 204 584 11 81 USA Edition A 2008 C-Class C 230 (Canada only) C 230 Sport (Canada only) C 230 4MATIC (Canada only) C 230 4MATIC Sport (Canada only) C 300 C 300 Sport C 300 4MATIC C 300 4MATIC Sport C 350 (Canada only) C 350 Sport C 350 4MATIC (Canada only) C 350 4MATIC Sport (Canada only) Information Provided by:Provided Information Our company and staff congratulate you ț Please read this manual carefully, then on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference. Your selection of our product is a demon- ț Please follow the recommendations stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de- name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your designed to acquaint you with the opera- sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz. easy as possible to operate and provide ț Please pay attention to the warnings years of service. and cautions contained in this manual. Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc- men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants. and also the safety of you and your passen- We extend our best wishes for many miles gers, we ask you to make a small invest- of safe, pleasurable driving. ment of time: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company

Information Provided by:Provided Information Contents

Introduction...... 9 At a glance...... 19 Safety and Security ...... 33 Product information...... 9 Exterior view...... 20 Occupant safety ...... 34 Operator’s Manual...... 10 Storage compartments...... 22 Air bags ...... 36 Service and warranty information .. 10 Cockpit...... 24 Occupant Classification System ..... 41 Important notice for California Instrument cluster...... 26 Seat belts ...... 46 retail buyers and lessees of Multifunction steering wheel ...... 28 Active head restraints...... 50 Mercedes-Benz automobiles ...... 11 Center console ...... 29 Children in the vehicle ...... 51 Maintenance ...... 11 Upper part ...... 29 Blocking of Roadside Assistance ...... 12 Lower part ...... 30 rear door window operation...... 57 Change of address or ownership.... 12 Overhead control panel ...... 31 Panic alarm ...... 58 Operating your vehicle Driver’s door control panel Driving safety systems ...... 59 outside the USA or Canada...... 12 and seat adjustment/memory*...... 32 ABS...... 59 Where to find it...... 13 Adaptive Brake ...... 60 Symbols...... 14 BAS...... 60 Operating safety ...... 15 EBP ...... 61 Proper use of the vehicle ...... 15 ESP® ...... 62 Problems with your vehicle...... 16 Four wheel electronic traction Reporting safety defects...... 17 system (4MATIC) with the ESP® ..... 65 Reporting safety defects ...... 17 Anti-theft systems...... 66 Vehicle data recording...... 18 Immobilizer...... 66 Information regarding electronic Anti-theft alarm system ...... 66 recording devices...... 18 Canceling the alarm...... 67

Information Provided by:Provided Information Contents

Steering wheel...... 93 Lighting ...... 108 Controls in detail ...... 69 Steering wheel adjustment, Exterior lamp switch ...... 108 Locking and unlocking ...... 70 manual ...... 93 Switching on high beams ...... 112 SmartKey ...... 70 Steering wheel adjustment, Headlamp cleaning system* ...... 112 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* electrical* (Canada only)...... 94 Corner-illuminating front (Canada only) ...... 73 Easy-entry/exit feature* fog lamps* (With Bi-Xenon* Checking batteries in the SmartKey (Canada only)...... 95 headlamps only)...... 112 or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Mirrors...... 97 Hazard warning flasher ...... 114 (Canada only) ...... 78 Interior rear view mirror ...... 97 Interior lighting ...... 114 Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey Exterior rear view mirrors...... 97 Door entry lamps ...... 116 with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) .. 79 Power folding Trunk lamp...... 116 Opening doors from the inside...... 79 exterior rear view mirrors*...... 98 Windshield wipers ...... 117 Automatic central locking ...... 80 Interior rear view mirror, Switching on/off Locking and unlocking antiglare position ...... 99 windshield wipers ...... 118 from the inside ...... 81 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*. 100 Single wipe ...... 118 Starter switch positions...... 82 Activating exterior rear view mirror Intermittent wiping ...... 118 SmartKey ...... 82 parking position* (Canada only)... 101 Wiping with SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Memory function* (Canada only)...... 102 windshield washer fluid...... 119 (Canada only) ...... 83 Storing positions into memory* ... 103 Power windows ...... 120 Seats...... 85 Recalling positions from memory* 103 Opening and closing Seat adjustment...... 85 Storing exterior rear power windows ...... 120 Lumbar support...... 91 view mirror parking position*...... 104 Summer opening feature ...... 123 Seat heating*...... 91 Fastening the seat belts ...... 105 Convenience closing feature...... 124 Proper use of seat belts ...... 106 Seat belt height adjustment...... 107

Information Provided by:Provided Information Contents

Driving and parking...... 126 Tachometer...... 149 “911” emergency call ...... 231 Starting the engine...... 126 Outside temperature indicator...... 149 Phone book...... 233 Driving off ...... 129 Fuel gauge ...... 150 Call lists...... 236 Turn signals...... 131 Control system ...... 151 Making calls...... 237 Problems while driving ...... 132 Multifunction display...... 151 Functions during a single call ...... 240 Parking...... 133 Multifunction steering wheel...... 152 Driving systems...... 241 Turning off the engine ...... 134 Menus...... 154 Cruise control ...... 241 Releasing seat belts...... 135 Trip menu...... 156 Hill start assist system ...... 246 Manual transmission ...... 136 Navi* menu...... 158 Air vents...... 247 Shifting into reverse...... 137 Audio menu...... 158 Opening and closing air vents...... 248 Automatic transmission*...... 138 TEL menu*...... 160 Dual-zone automatic climate control.. 250 Gear selector lever...... 138 Service menu...... 164 Deactivating the Shifting procedure ...... 139 Settings menu...... 165 climate control system ...... 252 Gear selector lever positions ...... 140 Audio system...... 176 Operating the climate control Driving tips...... 142 Audio and telephone, operation.... 176 system in automatic mode ...... 253 Gear ranges ...... 143 Audio system overview ...... 176 Setting the temperature ...... 253 Automatic shift program ...... 144 Operating safety ...... 177 Adjusting air distribution ...... 254 Gear selector lever Audio system components...... 177 Adjusting air volume ...... 254 one-touch gearshifting ...... 145 Menu...... 185 Using driver-side settings for all Emergency operation Operation...... 188 temperature zones (Canada only). 254 (Limp-Home Mode) ...... 146 SYS menu ...... 192 Front defroster ...... 255 Instrument cluster ...... 147 Radio operation ...... 194 Maximum cooling MAX COOL Multifunction display...... 147 Satellite radio*...... 200 (USA only)...... 256 Adjusting instrument CD mode...... 208 Rear window defroster...... 256 cluster display illumination...... 148 Audio Aux mode...... 220 Air recirculation mode ...... 257 Coolant temperature gauge ...... 148 Telephone* ...... 222 Air conditioning ...... 258 Information Provided by:Provided Information Contents

3-zone automatic climate control* Synchronizing...... 275 (Canada only)...... 259 Panorama roof with Operation ...... 309 Deactivating power tilt/sliding panel* ...... 276 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ...... 310 climate control system...... 261 Roller sunblinds...... 276 Driving instructions ...... 311 Operating climate control Opening and closing panorama Drive sensibly – save fuel...... 311 system in automatic mode ...... 261 roof with power tilt/sliding panel. 277 Drinking and driving...... 311 Setting the temperature...... 262 Synchronizing...... 278 Pedals ...... 311 Adjusting air distribution ...... 263 Loading and storing ...... 280 Power assistance...... 311 Adjusting air volume...... 263 Roof rack*...... 280 Brakes...... 312 Using driver-side settings for Split rear bench seat*...... 281 Driving off ...... 314 all temperature zones...... 263 Loading instructions...... 282 Parking...... 314 Front defroster ...... 264 Storage compartments ...... 283 Tires...... 315 Rear window defroster ...... 265 Cup holders...... 287 Hydroplaning...... 315 Air recirculation mode...... 265 Trunk...... 288 Tire traction ...... 316 Residual engine heat Useful features ...... 289 Tire speed rating...... 316 and ventilation...... 266 Sun visors ...... 289 Winter driving instructions...... 317 Air conditioning ...... 267 Rear window sunshade* ...... 290 Standing water...... 318 Rear climate control...... 268 Ashtrays...... 291 Passenger compartment...... 318 Trunk ...... 269 Cigarette lighter ...... 292 Driving abroad ...... 318 Opening trunk ...... 269 Power outlet in the glove box...... 293 Control and operation Closing trunk...... 270 Power outlet in the of radio transmitters ...... 319 Trunk emergency release ...... 271 rear passenger compartment...... 293 Catalytic converter...... 319 Valet locking ...... 272 Floormats*...... 294 Emission control ...... 320 Power tilt/sliding sunroof ...... 273 lTele Aid* ...... 295 Coolant temperature...... 321 Opening and closing Garage door opener* ...... 303 power tilt/sliding sunroof...... 273 Information Provided by:Provided Information Contents

At the gas station ...... 322 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Refueling...... 322 Standards (U.S. vehicles)...... 354 Practical hints ...... 373 Check regularly and Tire ply material ...... 356 What to do if …? ...... 374 before a long trip...... 324 Tire and loading terminology...... 356 Lamps in instrument cluster ...... 374 Engine compartment ...... 325 Rotating tires ...... 359 Air bag off indicator lamp ...... 385 Hood ...... 325 Winter driving ...... 360 Vehicle status messages in Engine oil ...... 327 Winter tires ...... 360 the multifunction display ...... 387 Transmission fluid level...... 328 Snow chains...... 361 Where will I find ...? ...... 420 Coolant level ...... 329 Maintenance...... 362 First aid kit...... 420 Windshield washer system and Maintenance Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, headlamp cleaning system*...... 330 service indicator message ...... 362 luggage bowl, Minispare wheel..... 420 Tires and wheels...... 331 Calling up the maintenance Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 424 Important guidelines ...... 331 service indicator display ...... 363 Unlocking the vehicle ...... 424 Tire care and maintenance...... 332 Resetting the maintenance Locking the vehicle...... 425 Direction of rotation...... 334 service indicator ...... 363 Fuel filler flap...... 426 Loading the vehicle ...... 334 Vehicle care...... 364 Manually unlocking the Recommended tire Cleaning and care of vehicle...... 364 transmission gear selector lever... 426 inflation pressure ...... 339 Resetting activated head restraints.... 427 Checking tire inflation pressure ... 341 Replacing SmartKey batteries ...... 428 Tire labeling...... 348 Replacing bulbs...... 430 Load identification ...... 352 Bulbs...... 431 DOT, Replacing bulbs for front lamps.... 432 Tire Identification Number (TIN)... 352 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 436 Maximum tire load ...... 353 Replacing wiper blades ...... 438 Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 354 Removing wiper blades...... 439 Installing wiper blades ...... 439 Information Provided by:Provided Information Contents

Flat tire ...... 440 Fuel requirements...... 482 Preparing the vehicle...... 440 Technical data ...... 459 Flexible Fuel Vehicles (USA only) . 482 Mounting the Minispare wheel ..... 441 Parts service...... 460 Coolants ...... 484 Battery ...... 446 Warranty coverage...... 461 Windshield washer system Disconnecting the battery ...... 448 Loss of Service and and headlamp cleaning system*.. 486 Removing the battery ...... 449 Warranty Information Booklet ...... 461 Charging and reinstalling Identification labels ...... 462 the battery...... 449 Layout of poly-V-belt drive...... 464 Index...... 487 Reconnecting the battery...... 450 C 300/C 350 ...... 464 Jump starting ...... 451 Engine...... 465 Towing the vehicle ...... 453 Rims and tires...... 467 Installing towing eye bolt...... 455 Same size tires...... 468 Fuses ...... 456 Mixed size tires ...... 469 Fuse box Minispare wheel...... 471 in passenger compartment ...... 457 Electrical system ...... 473 Fuse box Main dimensions and weights...... 474 in engine compartment ...... 457 Main dimensions...... 474 Fuse box Weights ...... 475 in the trunk...... 458 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc...... 476 Capacities ...... 476 Engine oils...... 480 Engine oil additives ...... 480 Air conditioning refrigerant ...... 480 Brake fluid...... 480 Premium unleaded gasoline ...... 481 Gasoline additives...... 481 Information Provided by:Provided Information Introduction Product information ̄ Product information Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, as well as best interest: other products and therefore cannot be approved conversion parts and accesso- We recommend using Genuine held responsible for them, even if in indi- ries are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion vidual cases an official approval or authori- Mercedes-Benz Center. Here they can be parts and accessories explicitly approved zation by governmental or other agencies properly installed and you will receive com- by us for your vehicle model. should exist. Use of such parts and acces- prehensive information, including advice sories could adversely affect the safety, on permissible technical modifications. We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. their reliability, safety and special suitabili- Please do not use them. ty for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 9 Introduction Operator’s Manual

This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your For your own safety and longer service life mation, illustrations and descriptions in Mercedes-Benz, including: of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in- this Operator’s Manual might differ from structions and warnings contained in this your vehicle. ț New Vehicle Limited Warranty manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in ț Emission System Warranty age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc- or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are ț Emission Performance Warranty ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and ț California, Maine, Massachusetts, and the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System the actual equipment of your vehicle. Your vehicle may have some or all of the Warranty equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only) optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz ț State Warranty Enforcement Laws vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws) the operation of any equipment, your au- care and operating procedures. The Oper- thorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be ator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet glad to demonstrate the proper proce- are important documents and should be dures. kept with the vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 10 Introduction Operator’s Manual

Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- Maintenance buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily The Maintenance Booklet describes all the injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- necessary maintenance work which should Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to be performed at regular intervals. a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have Always have the Maintenance Booklet with of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, you when you take the vehicle to your au- Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au- LLC in writing of the need for its repair, thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for ser- thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix (2) the same substantial defect or mal- vice. The service advisor will record each one or more substantial defects or malfunction of a less serious nature than service in the booklet for you. functions in the vehicle that are covered by category (1) has been subject to repair its express warranty after a reasonable four or more times and you have direct- number of repair attempts. During the pe- ly notified us in writing of the need for riod of 18 months from original delivery of its repair, or the vehicle or the accumulation of 18000 miles (approximately 29000 km) (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever of repair of the same or different sub- occurs first, a reasonable number of repair stantial defects or malfunctions for a attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or cumulative total of more than lessee if one or more of the following oc- 30 calendar days. curs: Written notification should not be sent to a dealer, it should be addressed to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Information Provided by:Provided Information 11 Introduction Operator’s Manual

Roadside Assistance Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It ț unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- is in your own interest that we can contact alytic converters may not be available; The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance you should the need arise. the use of leaded fuels will damage the Program provides factory trained technical catalysts, If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to literature with the vehicle to make it avail- ț gasoline may have a considerably low- the toll-free Roadside Assistance number able to the next operator. er octane rating, and improper fuel can 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) cause engine damage. If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail- will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Car” found in the Service and Warranty In- able for delivery in Europe under our Euro- Customer Assistance Representatives formation Booklet, or call the pean Delivery Program. For details, consult 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or For additional information refer to the ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, write to: Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- or Customer Service (in Canada) at In the USA: gram brochure in your vehicle literature 1-800-387-0100. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC portfolio. Operating your vehicle outside the USA European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Change of address or ownership or Canada Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 If you change your address, be sure to If you plan to operate your vehicle in for- In Canada: send in the “Change of Address Notice” eign countries, please be aware that: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. found in the Service and Warranty Informa- ț service facilities or replacement parts European Delivery Department tion Booklet, or simply call the may not be readily available, 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Information Provided by:Provided Information 12 Introduction Where to find it ̄ Where to find it This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information Operation Indexes for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find all the information you The table of contents and the index are de- has its own reference color. need for the proper operation of your vehi- signed to help you find information quickly cle. and easily. At a glance The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation: Here you will find an overview of your vehi- Practical hints ț this Operator’s Manual cle’s interior and exterior main features. This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter. ț the Maintenance Booklet Safety and Security Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the Here you will find descriptions of the safety Technical data equipment options installed in your vehi- and security features of your vehicle. All important technical data for your vehicle. cle can be found in this section. Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section also describes technical innovations.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 13 Introduction Symbols

Trademarks: The following symbols are found in this ̈ This symbol points to instructions for ț ESP® is a registered trademark of Operator’s Manual: you to follow. DaimlerChrysler. * Optional equipment is identified ̈ A number of these symbols appearing with an asterisk. Since standard in succession indicates a multiple-step ț HomeLink® is a registered trademark equipment varies between models, procedure. of Prince, a Johnson Controls the descriptions and illustrations in Company. ୴ page This symbol tells you where to this manual may differ slightly from look for further information on a ț SIRIUS and related marks are trade- the actual equipment of your vehi- topic. marks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. cle. ୴୴ This continuation symbol marks G a warning which is continued on Warning! the next page.

Warning notices draw your attention to haz- ୴୴ This continuation symbol marks ards that may endanger your health or life, a procedure which is continued or the health or life of others. on the next page. -> This symbol is used to indicate ! Highlights hazards that may result in dam- cross-references to term defini- age to your vehicle. tions. i Helpful hints or further information you may Display Words appearing in the multi- find useful. function display and COMAND display are printed in the type shown here.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 14 Introduction Operating safety ̄ Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle Warning! G Warning! G Proper use of the vehicle requires that you Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules: cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, ț the safety precautions in this manual the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a ț the “Technical data” section in this produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri- bance, or you suspect that damage to your ț traffic rules and regulations ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow ț motor vehicle laws and safety standards See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center down, and drive with caution to an area for repairs or modifications to electronic which is a safe distance from the road. components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve- Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle could also have a negative impact on hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the vehicle. These warning labels are intended the operating safety of the vehicle. nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair fa- to make you and others aware of various Some safety systems only function while the cility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these engine is running. You should therefore nev- warning labels unless explicitly instructed to er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re- moval of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury. Information Provided by:Provided Information 15 Introduction Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada: Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9

Information Provided by:Provided Information 16 Introduction Reporting safety defects ̄ Reporting safety defects For the USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.”

Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 17 Introduction Vehicle data recording

Information regarding electronic recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid* system, may transmit some data in certain accidents. This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety. DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others ț for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes ț with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee ț in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency ț for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or ț as otherwise required or permitted by law. Please check the Tele Aid* subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 18 At a glance Exterior view Storage compartments Cockpit Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Center console Overhead control panel Driver’s door control panel and seat adjustment/memory*

Information Provided by:Provided Information 19 At a glance Exterior view

Information Provided by:Provided Information 20 At a glance Exterior view

Item Page Item Page Item Page 1 Trunk ț Auto-dimming rear view 9 Headlamp cleaning system* 112 mirrors* ț Unlocking 269 97 a Front lamps 431 ț Power folding exterior rear ț Opening and closing 269 100 b Hood, opening 325 view mirrors* ț Minispare wheel 441 Engine oil 327 ț Parking position* 98 ț Vehicle tool kit 420 (Canada only) Coolant 329 2 Rear lamps 431 101 Battery 446 3 Rear window, defrosting 265 7 Tires and wheels 331 c Windshield wipers 117 4 Fuel filler flap 322 ț Checking tire inflation 341 Wiper blades, replacing 438 pressure Refueling 322 Wiper blades, cleaning 368 ț Tire Pressure Monitoring 344 Windshield Gasoline 481 System (TPMS), (USA only) d Doors Front window, defrosting 264 5 ț Run Flat Indicator (Canada 342 ț Locking and unlocking 70 only) Cleaning with wiper fluid 119 ț Opening and closing 70 ț General information 331 Cleaning 368 ț Unlocking/locking in an 424 ț Minispare wheel 422 e Roofs emergency ț Flat tire 440 ț Power tilt/sliding sunroof 273 Exterior rear view mirror 6 8 Towing the vehicle 453 ț Panorama roof with power 276 ț Adjusting 97 Installing towing eye bolt 455 tilt/sliding panel*

Information Provided by:Provided Information 21 At a glance Storage compartments

Information Provided by:Provided Information 22 At a glance Storage compartments

Item Page Item Page Item Page 1 Glove box 284 9 Storage pocket 286 g Right storage compartment in 284 front center armrest Power outlet 293 a Door pocket h Ashtray in rear passenger 292 Aux socket 220 b Document holder in sun visor 289 compartment 2 Door pocket c Parcel net in front passenger 285 footwell Power outlet 293 3 Storage pocket 286 d Ashtray 291 j Cup holder in the rear center 287 4 Door pocket armrest Cigarette lighter 292 5 Hooks on left and right side in 288 k Rear center armrest with stor- 286 trunk e Cup holder 287 age compartment and 6 Parcel net on left side in trunk 288 f Right storage compartment in 284 cup holder 287 front center armrest 7 Storage space for Minispare 422, wheel and vehicle tool kit in 420 trunk 8 Door pocket

Information Provided by:Provided Information 23 At a glance Cockpit

Information Provided by:Provided Information 24 At a glance Cockpit

Item Page Item Page Item Page 1 Lever for cruise control 242 a Steering wheel release handle 94 d Hood lock release 326 2 Instrument cluster 26 (manual) e Parking brake pedal 130 3 Multifunction steering wheel 152 b Steering wheel adjustment 93 f Parking brake release 130 stalk (electrical)* 4 Horn (Canada only) g Exterior lamp switch 108 5 Overhead control panel 31 c Combination switch h Door control panel and seat 32 Glove box 284 adjustment/memory* 6 ț High beam 112 7 Glove box lock 284 ț Corner-illuminating 112 8 Center console 29 lamps* 117 9 Starter switch 82 ț Windshield wipers 131 KEYLESS-GO* 83 ț Turn signals start/stop button (Canada only)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 25 At a glance Instrument cluster

Information Provided by:Provided Information 26 At a glance Instrument cluster

Item Page Item Page Item Page 1 Combination gauge with: 3 v Electronic Stability 380 9 Outside temperature 149, Program (ESP®) (automatic transmission*) 169 Fuel gauge warning lamp 4 Fuel tank reserve Speedometer 4 a Selected program mode 140 warning lamp 380 5 Multifunction display indicator Coolant temperature gauge 112 6 K Right turn signal 131 (automatic transmission*) Coolant temperature Ì indicator lamp b Gear position/range 143 warning lamp 374 7 Tachometer with: indicator Indicator/warning lamps: (automatic transmission*) 382 H Combination low tire 380 High beam headlamp Additional speedometer 169 A 378 pressure/TPMS indicator lamp malfunction telltale, (manual transmission) ± Engine malfunction USA only c Digital clock 151 indicator lamp = SRS indicator lamp 382 d Instrument cluster 148 ; Brake warning 376 - Antilock Brake System 59 illumination USA only lamp (ABS) indicator lamp 3 < Seat belt telltale 380 Canada only 8 Outside temperature 149 Left turn signal 131 2 L (manual transmission) indicator lamp Outside temperature / 149, additional speedometer 169 (automatic transmission*) Information Provided by:Provided Information 27 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel

Item Page Item Page 1 Multifunction display 151 4 L to cancel Voice 1 Operating control system 151 Control* , back, to confirm message 152 2 Volume control: Press button 5 To call up line for menus and select menus: æ to increase volume Press button ç to decrease volume & to scroll to the right Telephone*: ( to scroll to the left Press button To select submenu or scroll s to take a call through lists: to dial a call Press button t to end a call $ to scroll up to reject an incoming call % to scroll down F to mute Press button 3 ! to activate Voice # to confirm selection Control*1

1 Voice Control* is only available with COMAND*. Refer to separate operating instructions.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 28 At a glance Center console ̄ Center console Upper part Item Page Item Page 1 Audio display cover 180 7 Seat heating*, passenger 91 2 Hazard warning flasher 114 side switch – switching on/off 8 Rear window sunshade 290 3 Anti-theft alarm system 66 switch* indicator lamp 9 Dual-zone automatic 250 4 Front passenger front 45, climate control air bag off indicator lamp 385, 3-zone automatic climate 259 393 control* (Canada only) 5 ESP® control switch 64 Rear window defroster 256, 6 Audio system, 176 265 or a Seat heating*, driver’s side 91 COMAND* (see separate operating instructions)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 29 At a glance Center console

Lower part Item Page 1 Ashtray 291 Cigarette lighter 292 2 Gearshift lever for manual 138 transmission Gear selector lever for 140 automatic transmission* 3 Cup holder 287 4 Split storage compartment, 284 left and right side of the center armrest 5 Audio controller 182 COMAND-controller* (see separate operating instructions) 6 Program mode selector 144 switch for automatic transmission*

Information Provided by:Provided Information 30 At a glance Overhead control panel ̄ Overhead control panel Item Page Item Page 1 Rear interior lighting on/off 116 7 Rear view mirror 97 2 Interior lighting control 115 8 Garage door opener* 303 3 Right reading lamp on/off 115 9 Hands-free microphone for 4 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 273 ț Tele Aid* (emergency call 295 or system) ț Panorama roof with power 276 Telephone* 160 tilt/sliding panel* ț Voice Control*1 5 Information button* 300 a Roadside Assistance button* 299 6 Tele Aid* (emergency call 295 b Left reading lamp on/off 115 system) button c Front interior lighting on/off 114 1 Voice Control* is only available with COMAND*. Refer to separate operating instructions.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 31 At a glance Driver’s door control panel and seat adjustment/memory*

Item Page 1 Inside door handle 79 2 Central unlocking switch 81 3 Seat adjustment (at side of 85 the respective front seat) Seat adjustment* 85 (Canada only) 4 Memory function* for storing 102 seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel settings (Canada only) 5 Exterior rear view mirrors 97 adjustment 6 Switches for opening/ closing 120 side windows 7 Rear door window override 57 switch 8 Remote trunk opening switch 269 9 Central locking switch 81

Information Provided by:Provided Information 32 Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti-theft systems

Information Provided by:Provided Information 33 Safety and Security Occupant safety

In this section you will learn the most Air bag system components with The SRS system conducts a self-test when important facts about the restraint ț Front passenger front air bag off the ignition is switched on and in regular systems of the vehicle. indicator lamp intervals while the engine is running. This The restraint systems are facilitates early detection of malfunctions. ț Front passenger seat with Occupant The = indicator lamp in the instrument ț Seat belts Classification System (OCS) cluster (୴ page 26) comes on when the ț Child restraints Although independent systems, their pro- ignition is switched on and goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine has ț tective functions work in conjunction with Lower Anchors and Tethers for been started. CHildren (LATCH) each other. The SRS components are in operational Additional protection potential provide i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys- readiness when the = indicator lamp is ț Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) tems for infants and children, see “Children in not lit when the engine is running. ୴ with the vehicle” ( page 51). A malfunction in the system has been ț Air bags detected if the = indicator lamp: ț Air bag control unit (with crash ț fails to go out after approximately sensors) 4 seconds after the engine was started ț Emergency Tensioning Device ț does not come on at all (ETD) for seat belts ț comes on after the engine was started ț Seat belt force limiter or while driving ț Active head restraints

Information Provided by:Provided Information 34 Safety and Security Occupant safety

If it is necessary to modify an air bag system Warning! G Warning! G to accommodate a person with disabilities, Modifications to or work improperly con- In the event that the = indicator lamp contact your local authorized ducted on restraint systems (such as seat comes on during driving or does not come Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer belts and anchors, Emergency Tensioning on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Devices (ETDs), seat belt force limiters or air malfunction. For your safety, we strongly (1-800-367-6372) for details. bags) or their wiring, as well as tampering recommend that you contact an authorized with interconnected electronic systems, can Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have lead to the restraint systems no longer func- the system checked; otherwise the SRS may tioning as intended. not deploy when needed in an accident, Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices which could result in serious or fatal injury, (ETDs), for example, could deploy inadvert- or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec- ently or fail to deploy in accidents although essarily which could also result in injury. the deceleration threshold for air bag de- In addition, improper work on the SRS ployment is exceeded. Therefore, never creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera- modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper tive or causing unintended air bag deploy- with electronic components or their soft- ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only ware. be performed by qualified technicians. Con- tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 35 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Air bags ț Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possi- Warning! G ble rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance G To reduce the risk of injury when the front Warning! from the center of the driver’s breast- air bags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the air bag cover Air bags are designed to reduce the poten- driver and front passenger to always be in a on the steering wheel must be at least tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal improperly seated position and to wear their 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should pacts (front air bags), side impacts (front respective seat belt. be able to accomplish this by a combina- side impact air bags, rear side impact air For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel. If you have any prob- bags* and window curtain air bags) or roll- collision always be in normal seated position lems, please see an authorized overs (window curtain air bags). However, with your back against the backrest. Fasten Mercedes-Benz Center. no system available today can totally elimi- your seat belt and make sure it is properly ț nate injuries and fatalities. positioned on your body. Do not lean your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard. The deployment of the air bags temporarily Since the air bag inflates with considerable ț Keep hands on the outside of steering releases a small amount of dust from the air speed and force, a proper seating and hands bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in- on steering wheel position will help to keep side the rim can increase the risk and to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in you at a safe distance from the air bag. potential severity of hand/arm injury the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem- Occupants who are unbelted, out of position when driver’s front air bag inflates. porary breathing difficulty for people with or too close to the air bag can be seriously ț asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid Adjust the front passenger seat as far as injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates possible rearward from the dashboard this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle with great force in the blink of an eye: when the seat is occupied. as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any ț Sit properly belted in a nearly upright breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the position with your back against the seat vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get backrest. fresh air by opening a window or door.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 36 Safety and Security Occupant safety

ț Always sit as upright as possible, prop- needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in i Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), and in side erly use the seat belts and use an appro- order to do its job. impacts (front side impact air bags, rear side im- priately sized infant restraint, toddler To help avoid the possibility of injury, please pact* air bags, and window curtain air bags) restraint, or booster seat recommended which exceed preset thresholds, and in certain for the size and weight of the child. follow these guidelines: rollovers (window curtain air bags). Only during Failure to follow these instructions can (1) Always sit as upright as possible, these events will they provide their supplemental result in severe injuries to you or other properly use the seat belts, and for all protection. occupants. children 12 years old and under, use an The driver and passengers should always wear appropriately sized infant restraint, tod- If you sell your vehicle, it is important that their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for dler restraint, or booster seat recom- air bags to provide their supplemental protec- you make the buyer aware of this safety mended for the size and weight of the tion. information. Be sure to give the buyer this child. In case of other types of impacts and impacts be- Operator’s Manual. (2) Always wear seat belts properly. low air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be protected to the extent possible by a properly Warning! G fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also needed to provide the best possible pro- Accident research shows that the safest tection in a rollover. place for children in an automobile is in the We caution you not to rely on the presence of the rear seat. air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt. There is a possibility for a side impact air It is important to your safety and that of your pas- bag related injury if occupants, especially sengers that you replace deployed air bags and children, are not properly seated or re- repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental strained when next to a front side impact air crash protection for occupants. bag and/or rear side impact air bag* which

Information Provided by:Provided Information 37 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Safety guidelines for the seat belt, ț Do not pass seat belt over sharp edges. ț Do not hang items such as coat hangers emergency tensioning device and They could tear. from the coat hooks or handles over the air bag ț Do not make any modification that could door. These items may turn into projec- change the effectiveness of the seat tiles and cause head and other injuries Warning! G belts. when the window curtain air bag is deployed. ț Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this ț ț Damaged seat belts or seat belt that may severely weaken them. In a crash Air bag system components will be hot were highly stressed in an accident they may not be able to provide ade- after an air bag has inflated. Do not must be replaced and their anchoring quate protection. touch. points must also be checked. Only use ț ț No modifications of any kind may be Never place your feet on the instrument seat belts installed or supplied at an au- panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or keep both feet on the floor in front of the ț Air bags and Emergency Tensioning removing any component or part of the seat. Devices (ETDs) contain Perchlorate SRS, the installation of additional trim ț In addition, improper repair work on the material, which may require special han- material, badges, etc. over the steering SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS dling and regard for the environment. wheel hub, front passenger front air bag inoperative or causing unintended air Check with your local government’s dis- cover, outboard sides of the seat bag deployment. Work on the SRS must posal guidelines. California residents, backrests, door trim panels, or door therefore only be performed by qualified see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazard- frame trims, and installation of addition- technicians. Contact an authorized ousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. al electrical/electronic equipment on or Mercedes-Benz Center. ț Air bags and pyrotechnic emergency near SRS components and wiring. Keep tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed area between air bags and occupants to function on a one-time-only basis. An free from objects (e.g. packages, purs- air bag or ETD that is deployed must be es, umbrellas, etc.). replaced.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 38 Safety and Security Occupant safety

When you sell your vehicle we strongly ț in the event of certain frontal impacts ț For your protection and the protection urge you to give notice to the subsequent of others, when scrapping the air bag ț if impact exceeds a preset deployment unit or emergency tensioning device, owner that it is equipped with an SRS by threshold our safety instructions must be fol- alerting them to the applicable section in ț lowed. These instructions are available the Operator’s Manual. if the system determines that airbag from your authorized Mercedes-Benz deployment can offer additional pro- Center. Front air bags tection to that provided by the seat belt ț Given the considerable deployment ț depending on whether the seat belt is speed, required inflation volume, and in use the textile structure of the air bags, ț there is the possibility of abrasions or independently of the front side impact other, potentially more serious injuries air bags, rear side impact air bags* resulting from air bag deployment. and/or the window curtain air bags. i The front air bags in this vehicle have been designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the Warning! G air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera- Only use seat covers which have been 1 Driver air bag tion as assessed by the air bag control unit. tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for 2 Front passenger front air bag On the front passenger-side, the front air bag de- your vehicle model. Using other seat covers ployment is additionally influenced by the pas- may interfere with or prevent the The front air bags are designed to provide senger’s weight category as identified by the deployment of the front side impact air bags increased protection for the driver and Occupant Classification System (OCS) or the rear side impact air bags. Contact an front passenger against the risk of injuries (୴ page 41). authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for avail- to the head and thorax. The lighter the front passenger-side occupant, ability. Driver and front passenger front air bag are the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for the second stage inflation of the air bag. deployed: Information Provided by:Provided Information 39 Safety and Security Occupant safety

The front air bags will not deploy in im- Front side impact air bags and rear side The front side impact air bags 1 and the pacts which do not exceed the system’s impact air bags* rear side impact air bags* 2 are deployment thresholds. You will then be deployed: protected by the fastened seat belts. ț on the impacted side of the vehicle The front airbags are not deployed in the ț in impacts exceeding a preset deploy- event of a rollover unless the vehicle's rate ment threshold of longitudinal deceleration or acceleration exceeds the preset deployment threshold ț independently of the front air bags for the front air bags. The front passenger front side impact air The front passenger front air bag 2 bag 1 will not deploy if the OCS senses (୴ page 39) will only be deployed if: that the front passenger seat is empty and the front passenger seat belt is not fas- ț the system, based on OCS weight sen- 1 Front side impact air bag tened (latch plate is not inserted into the sor readings, senses that the front 2 Rear side impact air bag* buckle). With an empty front passenger passenger seat is occupied When deployed, the front side impact air seat and the seat belt fastened (latch plate ț the 5/ indicator lamp in the bags 1 and/or the rear side impact air properly inserted into buckle) the front center console is not lit (୴ page 45) bags* 2 are designed to provide in- passenger side impact air bag 1 will creased protection for the thorax (but not deploy regardless of the empty seat. ț the impact exceeds a preset deploy- the head, neck and arms) of the occupants ment threshold The front side impact air bags and the on the side of the vehicle on which the im- 1 rear side impact air bags* are not de- pact occurs. 2 ployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 40 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Window curtain air bags The window curtain air bags are deployed: Occupant Classification System ț on the impacted side of the vehicle The Occupant Classification System (OCS) ț in impacts exceeding a preset deploy- automatically turns the front passenger ment threshold front air bag on or off based on the classi- ț independently of the front air bags fied occupant weight category determined by weight sensor readings from the front ț regardless of whether the front-pas- passenger seat. senger seat is occupied i The system does not deactivate the front ț in certain vehicle rollovers passenger side impact air bag, the window cur- The side window curtain air bags are not tain air bag and the emergency tensioning de- 1 Window curtain air bag deployed in impacts which do not exceed vice. When deployed, the window curtain air the system’s deployment threshold. Occupants must sit properly belted in a bags 1 are designed to provide increased position that is as upright as possible with protection for the head (but not the chest their back against the seat backrest and or arms) of the occupants on the side of feet on the floor to be correctly classified. the vehicle on which the impact occurs. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by lean- The window curtain air bags fill up the area ing on armrests), the OCS may not be able indicated by the arrows. to properly approximate the occupant’s weight category.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 41 Safety and Security Occupant safety

i If your seat, including your trim cover and remain illuminated, indicating that the front cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take Warning! G passenger front air bag is deactivated. the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the 5/ indicator lamp illuminates When the OCS senses that the front passen- Only seat accessories approved by when an adult or someone larger than a ger seat is classified as being empty, the Mercedes-Benz may be used. small individual is in the front passenger 5/ indicator lamp will illuminate seat, have the front passenger re-position when the engine is started and remain Both driver and the front passenger should himself or herself in the seat until the illuminated, indicating that the front always use the 5/ indicator lamp 5/ indicator lamp goes out, or check passenger front air bag is deactivated. as an indication of whether or not the front whether objects are caught under or around passenger is properly positioned. When the OCS senses that the front passen- the seat. ger seat occupant is classified as being In the event of a collision, the air bag control heavier than the weight of a typical unit will not allow front passenger front air 12-month-old child seated in a standard bag deployment when the OCS classified child restraint or as being a small individual the front passenger seat occupant as being (such as a young teenager or a small adult), up to or less than the weight of a typical the 5/ indicator lamp will illuminate 12-month-old child in a standard child for approximately 6 seconds when the restraint or if the front passenger seat is engine is started and then, depending on sensed as being empty. occupant weight sensor readings from the When the OCS senses that the front passen- seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the ger seat occupant is classified as being up 5/ indicator lamp illuminated, the to or less than the weight of a typical front passenger front air bag is deactivated. 12-month-old child in a standard child With the 5/indicator lamp out, the restraint, the 5/ indicator lamp will front passenger front air bag is activated. illuminate when the engine is started and

Information Provided by:Provided Information 42 Safety and Security Occupant safety

When the OCS senses that the front passen- ț front passenger’s weight category as Children can be killed or seriously injured by ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or identified by the Occupant Classification an inflating air bag. Note the following im- someone larger than a small individual, the System (OCS). portant information when circumstances re- 5/indicator lamp will illuminate for quire you to place a child in the front approximately 6 seconds when the engine is More information about air bag display passenger seat: ୴ started and then go out, indicating that the messages ( page 393). ț Your vehicle is equipped with air bag front passenger front air bag is activated. technology designed to turn off the front If the 5/ indicator lamp is Warning! G passenger front air bag in your vehicle illuminated, the front passenger front air when the system senses the weight of a bag is deactivated and will not be deployed. According to accident statistics, children typical 12-month-old child or less along with the weight of a standard appropri- are safer when properly restrained in the If the 5/ indicator lamp is not ate child restraint on the front passen- rear seating positions than in the front seat- illuminated, the front passenger front air ger seat. ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend bag is activated and will be deployed: ț that children be placed in the rear seats A child in a rear-facing child restraint on ț the front passenger seat will be in the event of certain frontal impacts whenever possible. Regardless of seating seriously injured or even killed if the ț if impact exceeds a preset deployment position, children 12 years old and under front passenger front air bag inflates in threshold must be seated and properly secured in an a collision which could occur under ț independently of the front side impact appropriate infant or child restraint recom- some circumstances, even with the air air bags and/or rear side impact air mended for the size and weight of the child. bag technology installed in your vehicle. bags*. The infant or child restraint must be properly The only means to completely eliminate If the front passenger front air bag is secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat this risk is to never place a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the front deployed, the rate of inflation will be belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors seat. We therefore strongly recommend influenced by: and top tether strap, fully in accordance that you always place a child in a rear- ț the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration with the child seat manufacturer’s facing child restraint in the back seat. ୴୴ as assessed by the air bag control unit instructions. Information Provided by:Provided Information 43 Safety and Security Occupant safety

୴୴ ț If you must install a rear-facing child ț If you have to place a child in a i Deployment of the driver front air bag does restraint on the front passenger seat forward-facing child restraint on the not mean that the front passenger front air bag also should have deployed. because circumstances require you to front passenger seat, move the seat as do so, make sure the 5/ indica- far back as possible, use the proper The Occupant Classification System (୴ page 41) tor lamp is illuminated, indicating that child restraint recommended for the may have determined: the front passenger front air bag is deac- age, size and weight of the child, and ț that the seat was empty or occupied by the tivated. Should the 5/ indicator secure child restraint with the vehicle’s weight up to or less than that of a typical lamp not illuminate or go out while the seat belt according to the child seat 12-month-old child seated in a standard restraint is installed, please check in- manufacturer’s instructions. For child restraint – both instances where the stallation. Periodically check the children larger than the typical system suppresses deployment of the front 5/ indicator lamp while driving 12-month-old child, the front passenger passenger front air bag even though the im- to make sure the 5/ indicator front air bag may or may not be pact met the criteria and was of sufficient lamp is illuminated. activated. severity to deploy the driver front air bag. If the 5/ indicator lamp goes out ț that the seat was occupied by a small individ- or remains out, do not transport a child ual (such as a young teenager or a small on the front passenger seat until the adult) or a child weighing more than the system has been repaired. A child in a weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a rear-facing child restraint on the front standard child restraint – instances where the system may suppress deployment of the passenger seat will be seriously injured front passenger front air bag even though or even killed if the front passenger front the impact met the criteria and was of suffi- air bag inflates. cient severity to deploy the driver front air bag.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 44 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Self-test Occupant Classification Have the system checked as soon as possi- System ble by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. After turning the SmartKey in the starter Only have the seat repaired or replaced at switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (Canada only) once or twice, the 5/ indicator In order to ensure proper operation of the lamp 1 illuminates. If an adult occupant is air bag system and OCS: properly sitting on the front passenger ț Sit properly belted in a position that is seat and the system senses the occupant as upright as possible with your back as being an adult, the 5/ indicator 1 Front passenger front air bag off against the seat backrest. lamp will illuminate and go out after ap- indicator lamp ț While seated, an occupant should not proximately 6 seconds. The 5/ indicator lamp 1 will be position him/herself in such a way as to If the seat is not occupied and the system cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted illuminated, except with the SmartKey senses the front passenger seat as being from the seat bottom as this may result removed from the starter switch or with empty, the 5/ indicator lamp will the starter switch in position 0. in the OCS being unable to correctly approximate the occupant’s weight illuminate and not go out. category. G Warning! ț Read and observe all warnings in this Warning! G chapter. If the = indicator lamp and the If the 5/indicator lamp should not il- 5/indicator lamp are lit at the same luminate, the system is not functioning. You time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Classification System. The front passenger Center before seating any child on the front front air bag will be deactivated in this case. passenger seat.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 45 Safety and Security Occupant safety

For more information, see the “Practical Seat belts hints” section (୴ page 385). Warning! G The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all Always fasten your seat belt before driving Warning! G 50 states, the District of Columbia, the off. Always make sure all of your passengers U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. are properly restrained. Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces Even where this is not the case, all vehicle Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi- occupants should have their seat belts fas- sition your seat belt greatly increases your cation System. The bottom of the child seat tened whenever the vehicle is in motion. risk of injuries and their likely severity in an must make full contact with the passenger accident. You and your passengers should For more information, see “Fastening the always wear seat belts. seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat belts” (୴ page 105). seat could cause injuries to the child in case If you are ever in an accident, your injuries of an accident, instead of increasing protec- i For information on infants and children trav- can be considerably more severe without tion for the child. eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys- your seat belt properly buckled. tems for infants and children, see “Children in Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the vehicle” (୴ page 51). Without your seat belt buckled, you are installation of child seats. much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as they are designed for, if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 46 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY backrest in an excessively reclined position highly stressed in an accident must be re- ț Seat belts can only work when used as this can be dangerous. You could slide placed and their anchoring points must also properly. Never wear seat belts in any under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide be checked. other way than as described in this sec- under it, the seat belt would apply force at Only use seat belts which have been tion, as that could result in serious inju- the abdomen or neck. That could cause se- approved by Mercedes-Benz. ries in case of an accident. rious or even fatal injuries. The seat back- ț Each occupant should wear their seat Do not make any modifications to the seat rest and seat belt provide the best restraint belt at all times, because seat belts help belts. This can lead to unintended activation when the wearer is in a nearly upright posi- reduce the likelihood of and potential tion and the seat belt is properly positioned of the ETDs or to failure. severity of injuries in accidents, includ- on the body. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may ing rollovers. The integrated restraint severely weaken them. In a crash they may system includes SRS (driver air bag, pas- not be able to provide adequate protection. senger front air bag, front side impact air bags, rear side impact air bags*, win- Warning! G Have all work carried out only by qualified dow curtain air bags for side windows), technicians. Contact an authorized ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning de- Never let more people ride in the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Center. vice with seat belt force limiters), and than there are seat belts available. Make front seat knee bolsters. The system is sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor- designed to enhance the protection of- rectly restrained with a separate seat belt. fered to properly belted occupants in Never use a seat belt for more than one per- certain frontal (front air bags and ETD) son at a time. and side (front side impact air bags, rear side impact air bags*, window curtain air bags and ETD) ୴୴

Information Provided by:Provided Information 47 Safety and Security Occupant safety

୴୴ Enhanced seat belt reminder system impacts which exceed preset deploy- ț Seat belts should not be worn twisted. ment thresholds and in certain rollovers In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full When the engine is started, the seat belt (window curtain air bags and ETD). width of the seat belt to distribute telltale < will always illuminate for impact forces. The twisted seat belt ț 6 seconds to remind you and your passen- Never wear the shoulder belt under your against your body could cause injuries. arm, against your neck or off your shoul- gers to fasten your seat belts. ț Pregnant women should also always use der. In a frontal crash, your body would If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened move too far forward. That would a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible when the engine is started, an additional increase the chance of head and neck warning chime will also sound for a maxi- injuries. The seat belt would also apply on the hips to avoid any possible mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’ s too much force to the ribs or abdomen, pressure on the abdomen. seat belt is fastened. which could severely injure internal ț Never place your feet on the instrument organs such as your liver or spleen. panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the ț Never wear seat belts over rigid or keep both feet on the floor in front of the front passenger’s seat belt (with the front breakable objects in or on your clothing, seat. passenger seat occupied) is not fastened such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as ț When using a seat belt to secure infant with front doors closed, these might cause injuries. restraint, toddler restraint, or booster ț the seat belt telltale < remains illu- ț Position the lap belt as low as possible seat, always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. minated for as long as either the driv- on your hips and not across the abdo- er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not men. If the seat belt is positioned across fastened. your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash. ț and if the vehicle speed once exceeds ț Never use a seat belt for more than one 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt telltale < starts flashing and a around a person and another person or warning chime sounds with increasing other objects.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 48 Safety and Security Occupant safety

intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds For more information, see “Practical hints” In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from or until the driver’s and the front (୴ page 380). the seat belts in such a way that the seat passenger’s seat belt are fastened. belts fit more snugly against the body. Seat Emergency tensioning device (ETD), If you and/or your front passenger belt force limiters, when activated, are em- seat belt force limiter release the seat belt during driving, the ployed to help reduce the peak force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a seat belt telltale < starts flashing The seat belts are equipped with Emergen- and a warning chime sounds as cy Tensioning Devices (ETDs) and seat belt crash. described before. force limiters. i ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat posi- If the driver’s or the front passenger’s The ETD is designed to activate in the tion or incorrectly worn seat belts. seat belt remains unfastened after following cases: ETDs do not pull occupants back toward the backrest. 60 seconds, the warning chime stops ț in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed- sounding, the seat belt telltale < ing the system deployment threshold stops flashing but continues to be Warning! G illuminated. ț in certain vehicle rollovers After a vehicle standstill, the warning ț if the restraint systems are operational A pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Device chime reactivates and the seat belt and functioning correctly, (ETD) that was activated must be replaced. telltale < flashes again when the see = indicator lamp (୴ page 382) When disposing of the pyrotechnic Emer- vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph gency Tensioning Device (ETD), our safety i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti- (25 km/h). vate if the front seat belt is fastened (latch plate instructions must be followed. These are available at an authorized Mercedes-Benz The seat belt telltale < will only go out properly inserted into buckle). Center. if both the driver’s and the front passen- The ETDs for the rear seats will activate with or ger’s seat belt (with the front passenger without the respective seat belt fastened. seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is opened.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 49 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Active head restraints If the active head restraints have been triggered in an accident, the active head re- Warning! G The active head restraints are intended to straints must be reset. Otherwise, the offer the driver and front passenger inactive head restraints cannot offer any ad- For your protection, drive only with properly creased protection from whiplash type in- ditional protection in the event of another positioned head restraints. juries. In the event of a rear-end collision, rear-end collision. Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to the active head restraints on the driver’s For information on resetting the activated the head as possible and the center of the and front passenger’s seats are designed active head restraints, see “Resetting acti- head restraint supports the back of the head to move forward in the direction of travel, vated head restraints” (୴ page 427). at eye level. This will reduce the potential for providing the head with increased support injury to the head and neck in the event of earlier on in the collision sequence. The ac- You cannot remove the active head re- an accident or similar situation. tive head restraints move forward whether straint on the driver’s and front passen- the seat is occupied or not. ger’s seats. For information on head restraint adjust- For removal contact an authorized ment, see “Adjusting rear head restraints” Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! G (୴ page 89).

Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to Warning! G the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the active head restraints may not function prop- Only use seat or head restraint covers which erly or offer the degree of protection they have been tested and approved by were designed for in the event of an acci- Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. dent. Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraints. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability. Information Provided by:Provided Information 50 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Children in the vehicle Infant and child restraint systems Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s We recommend all infants and children be If an infant or child is traveling with you in metal parts, for example, could become very properly restrained at all times while the the vehicle: hot, and the child could be burned on these vehicle is in motion. ̈ Secure the child using an infant or child parts. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s restraint appropriate to the age and If children open a door, they could seat belt have special seat belt retractors size of the child. ț injure other persons for secure fastening of child restraints. ̈ Make sure the infant or child is ț To fasten a child restraint, follow child properly secured at all times while the get out of the car and injure themselves or be injured by following traffic restraint instructions for mounting. Then vehicle is in motion. Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a G increases a child’s risk of injury in the event Warning! of ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is acti- ț Do not leave children unattended in the ve- strong braking maneuvers vated. The seat belt is now locked. Push hicle, even if they are secured in a child re- ț sudden changes of direction down on child restraint to take up any straint system. The children could ț an accident slack. ț injure themselves on parts of the vehicle To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and ț be seriously or fatally injured through let seat belt retract completely. To deacti- excessive exposure to extreme heat or vate the special seat belt retractor for the cold front passenger seat, the front passenger seat must be in the most backward position. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 51 Safety and Security Occupant safety

A statement by the child restraint manu- Warning! G facturer of compliance with these stan- Warning! G dards can be found on the instruction label Never release the seat belt buckle while the on the restraint and in the instruction man- According to accident statistics, children vehicle is in motion, since the special seat ual provided with the restraint. are safer when properly restrained in the belt retractor will be deactivated. rear seating positions than in the front seat- When using any infant or child restraint ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend system, make sure to carefully read and that children be placed in the rear seats i Information on child seats with mounting fit- follow all manufacturer’s instructions for tings for tether anchorages (୴ page 54). whenever possible. Regardless of seating installation and use. position, children 12 years old and under For information on LATCH-type child seat must be seated and properly secured in an mounts (୴ page 55). Please read and observe warning labels af- fixed to the inside of the vehicle and to appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler The use of infant or child restraints is re- infant or child restraints. restraint, or booster seat recommended for quired by law in all 50 states, the District the size and weight of the child. of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Ca- The infant or child restraint must be properly nadian provinces. secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat Infants and small children should be seat- belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors ed in an appropriate infant or child re- and top tether strap, fully in accordance straint system properly secured in with the child seat manufacturer’s accordance with the manufacturer’s in- instructions. structions for the child restraint, that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadi- an Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 52 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Occupants, especially children, should al- ț A child in a rear-facing child restraint on Periodically check the 5/ indica- ways sit as upright as possible, properly use the front passenger seat will be serious- tor lamp while driving to make sure the the seat belts and use an appropriately sized ly injured or even killed if the front 5/ indicator lamp is illuminated. infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster passenger front air bag inflates in a If the 5/ indicator lamp goes out seat recommended for the size and weight collision which could occur under some or remains out, do not transport a child circumstances, even with the air bag of the child. on the front passenger seat until the technology installed in your vehicle. The system has been repaired. Children can be killed or seriously injured by only means to completely eliminate this an inflating air bag. Note the following im- risk is to never place a child in a rear-fac- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on portant information when circumstances ing child restraint in the front seat. We the front passenger seat will be serious- require you to place a child in the front therefore strongly recommend that you ly injured or even killed if the front pas- passenger seat: always place a child in a rear-facing senger front air bag inflates. child restraint in the back seat. ț Your vehicle is equipped with air bag ț If you have to place a child in a for- ț technology designed to turn off the front If you must install a rear-facing child ward-facing child restraint on the front passenger front air bag in your vehicle restraint on the front passenger seat be- passenger seat, move the seat as far when the OCS senses the weight of a cause circumstances require you to do back as possible, use the proper child typical 12-month-old child or less along so, make sure the 5/ indicator restraint recommended for the age, size with the weight of a standard lamp is illuminated, indicating that the and weight of the child, and secure child appropriate child restraint on the front front passenger front air bag is deacti- restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt ac- passenger seat. vated. Should the 5/ indicator cording to the child seat manufacturer’s lamp not illuminate or go out while the instructions. For children larger than the restraint is installed, please check in- typical 12-month-old child, the front stallation. passenger front air bag may or may not be activated.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 53 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Installation of infant and child restraint When the child restraint is not in use, Warning! G systems remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint Infants and small children should never G share a seat belt with another occupant. from becoming a projectile in the event of Warning! During an accident, they could be crushed an accident. Always lock backrest in its upright position between the occupant and seat belt. Do not leave children unattended in the when rear seat bench is occupied by pas- vehicle, even if the children are secured in a A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is sengers, before installing top tether straps, child restraint system. Unsupervised chil- significantly increased if the child restraints or the extended cargo compartment is not in dren in a child restraint system may use are not properly secured in the vehicle use. Check for secure locking by pushing vehicle equipment and may cause an acci- and/or the child is not properly secured in and pulling on the backrest. If the seat back- dent and/or serious personal injury. the child restraint. rest is not properly locked, the seat back- Children too big for a toddler restraint must rest could fold. The child seat would no ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi- longer be properly supported or positioned tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul- to provide its intended benefit. That could der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be cause serious or even fatal injuries. necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs until they This vehicle is equipped with tether an- reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits chorages for a top tether strap at each of properly without a booster. the rear seating positions. Top tether straps enable an additional connection to be made between child restraint systems secured with LATCH-type anchors and rear seats. This can further reduce the risk of injury. Information Provided by:Provided Information 54 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Once the top tether anchorage hook 4 is attached, the child restraint itself can be secured. ̈ Install the child restraint system and tighten the top tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. After removing the child restraint system and the top tether strap. 1 Rear seat head restraint 3 Anchorage ring ̈ Pull down and close cover 2 from the 2 Cover of anchorage ring 4 Top tether anchorage hook respective anchorage ring 3. 3 Anchorage ring ̈ Securely fasten hook 4, which is part ̈ Move the respective head restraint 1 of the tether strap, to anchorage Child seat anchors – LATCH-type to its uppermost position (୴ page 89). ring 3. This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) ̈ Lift up cover 2 from anchorage i For safety reasons, make sure hook 4 ring 3. attaches to ring 3 beyond the safety catch, as type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for illustrated. the installation of a LATCH-type child seat ̈ Guide tether strap between head with matching mounting fittings. restraint 1 and top of seat back. ̈ Lower head restraint 1 if necessary (୴ page 89). ̈ Make sure the tether strap is not twisted. Make sure the top tether strap can pass freely between head restraint 1 and top of seat backrest

Information Provided by:Provided Information 55 Safety and Security Occupant safety

i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be Warning! G used and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat according to Children too big for a toddler restraint must the manufacturer’s instructions. ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a Split rear bench seat* booster. ̈ Install child seat according to the Install child seat according to manufactur- manufacturer’s instructions. er’s instructions. A rigid connection is established be- 1 Indicator The child seat must be firmly attached to the tween the child seat and the body of 2 Cover right and left side anchors. the vehicle. 3 Anchors An incorrectly mounted child seat may come ! Make sure the seat belt for the center seat ̈ loose during an accident which could result Remove covers 1 from anchors 3 by can operate freely with a child seat installed. in serious injury or death to the child. pulling it in direction of arrow. ̈ Damaged or impact damaged child seats or Store covers 1, for example in the child seat anchor fittings must be replaced. storage compartment of the rear center armrest. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a child restraint system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 56 Safety and Security Occupant safety

Blocking of rear door window operation ̈ Deactivating: Press override switch 2 again. With the override switch you can disable Indicator lamp 1 goes out. the rear side window switches in the rear door panels. The rear door windows can again be operated using the respective switch located in the rear doors. Warning! G For more information on power windows, Activate the override switch when children see the “Controls in detail” section are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. (୴ page 120). The children may otherwise injure them- 1 Indicator lamp selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win- 2 Override switch dow opening. ̈ Activating: Press override switch 2. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Indicator lamp 1 comes on. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) from the starter switch, take The rear door windows can no longer it with you, and lock your vehicle. Do not be operated using the respective leave children unattended in the vehicle, or switch located in the rear doors. with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s i Operation of the rear door windows with the unsupervised access to a vehicle could re- switches located in the driver’s door is still sult in an accident and/or serious personal possible. injury.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 57 Safety and Security Panic alarm

i Canada only: ̈ Activating: Press and hold Â but- This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry ton for at least 1 second. Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate briefly. (1) This device may not cause interference, and ̈ (2) this device must accept any interference re- Deactivating: Press Â button ceived, including interference that may again. cause undesired operation of the device. or Any unauthorized modification to this device ̈ could void the user’s authority to operate the Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey 1 Â button equipment. with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) in starter switch. i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC or Rules. Operation is subject to the following two ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop conditions: button (Canada only) (୴ page 84). (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) must be inside the (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may vehicle. cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 58 Safety and Security Driving safety systems ̄ Driving safety systems This section contains information about The ABS is functional above a speed of Always adapt your driving style to the pre- the following driving safety systems: approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) indepen- vailing road and weather conditions and dent of road surface conditions. ț ABS (Antilock Brake System) keep a safe distance to other road users and On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will ț Adaptive Brake objects on the street. respond even to light brake pressure. ț BAS (Brake Assist System) i In winter operation, the maximum effective- The - indicator lamp in the instrument ț EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning) ness of the ABS, BAS, EBP, ESP® and 4MATIC is cluster (୴ page 26) comes on when you only achieved with winter tires (୴ page 360), or ț ® switch on the ignition. It goes out when the ESP (Electronic Stability Program) snow chains as required. engine is running. ț 4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic Trac- ABS tion System) Braking G At the instant one of the wheels is about to Warning! Warning! G lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in The following factors increase the risk of Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, the regulating mode. accidents: steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump- ̈ Keep firm and steady pressure on the ț Excessive speed, especially in turns ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of brake pedal while experiencing the pul- the ABS and significantly reduces braking ț Wet and slippery road surfaces sation. ୴୴ effectiveness. ț Following another vehicle too closely The driving safety systems described in this The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates section cannot reduce these risks or pre- the brake pressure so that the wheels do vent the natural laws of physics from acting not lock during braking. This allows you to on the vehicle. maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 59 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

୴୴Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure Adaptive Brake yields the advantages provided by the ABS, Warning! G namely braking power and the ability to Adaptive Brake provides a high level of steer the vehicle. The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of braking safety as well as increased braking physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can comfort. It is coupled with ABS, ESP® and The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- it increase braking or steering efficiency BAS. Adaptive Brake takes driver and vehi- tion of hazardous road conditions and beyond that afforded by the condition of the cle characteristics into consideration, thus functions as a reminder to take extra care vehicle brakes and tires or the traction achieving an optimal braking effect. while driving. afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from exces- BAS Emergency brake maneuver sive speed in turns, following another ̈ Keep continuous full pressure on the vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in brake pedal. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can emergency situations. If you apply the prevent accidents. brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby poten- Warning! G The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle tially reducing the braking distance. must never be exploited in a reckless or dan- When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS gerous manner which could jeopardize the ̈ Apply continuous full braking pressure ® EBP, ESP and hill start assist are also user’s safety or the safety of others. until the emergency braking situation is switched off. over. When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels For more information, see “Practical hints” The ABS will prevent the wheels from may lock during hard braking, reducing (୴ page 374). locking. steering capability and extending the brak- When you release the brake pedal, the ing distance. brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 60 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

EBP The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle Warning! G must never be exploited in a reckless or dan- The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) gerous manner which could jeopardize the When the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake enhances braking effectiveness by allow- user’s safety or the safety of others. system is still functioning normally, but with- ing the rear brakes to supply a greater pro- out the additional brake boost available that portion of the braking effort in straight line BAS would normally provide in an emergen- For more information, see “Practical hints” braking without a loss of vehicle stability. cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking section (୴ page 374). distance may increase. Warning! G

G If the EBP malfunctions, the ABS, BAS, ESP® Warning! and hill start assist are also switched off.

The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake sys- physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can tem will still function with full brake boost. it increase braking efficiency beyond that af- However, the rear wheels could lock up dur- forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes ing emergency braking situations, for exam- and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS ple. You could lose control of the vehicle and cannot prevent accidents, including those cause an accident. Adapt your driving style resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol- to the changed driving characteristics. lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 61 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

ESP® Warning! G Warning! G The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is operational as soon as the engine is run- Never switch off the ESP® when you see the The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of ning and monitors the vehicle’s traction ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the in- physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can (force of adhesive friction between the strument cluster. In this case proceed as fol- it increase the traction afforded. The ESP® tires and the road surface) and handling. lows: cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spin- ț While driving off, apply as little throttle hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap- as possible. skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca- plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and ț While driving, ease up on the accelera- pabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must by limiting the engine output, the ESP® tor. never be exploited in a reckless or danger- works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is ț Adapt your speed and driving style to ous manner which could jeopardize the us- especially useful while driving off and on the prevailing road conditions. ® er’s safety or the safety of others. wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP Failure to observe these guidelines could also stabilizes the vehicle during braking cause the vehicle to skid. and steering maneuvers. i The cruise control is switched off when the The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result- ESP® engages. ® The ESP warning lamp v in the instru- ing from excessive speed. ment cluster flashes when the ESP® is en- i The ESP® will only function properly if you gaged. use wheels of the recommended tire size (୴ page 467). The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). It goes out when the engine is running.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 62 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: Electronic traction system Switching off the ESP® ® Because the ESP operates automatically, the The electronic traction system is a compo- engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey ® G in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO nent of ESP . Warning! (Canada only) start/stop button* in position 0 The electronic traction system improves The ESP® should not be switched off during or 1) when the vehicle’s ability to utilize available trac- normal driving other than in the circum- ț the parking brake is being tested on a brake tion, especially under slippery road condi- stances described below. Disabling of the test dynamometer tions by applying the brakes to a spinning system will reduce vehicle stability in stan- ț the vehicle is being towed with the front axle wheel. raised dard driving maneuvers. When you switch off the ESP®, the elec- ® Do not switch off the ESP® when a Active braking action through the ESP may oth- tronic traction system is still enabled. erwise seriously damage the brake system. Minispare wheel is mounted. For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see G “Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC) Warning! To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch ® with the ESP ” (e page 65). off the ESP® in driving situations where it If you are driving too fast, the electronic For more information, see “Practical hints” would be advantageous to have the drive traction system cannot reduce the risk of an section (୴ page 380) and (୴ page 387). wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for accident. better grip such as: The electronic traction system cannot pre- ț when driving with snow chains vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle. ț in deep snow ț in sand or gravel

Information Provided by:Provided Information 63 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

i When the ESP® is switched off and one or Warning! G more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warn- Warning! G ing lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes. Switch on the ESP® immediately if the afore- However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the ve- When the ESP® warning lamp v is illumi- mentioned circumstances do not apply any- hicle. nated continuously, the ESP® is switched off more. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize or is not operational due to a malfunction. the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a Vehicle stability in standard driving maneu- wheel is spinning. vers reduces. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- When you switch off the ESP® ing road conditions and to the non-operating ® ț the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle status of the ESP . ț the engine output is not limited, which allows the drive wheels to spin and ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP® switched off. This thus cut into surfaces for better grip may cause serious damage to the drivetrain ț the electronic traction system will still 1 ESP® off/on which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- ited Warranty. apply the brakes to a spinning wheel ̈ With the engine running, press ESP® ț ® switch 1 until the ESP® warning the ESP continues to operate when Switching on the ESP® you are braking lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on. ̈ Press ESP® switch 1. ț you cannot activate the cruise control The ESP® is switched off. The ESP® warning lamp v in the in- ț the cruise control switches off if strument cluster goes out. currently activated You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP® switched on.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 64 Safety and Security Driving safety systems

Four wheel electronic traction system ® Failure to observe these guidelines could ! Because the ESP operates automatically, (4MATIC) with the ESP® the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter cause the vehicle to skid. switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO (Canada Models with all-wheel-drive only. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result- only) start/stop button* in position 0 or 1) when ing from excessive speed. the parking brake is being tested on a brake test The 4MATIC improves vehicle’s ability to dynamometer. use available traction, e.g. during winter ® ! Do not tow with one axle raised. Active braking action through the ESP may operation in mountains under snowy otherwise seriously damage the front or rear axle conditions, by applying power to all four Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, brake system. wheels. which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Operational tests with the engine running can only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. Warning! G ! Performance testing must only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. i At highly demanding operating conditions, the electronic traction system may temporarily ® If you see the ESP warning lamp v Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged, switch off to prevent overheating of the drive flashing in the instrument cluster, proceed which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz wheel brakes. The message Currently Un- as follows: Limited Warranty. available See Operator’s Manual will then appear in the multifunction display while ț While driving off, apply as little throttle the ESP® warning lamp v is flashing. The as possible ESP® is still functioning normally. ț While driving, ease up on the accelerator ț Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions

Information Provided by:Provided Information 65 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems

Immobilizer i Starting the engine will also deactivate the ț a door is opened from the inside. immobilizer. ț the trunk is opened with the The immobilizer prevents unauthorized In case the engine cannot be started (yet the emergency release button. persons from starting your vehicle. vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not To cancel the alarm after it has been trig- When leaving the vehicle, always take the operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call gered, see “Canceling the alarm” SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or (୴ page 67). (Canada only) with you and lock the 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). vehicle. The engine can be started by i If the alarm stays on for more than anyone with a valid SmartKey or SmartKey Anti-theft alarm system 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) that is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid* system left inside the vehicle. (୴ page 295) provided Tele Aid* service was Once the alarm system has been armed, a subscribed to and properly activated, and that visual and audible alarm is triggered when necessary mobile phone, power supply and GPS Activating someone opens: coverage are available. ̈ With the SmartKey: Remove the ț a door SmartKey from the starter switch. ț the trunk ̈ With the KEYLESS-GO* (Canada ț only): Turn off the engine and open the the hood driver’s door. The alarm will stay on even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immedi- Deactivating ately closed. ̈ Switch on the ignition. The alarm system will also be triggered when ț the vehicle is opened with the 1 Indicator lamp mechanical key. Information Provided by:Provided Information 66 Safety and Security Anti-theft systems

̈ Arming: Lock the vehicle with the With the trunk open, close the trunk lid. The ve- ̈ Press the Œ or ‹ button on the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* (Canada hicle will lock and the turn signal lamps flash SmartKey or SmartKey with only). three times, and an acoustic signal sounds three KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only). times, to indicate that the alarm system is armed The turn signal lamps flash three times, and the vehicle is locked. In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada and an acoustic signal sounds three ̈ Disarming: Unlock your vehicle with only): times, to indicate that the alarm sys- the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* ̈ Grasp an outside door handle. tem is armed. (Canada only). The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after The turn signal lamps flash once, and (Canada only) must be within 3 ft (1 m) approximately 15 seconds after arming an acoustic signal sounds once, to of the vehicle. the alarm system. indicate that the alarm system is or i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three disarmed. times, and the acoustic signal does not sound ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO (Canada only) The vehicle will lock and the alarm system three times, one of the following elements may i start/stop button (୴ page 84). will rearm automatically after approximately 40 not be properly closed: seconds if neither a door nor the trunk lid was The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO ț a door opened. (Canada only) must be inside the vehi- ț the trunk cle. the alarm system is armed. Canceling the alarm With a door open, close the door and lock the ve- To cancel the alarm, do one of the hicle again. The turn signal lamps flash three times, and an acoustic signal sounds three following: times, to indicate that the alarm system is armed ̈ Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with and the vehicle is locked. If you open the un- KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) in the locked door again the alarm system will be trig- starter switch. gered. or Information Provided by:Provided Information 67 Information Provided by:Provided Information 68 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Instrument cluster Starter switch positions Control system Seats Audio system Steering wheel Driving systems Mirrors Air vents Memory function* (Canada only) Dual-zone automatic climate con- Fastening the seat belts trol Lighting 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only) Windshield wipers Trunk Power windows Power tilt/sliding sunroof Driving and parking Panorama roof with power Manual transmission tilt/sliding panel* Automatic transmission* Loading and storing Useful features

Information Provided by:Provided Information 69 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

SmartKey Warning! G Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and When leaving the vehicle, always remove the a removable mechanical key. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave The SmartKey provides an extended oper- children unattended in the vehicle, or with ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s advisable to only unlock the vehicle when unsupervised access to a vehicle could you are in close proximity to it. result in an accident and/or serious person- The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks, SmartKey with remote control al injury. when set to factory settings (୴ page 71): 1 ‹ Lock button ț the doors 2 Š Opening button for trunk ୴ Warning! G ț the trunk ( page 269) 3 Mechanical key locking tab ț the fuel filler flap 4 Œ Unlock button To prevent possible personal injury, always 5 Battery check lamp keep hands and fingers away from the door 6 Â Panic button (୴ page 58) or trunk lid opening when closing a door or the trunk. Be especially careful when small ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex- children are around. posing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 70 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i USA only: i You can also open and close the door win- Factory setting This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC dows and tilt/sliding sunroof, or the panorama Rules. Operation is subject to the following two roof with power tilt/ sliding panel* using the i Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic conditions: SmartKey (୴ page 123). lock and unlock confirmation signal feature. An acoustic signal will sound when the vehicle is (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with locked or unlocked using the SmartKey. ence, and ! the SmartKey, then either the batteries in the If you wish to activate or deactivate the feature, (2) this device must accept any interference re- SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is mal- or adjust its signal volume, contact an authorized ceived, including interference that may functioning or the vehicle batteries are drained. Mercedes-Benz Center. cause undesired operation. ț Check the batteries in the SmartKey and re- ̈ Global unlocking: Press button Œ. Any unauthorized modification to this device place them if necessary (୴ page 428). ț could void the user’s authority to operate the ț Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv- All turn signal lamps flash once. equipment. er’s door (୴ page 424) and trunk ț An acoustic signal sounds once. ୴ Canada only: ( page 425). i ț The locking knobs in the doors This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry ț Use the mechanical key to lock and trunk Canada. Operation is subject to the following (୴ page 272). move up. two conditions: ț Have the vehicle batteries and their connec- ț The anti-theft alarm system is dis- (1) This device may not cause interference, and tions checked (୴ page 446). armed. (2) this device must accept any interference re- If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact ț The locator lighting will also come ceived, including interference that may Roadside Assistance or an authorized on if it is dark and the feature is ac- cause undesired operation of the device. Mercedes-Benz Center. tivated in the control system Any unauthorized modification to this device (୴ page 172). could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 71 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

The vehicle will lock again automatically Selective setting ț The locator lighting will also come and rearm the anti-theft alarm system If you frequently travel alone, you may wish on if it is dark and the feature is ac- within approximately 40 seconds of un- to reprogram the SmartKey so that press- tivated in the control system locking if: (୴ page 172). ing button Œ only unlocks the driver’s ț neither a door nor the trunk is opened door and the fuel filler flap. ̈ Global unlocking: Press button Œ twice. ț the SmartKey is not inserted in the ̈ Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ starter switch simultaneously for about 6 seconds un- ț All turn signal lamps flash once. ୴ page 70) ț the central locking/unlocking switch is til battery check lamp 5 ( ț An acoustic signal sounds once. flashes twice. not activated ț The locking knobs in the doors The SmartKey will then function as fol- ̈ Global locking: Press button ‹. move up. lows: With the trunk and doors closed: ț The anti-theft alarm system is dis- ̈ Unlocking driver’s door and fuel fill- armed. ț All turn signal lamps flash three er flap: Press button Œ once. times. ț The locator lighting will also come ț All turn signal lamps flash once. ț An acoustic signal sounds three on if it is dark and the feature is ac- ț An acoustic signal sounds once. times. tivated in the control system ୴ ț The locking knob in the driver’s ( page 172). ț The locking knobs in the doors door moves up. move down. ț ț The anti-theft alarm system is The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed. armed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 72 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

̈ Global locking: Press button ‹. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) With the trunk and doors closed: ț All turn signal lamps flash three Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come times. with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, ț An acoustic signal sounds three each with remote control and a removable times. mechanical key. ț The locking knobs in the doors The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated move down. into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO ț The anti-theft alarm system is is checked every time you grasp an outside SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO armed. door handle. 1 ‹ Lock button 2 Š Opening button for trunk ̈ Restoring to factory setting: Press With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can (୴ page 269) and hold buttons Œ and ‹ si- lock and unlock the vehicle without using 3 Locking tab for mechanical key multaneously for about 6 seconds until the remote control buttons on the 4 Œ Unlock button battery check lamp 5 (୴ page 70) SmartKey and start the engine without in- 5 Battery check lamp flashes twice. serting the SmartKey in the starter switch. 6 Â Panic button (୴ page 58) The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO centrally locks and unlocks, when set to factory set- i When any outside door handle other than the driver’s outside door handle is grasped, the ୴ tings ( page 76): vehicle is always centrally unlocked. ț the doors ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex- ț the trunk posing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. ț the fuel filler flap

Information Provided by:Provided Information 73 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

i Canada only: Warning! G Warning! G This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following When leaving the vehicle, always take the To prevent possible personal injury, always two conditions: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and keep hands and fingers away from the door (1) This device may not cause interference, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- or trunk lid opening when closing a door or (2) this device must accept any interference re- tended in the vehicle, or with access to an the trunk. Be especially careful when small ceived, including interference that may unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- children are around. cause undesired operation of the device. cess to a vehicle could result in an accident Before closing doors, make sure there is no Any unauthorized modification to this device and/or serious personal injury. possibility of someone getting caught in a could void the user’s authority to operate the They could start the vehicle with a valid door during closing. equipment. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehi- i You can also open and close the door win- cle or with the KEYLESS-GO button on the i USA only: dows and tilt/sliding sunroof, or the panorama starter switch, or they could release the This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC roof with power tilt/ sliding panel* using the parking brake, thereby putting themselves Rules. Operation is subject to the following two SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO (୴ page 123). and others in danger. Switch off the engine conditions: If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with and take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO ! (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then either the with you even if you are only leaving the ve- ence, and batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are hicle for a short while. (2) this device must accept any interference re- discharged, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is ceived, including interference that may malfunctioning or the vehicle batteries are cause undesired operation. drained. Any unauthorized modification to this device ț Check the batteries in the SmartKey with could void the user’s authority to operate the KEYLESS-GO and replace them if necessary equipment. (୴ page 428).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 74 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

ț Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv- ț Never store the SmartKey with ț The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button er’s door (୴ page 424) and trunk KEYLESS-GO together with: must be inserted in the starter (୴ page 425). ୴ ț Electronic items such as a tele- switch ( page 84). ț Use the mechanical key to lock and trunk ț (୴ page 272). phone or another SmartKey with The brake pedal must be firmly de- KEYLESS-GO pressed. Do not depress the accel- ț Have the vehicle batteries and their connec- erator. tions checked (୴ page 446). ț Metallic objects such as coins or If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunc- metal foil ț If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is positioned farther away from the vehi- tioning, contact Roadside Assistance or an Doing so could impair the function of authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. cle, the system may no longer recog- the KEYLESS-GO system. nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO ț To lock or unlock the vehicle, the The vehicle then cannot be locked or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be ț You can also use the SmartKey with the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO located outside the vehicle within ap- KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey system. proximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the (୴ page 70). ț If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re- trunk lid. The starter switch is under the moved from the vehicle (e.g. if passen- ț If the vehicle has been parked for more KEYLESS-GO button. Pull the ger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey than 72 hours, you must pull an outside KEYLESS-GO button out in order to ac- with KEYLESS-GO) door handle in order to activate the cess the starter switch. ț when pressing the KEYLESS-GO KEYLESS-GO function. ț You can combine KEYLESS-GO func- start/stop button or trying to lock ț In order to start the engine with the tions with normal SmartKey functions the vehicle with the outside door SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO: (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and handle the message Key not rec- locking with button ‹). ț The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO ognized appears in the multifunc- must be located in the vehicle. tion display ț Always carry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you. Information Provided by:Provided Information 75 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

ț with the engine running, the mes- ț Remember that the engine can be Factory setting sage Key not recognized appears started by anyone with a SmartKey in the multifunction display while with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the i Your vehicle is equipped with an acoustic lock and unlock confirmation signal feature. An driving off vehicle. acoustic signal will sound when the vehicle is Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or Possibility 1: (One SmartKey with locked or unlocked using the SmartKey with change its present location immediate- KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one KEYLESS-GO. ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside If you wish to activate or deactivate the feature, seat or insert it in shirt pocket). the vehicle): or adjust its signal volume, contact an authorized If you leave the SmartKey with Mercedes-Benz Center. ț If you have started the engine with the KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you locking the vehicle, no message can turn it off again with: appears in the multifunction display. ț the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Possibility 2: (One SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no ț the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in- SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside serted in the starter switch, when the vehicle): the gear selector lever is in When exiting and trying to lock the ve- position P hicle, the message Key still in vehicle appears in the multifunction display. The vehicle will not be locked. 1 Outside door handle

Information Provided by:Provided Information 76 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

̈ Global unlocking: Grasp an outside i The vehicle could inadvertently be unlocked Selective setting door handle 1. if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft If you frequently travel alone, you may wish (1 m) of the vehicle and: ț All turn signal lamps flash once. to reprogram the SmartKey with ț an outside door handle is splashed with wa- KEYLESS-GO so when you, grasp the driv- ț An acoustic signal sounds once. ter, or er’s outside door handle only the driver’s ț The locking knobs in the doors ț you attempt to clean an outside door handle. door and the fuel filler flap unlocks. move up. ̈ Global locking: Close all doors and ̈ Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ ț The anti-theft alarm system is dis- touch outside of door handle 1. Do simultaneously for about 6 seconds un- armed. not keep your hand in the door handle til battery check lamp 5 (୴ page 73) recess. ț The locator lighting will also come flashes twice. on if it is dark and the feature is ac- With the trunk and doors closed: The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will tivated in the control system ț All turn signal lamps flash three then function as follows: (୴ page 172). times. ̈ Unlocking driver’s door and fuel fill- The vehicle will lock again automatically ț An acoustic signal sounds three er flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door and rearm the anti-theft alarm system times. handle. within approximately 40 seconds of un- ț All turn signal lamps flash once. locking if: ț The locking knobs in the doors move down. ț ț neither a door nor the trunk is opened An acoustic signal sounds once. ț The anti-theft alarm system is ț The locking knob in the driver’s ț the central locking/unlocking switch is armed. door moves up. not activated i You can also lock the vehicle using the ț The anti-theft alarm system is dis- KEYLESS-GO lock button on trunk lid, if equipped armed. ୴୴ (୴ page 270).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 77 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

୴୴ ț The locator lighting will also come ț All turn signal lamps flash three Checking batteries in the SmartKey or on if it is dark and the feature is ac- times. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) tivated in the control system ț An acoustic signal sounds three ୴ page 172). ( times. ̈ Press button ‹ or Œ. ̈ Global unlocking: Grasp any outside ț The locking knobs in the doors door handle other than the driver’s out- The battery check lamp (୴ page 70) or move down. side door handle. (୴ page 73) comes on briefly to indi- ț The anti-theft alarm system is cate that the SmartKey or SmartKey ț All turn signal lamps flash once. armed. with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in or- ț An acoustic signal sounds once. der. i You can also lock the vehicle using the ț The locking knobs in the doors KEYLESS-GO lock button on trunk lid, if equipped ! If the battery check lamp does not come on move up. (୴ page 270). briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged. ț The anti-theft alarm system is dis- ̈ Restoring to factory setting: Press armed. and hold buttons Œ and ‹ si- Replace the batteries (୴ page 428). multaneously for about 6 seconds until You can obtain the required batteries at any ț The locator lighting will also come battery check lamp 5 (୴ page 73) authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. on if it is dark and the feature is ac- flashes twice. tivated in the control system i If the batteries are checked within signal (୴ page 172). range of the vehicle, pressing button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly. ̈ Global locking: Close all doors and touch outside of a door handle 1 (୴ page 76). Do not keep your hand in the door handle recess. With the trunk and doors closed:

Information Provided by:Provided Information 78 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with Opening doors from the inside In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) ț Grasp an outside door handle. You can open a locked door from the in- The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with side. Open door only when conditions are within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you safe to do so. ț Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button should do the following: (୴ page 84). ̈ Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be KEYLESS-GO deactivated at an autho- inside the vehicle. rized Mercedes-Benz Center. i If you hear a warning signal you have ̈ Report the loss of the SmartKey, forgotten to switch off the low beam headlamps SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the or the parking lamps before opening the driver’s mechanical key immediately to your door. car insurance company. In addition the message Switch Off Lights appears in the multifunction display. ̈ Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary. 1 Locking knob Switch off the low beam headlamps or the parking lamps. 2 Inside door handle Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center If the message Switch Off Lights or Re- will be glad to supply you with a i If the vehicle has previously been locked move Key appears in the multifunction display replacement. with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft switch off the automatic headlamp mode. alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: ț Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch. ț Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey

or SmartKeyby:Provided Information with KEYLESS-GO*. 79 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Front doors Automatic central locking Automatic central locking activating/deactivating ̈ Pull on door handle 2 on the respec- The doors and the trunk automatically lock tive front door to open door. You can deactivate the automatic locking when the ignition is switched on and the using the control system (୴ page 173). If door was locked, locking knob 1 will wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap- move up. proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The locking knobs in the doors move down. Rear doors You can open a locked door from the in- ̈ Pull up locking knob 1 on the respec- side. Open door only when conditions are tive rear door to unlock door. safe to do so. ̈ Pull on door handle 2 on the respec- You could therefore lock yourself out when tive rear door to open door. the vehicle is pushed or towed, or it is on a test stand.

1 Central unlocking switch 2 Central locking switch ̈ Activating: Press and hold central locking switch 2 until you hear a chime. ̈ Deactivating: Press and hold central unlocking switch 1 until you hear a chime.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 80 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking

Locking and unlocking from the inside i You can open a locked door from inside at any time. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so. Warning! G If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch: When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ț and the SmartKey or SmartKey with SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* KEYLESS-GO* is set to factory settings, the from the starter switch, take it with you, and complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- opened from the inside tended in the vehicle, or with access to an ț and the SmartKey or SmartKey with unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- 1 Central unlocking switch KEYLESS-GO* is set to selective settings, cess to a vehicle could result in an accident 2 Central locking switch only the door opened from the inside is un- and/or serious personal injury. locked ̈ Unlocking: Press central unlocking If the vehicle was previously centrally locked switch 1. You can lock or unlock the doors and the with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO*, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch. trunk from the inside using the central The vehicle unlocks. locking or unlocking switch. This can be ̈ Locking: Press central locking useful, for example, if you want to lock the switch 2. vehicle before starting to drive. If the front passenger door is closed, The fuel filler flap will not be locked or un- the vehicle locks. locked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 81 Controls in detail Starter switch positions

1 Power supply for some electrical con- i Vehicles with automatic transmission*: The Warning! G sumers, such as seat adjustment SmartKey can only be removed from the starter 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical switch with the gear selector lever in position P. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the consumers) and driving position. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* i If the SmartKey is left in starter switch All lamps (except high beam headlamp position 0 for an extended period of time, it can from the starter switch, take it with you, and indicator lamp and turn signal indicator no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- lamps unless activated) in the instru- the steering is locked. To unlock, remove tended in the vehicle, or with access to an ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert. unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- instrument cluster fails to come on If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the cess to a vehicle could result in an accident when the ignition is switched on, have ! and/or serious personal injury. starter switch, the battery may not be sufficient- it checked and replaced if necessary. ly charged. If a lamp in the instrument cluster re- ț Check the battery and charge it if necessary SmartKey mains on after starting the engine or (୴ page 446). comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps ț ୴ in instrument cluster” (୴ page 374). Get a jump start ( page 451). 3 Starting position To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a completely discharged battery, always remove i When you switch on the ignition, the the SmartKey from the starter switch when the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam engine is not in operation. headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument For information on starting the engine us- cluster come on. The indicator and warning ing the SmartKey, see “Starting: Make sure lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator the gear selector lever is set to P.” lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) (୴ page 127). should go out when the engine is running. This in- Starter switch dicates that the respective systems are operational. 0 For removing SmartKey Information Provided by:Provided Information 82 Controls in detail Starter switch positions

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* If you wish or should there be a need to in- (Canada only) sert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in the starter switch, the KEYLESS-GO start/stop Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO button can be easily removed by pulling it feature are supplied with a SmartKey with out of the starter switch. integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. i The function of the SmartKey overrules the KEYLESS-GO function. With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button inserted and the SmartKey with i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does KEYLESS-GO present in the vehicle, press- not need to be removed from the starter switch when you leave the vehicle. However, always 1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you 2 Starter switch ț without the brake pedal depressed when you leave the vehicle. As long as the corresponds to the various starter SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle, the ̈ Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop vehicle’s electrical systems can be switched on switch positions (୴ page 84) button 1 into starter switch 2 (if not or the engine can be started using the inserted already). ț with the brake pedal firmly depressed KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. will start the engine (୴ page 128) i When you switch from SmartKey mode back to KEYLESS-GO mode, the system requires 2 seconds of detection time before you can use the KEYLESS-GO button as usual. ୴୴

Information Provided by:Provided Information 83 Controls in detail Starter switch positions

୴୴The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be Position 1 If a lamp in the instrument cluster re- located in the vehicle. ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- mains on after starting the engine or ̈ Make sure the gear selector lever is set ton once. comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps ୴ page 374). to P. in instrument cluster” ( This supplies power for some electrical ̈ Do not depress the brake pedal. consumers, such as seat adjustment. i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once, the power supply is i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO again switched off. start/stop button When you switch on the ignition, the indica- ț i once again, the ignition (position 2) is tor and warning lamps (except high beam head- switched on lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator ț twice, the power supply is again switched off lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. The indicator and warning lamps (ex- Ignition (or position 2) cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go ̈ Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- out when the engine is running. This indicates ton twice. that the respective systems are operational. 1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button This supplies power for all electrical For information on starting the engine us- (Canada only) consumers. ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, see “Starting: Make sure KEYLESS-GO All lamps (except high beam headlamp Position 0 start/stop button is inserted in the starter indicator lamp and turn signal indicator Before you press the KEYLESS-GO switch (e page 83).” (୴ page 128). lamps unless activated) in the instru- start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the electronics have status 0 (as with instrument cluster fails to come on SmartKey removed). when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 84 Controls in detail Seats ̄ Seats

Your seat must be adjusted so that you can Warning! G Warning! G correctly fasten your seat belt. All seat, head restraint adjustments, as well Observe the following points: When leaving the vehicle, always remove the as fastening of seat belts, must be done be- ț Adjust the seat backrest until your arms SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* fore the vehicle is put into motion. are slightly angled when holding the from the starter switch, take it with you, and steering wheel. lock the vehicle. Seat adjustment ț Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with position that still allows you to reach the KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) removed from accelerator/brake pedal safely. The po- the starter switch or the SmartKey with Warning! G sition should be as far back as possible KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) removed from with the driver still able to properly oper- the vehicle, the power seats can be Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. ate controls. operated. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause ț Adjust the head restraint so that it is as Therefore, do not leave children unattended the driver to lose control of the vehicle. close to the head as possible and the in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked center of the head restraint supports Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat the back of the head at eye level. vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a back in an excessively reclined position as vehicle could result in an accident and/or ț Never place hands under the seat or this can be dangerous. You could slide un- serious personal injury. der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide near any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted. under it, the seat belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause se- Failure to do so could result in an accident rious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and and/or serious personal injury. seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a position that is as upright as possible and seat belts are properly positioned on the body. Information Provided by:Provided Information 85 Controls in detail Seats

Power seat adjustment Warning! G The seat adjustment switch is located on According to accident statistics, children the entry side of each front seat base. are safer when properly restrained in the The seat adjustment switch for Canada ve- rear seating positions than in the front seat- hicles with memory function* are located ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend on the front doors. that children be placed in the rear seats whenever possible. Regardless of seating position, children 12 years old and under must be seated and properly secured in an Driver’s door (Canada only) appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler Seat cushion tilt restraint, or booster seat recommended for 1 Seat height the size and weight of the child. 2 3 Seat fore and aft A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is 4 Seat backrest tilt significantly increased if the child restraints 5 Head restraint height (୴ page 87) are not properly secured in the vehicle and 1 Seat cushion tilt the child is not properly secured in the child i After unlocking the vehicle or turning off the 2 Seat height restraint. engine, the seat adjustment can be operated for 3 Seat fore and aft up to approximately 3 minutes with the 4 Seat backrest tilt SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) in For additional information about children starter switch position 0 or removed from the ̈ Vehicles without memory function*: in the vehicle, see “Children in the vehicle” starter switch. Adjust the head restraint height manu- (୴ page 51). ally (୴ page 87). Vehicles with memory function* (Canada only): The memory function* is operational at any time. Seat and steering wheel adjustment is always possible. Information Provided by:Provided Information 86 Controls in detail Seats

If it is not possible to adjust the seat with i Canada only: Adjusting front seat head restraints the seat adjustment switch: The memory function* (୴ page 102) lets you store the settings for the seat positions together ̈ G Insert the SmartKey or the with the settings for the steering wheel and the Warning! KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* exterior rear view mirrors. (Canada only) into the starter switch. For your protection, drive only with properly ! When moving the seat, make sure there are positioned head restraints. or no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Oth- Adjust the head restraint so that it is as ̈ With SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* erwise you could damage the seats. close to the head as possible and the center (Canada only) in starter switch ̈ Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up of the head restraint supports the back of position 0. Turn the SmartKey in or down in the direction of the head at eye level. This will reduce the po- starter switch to position 1 or press arrow 1 until your upper legs are tential for injury to the head and neck in the the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* lightly supported. event of an accident or similar situation. (Canada only) once. ̈ Seat height: Press the switch up or Do not drive the vehicle without the seat or down in the direction of arrow 2. head restraints. Head restraints are intend- ̈ Open the driver’s or front passenger ̈ Seat fore and aft: Press the switch for- ed to help reduce injuries during an acci- door. ward or backward in the direction of dent. arrow 3. ̈ Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch You cannot remove the active head re- forward or backward in the direction of straint on the driver’s and front passen- arrow 4. ger’s seat. For removal contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For information on active head restraints, see “Active head restraints” (୴ page 50).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 87 Controls in detail Seats

Head restraint height Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

Head restraint height, electrical* Head restraint height, manual adjusting (Canada only) Head restraint adjusting 1 Release button 1 Head restraint height Manually adjust the head restraint. ̈ Raising: Manually adjust the height of ̈ Raising/lowering: Press the switch ̈ Push or pull on the lower edge of the the head restraint by pulling it upward. up or down in the direction of arrow 1 head restraint cushion to the desired until the desired position is reached. position. ̈ Lowering: To lower the head restraint, push release button 1 and push down on the head restraint.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 88 Controls in detail Seats

Adjusting rear head restraints Rear head restraint height Rear head restraint fore and aft adjustment Warning! G

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints. Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close to the head as possible and the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in Head restraint height the event of an accident or similar situation. 1 Release button Head restraint adjusting Do not drive the vehicle without the seat You can adjust the angle of the two outer ̈ Raising: Manually adjust the height of head restraints. Head restraints are head restraints. intended to help reduce injuries during an the head restraint by pulling it upward. Manually adjust the head restraint. accident. ̈ Lowering: To lower the head restraint, push release button 1 and push down ̈ Push or pull on the lower edge of the on the head restraint. head restraint cushion to the desired position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 89 Controls in detail Seats

Removing and installing rear seat head ̈ Installing: Position the head restraints restraints (vehicles with split foldable so that the notches on the rod are on rear seat) the left when looking in the direction of travel. Warning! G ̈ Insert head restraint and push it down until it engages. For your protection, drive only with properly ̈ Fold the rear seat backrest back until it positioned head restraints. engages (୴ page 282). Adjust the head restraint so that it is as ̈ Push release button 1 and adjust close to the head as possible and the center 1 Release button head restraint to desired position. of the head restraint supports the back of ̈ the head at eye level. This will reduce the Removing: Unlock the rear seat back- i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that potential for injury to the head and neck in rest and fold it slightly forward it is as close to the head as possible. the event of an accident or similar situation. (୴ page 281). Do not drive the vehicle without the seat ̈ Pull head restraint to its highest head restraints. Head restraints are position. intended to help reduce injuries during an ̈ Push release button 1 and pull out accident. head restraint. i The rear head restraints cannot be removed on vehicles which do not have the split foldable rear seat.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 90 Controls in detail Seats

Lumbar support Seat heating* Level The curvature of the front seats can be ad- The buttons for the front seats are located 3 Three indicator lamps on justed to help enhance lower back support in the center console. The red indicator (highest level) and seating comfort. lamps on the button come on to show the The seat heating automatically selected heating level. switches to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes. 2 Two indicator lamps on The seat heating automatically switches to level 1 after approximately 10 minutes. 1 One indicator lamp on (lowest level) The seat heating automatically 1 Adjustment lever switches off after approximately 1 Seat heating button ̈ Move adjustment lever 1 in direction 20 minutes. of arrows until you have reached a off No indicator lamp on comfortable seating position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 91 Controls in detail Seats

̈ Switch on the ignition. ̈ Switching on: Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. One or more red indicator lamps on the button come on to show the selected heating level. ̈ Switching off: Press button 1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps go out. i If one or more of the lamps on the seat heating button are flashing once, there is insufficient voltage available because too many electrical consumers are turned on. The seat heating switches off automatically. The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 92 Controls in detail Steering wheel ̄ Steering wheel Make sure The handle for steering wheel adjustment Warning! G is located below the steering column. ț you can reach the steering wheel with Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv- your arms slightly bent at the elbows ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv- ț you can move your legs freely ing, or driving without the steering wheel ț all displays (including malfunction and adjustment feature locked could cause the indicator lamps) on the instrument driver to lose control of the vehicle. cluster are clearly visible When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Steering wheel adjustment, manual (Canada only) from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. G Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with Warning! 1 Steering wheel adjustment release KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) removed from handle the starter switch or the SmartKey with Only adjust the steering wheel with the 2 Steering wheel up/down KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) removed from vehicle at a standstill with the parking brake 3 Steering wheel in/out engaged and make sure the steering wheel the vehicle, the electrical steering wheel ad- ̈ To unlock the steering wheel, pull is securely locked in place before driving off. justment feature can be operated. There- handle 1 down to its stop limit. fore, do not leave children unattended in the Driving without the steering wheel locked The steering wheel is unlocked vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehi- may cause unexpected steering wheel cle. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehi- movement which could result in the driver ̈ Move steering wheel to the desired cle could result in an accident and/or losing control of the vehicle. Make sure the position. ୴୴ serious personal injury. steering wheel is securely locked by trying to move it up and down, and in and out before driving off.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 93 Controls in detail Steering wheel

୴୴̈ To lock the steering wheel, push Steering wheel adjustment, electrical* ̈ Adjusting steering wheel in or out: handle 1 all the way up until it (Canada only) Move stalk forward or back in the direc- engages. tion of arrow 2 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with The steering wheel is locked into posi- your arms slightly bent at the elbow. tion again. ̈ Adjusting steering wheel up or ̈ Make sure the steering wheel is down: Move stalk up or down in the di- securely locked by trying to move it up rection of arrow . and down, and in and out before driving 1 off. ! Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked the steering wheel. 1 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down 2 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out i The memory function* is operational at any time. Seat and steering wheel adjustment is always possible. The memory function* (୴ page 102) lets you store settings for the steering wheel together with the settings for the seat position and the exterior rear view mirrors.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 94 Controls in detail Steering wheel

Easy-entry/exit feature* (Canada only) With the easy-entry/exit feature activated Warning! G the steering wheel tilts upwards when you: ț remove the SmartKey from the starter Warning! G Let the system complete the adjustment procedure before setting the vehicle in mo- switch, You must make sure no one can become tion. All steering wheel adjustments must be or completed before setting the vehicle in mo- trapped or injured by the moving steering ț open the driver’s door with the tion. Driving off with the steering wheel still wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is SmartKey in starter switch position 0 adjusting could cause the driver to lose con- activated. or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop trol of the vehicle. To stop steering wheel movement, do one of button in position 1 the following: This feature allows for easier entry into and i If the current position for the steering wheel ț Move steering wheel adjustment stalk. exit from the vehicle. When entering and is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering ț Press one of the memory position but- wheel will no longer be able to move upward exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. tons or the memory button M. its uppermost position. Do not leave children unattended in the ve- The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat- when the engine is started. hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. ed or deactivated in the Convenience sub- Children could open the driver’s door and menu of the control system (୴ page 174). unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 95 Controls in detail Steering wheel

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel will return to their last set memory position when you: ț close the driver’s door with the ignition switched on, or ț insert the SmartKey into the starter switch or press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once with the driver’s door closed. i The last set steering wheel positions are stored when ț the ignition is switched off ț the position is stored in memory (୴ page 102)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 96 Controls in detail Mirrors ̄ Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view ̈ Switch on the ignition. mirrors before driving so that you have a ̈ Press button 1 for the driver’s side good view of the road and traffic condi- exterior rear view mirror or button 2 tions. for passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. Interior rear view mirror The indicator lamp in the respective ̈ Manually adjust the interior rear view button 1 or 2 comes on. mirror. If you do not make adjustments to the For more information, see “Interior rear selected exterior rear view mirror with- view mirror, antiglare position” 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view in 15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes (୴ page 99) and, see “Auto-dimming rear mirror button out. You will then have to select the de- view mirrors*” (୴ page 100). 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view sired exterior rear view mirror again be- mirror button fore any adjustments can be made. Exterior rear view mirrors 3 Adjustment button Adjustments can only be made with the indicator lamp for the respective exterior rear view mirror button illuminated. Warning! G ̈ Push adjustment button 3 up, down, left, or right according to the desired Exercise care when using the passenger setting. ୴୴ side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. Information Provided by:Provided Information 97 Controls in detail Mirrors

୴୴! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is Power folding exterior rear view ̈ Switch on the ignition. mirrors* forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or ̈ Folding in: Press button 1. forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front), re- position it by applying firm pressure until it snaps ! Before driving the vehicle through an auto- ̈ Folding out: Press button 1 again. back into place. The mirror housing is then prop- matic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Oth- If an exterior rear view mirror housing is erly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in erwise they may get damaged. ! the usual manner. forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear), repo- sition it manually by applying firm pressure until i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior Folding exterior rear view mirrors in it snaps back into place. rear view mirrors will be heated automatically. and out manually If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly i Canada only: The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if pushed rearward (hit from the front), press The memory function* (୴ page 102) lets you they are not folded out completely. button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press store the setting for the exterior rear view mir- button 1 again to fold mirrors out. Do not force rors together with the setting for the steering mirrors by hand as this may damage the wheel and the seat positions. adjustment mechanism. The mirror housing is then properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner.

1 Folds the exterior mirrors in and out

Information Provided by:Provided Information 98 Controls in detail Mirrors

Folding exterior rear view mirrors in Resetting the automatic exterior rear Interior rear view mirror, antiglare and out automatically view mirror fold in function position When the corresponding function in the You need to reset the automatic exterior control system is activated (୴ page 175): rear view mirror fold in function whenever the battery was disconnected or dis- ț The exterior rear view mirrors automat- charged. ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside. ̈ Switch on the ignition. ț The exterior rear view mirrors automat- ̈ Briefly press button 1. ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and the driver’s or front pas- i You need to manually fold in the mirrors once, so that the automatic fold in function will senger door are subsequently opened. work, see “Setting fold-in function* for exterior ୴ i The mirrors do not fold out automatically if rear view mirrors” ( page 175). 1 Lever they were previously folded in manually with ̈ Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position button 1. by moving lever 1 towards the wind- i If you are driving at more than approximately shield. 9 mph (15 km/h), you will not be able to fold the The interior rear view mirror is dimmed. exterior mirrors in.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 99 Controls in detail Mirrors

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors* Warning! G Warning! G The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side and The auto-dimming function does not react if Exercise care when using the passen- the interior rear view mirror will respond incoming light is not aimed directly at the ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror automatically to glare when sensors in the interior rear view mirror. surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror ț the ignition is switched on The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not are closer than they appear. Check your and react, for example, if the rear window interior rear view mirror or glance over your ț incoming light from headlamps falls on sunshade* is in raised position. shoulder before changing lanes. the sensor in the interior rear view Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles mirror (incident light) could blind you. As a result, The interior rear view mirror will not react if you may not be able to observe traffic conditions and could cause an accident. ț reverse gear R is engaged ț the interior lighting is turned on

Information Provided by:Provided Information 100 Controls in detail Mirrors

Activating exterior rear view mirror ̈ Make sure you have stored a parking The exterior rear view mirror returns to its parking position* (Canada only) position for the passenger-side exterior previously stored driving position: ୴ rear view mirror ( page 104). ț 10 seconds after you have put the Follow these steps to activate the mirror ̈ Switch on the ignition. transmission out of reverse parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be ̈ Shift the transmission in reverse gear. ț immediately once your vehicle exceeds turned downward to the stored position. The previously selected exterior rear a speed of approximately 6 mph view mirror is activated, and the indica- (10 km/h) tor lamp in the respective button 1 ț immediately when you press button 1 or 2 comes on. for driver’s side exterior rear view mirror. ̈ Press button 2, to select the front passenger side exterior rear view mirror. The indicator lamp in button 2 comes on and the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view the stored position. mirror button 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button 3 Adjustment button

Information Provided by:Provided Information 101 Controls in detail Memory function* (Canada only)

Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil- Each stored position on the driver’s side should check and adjust the seat height, dren should be seated in a properly se- includes the following settings: seat position fore and aft, and seat back- cured restraint system that complies with ț Seat position rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- control, reach, and comfort. The head re- dards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor ț Steering wheel position straint should also be adjusted for proper Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. ț Exterior rear view mirrors position height. See also the section on air bags With the memory function you can store up (୴ page 36) for proper seat positioning. to 3 different settings. Warning! G In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation Do not activate the memory function while and comfort. Both the inside and outside driving. Activating the memory function rear view mirrors should be adjusted for while driving could cause the driver to lose adequate rear vision. control of the vehicle.

On passenger side, the seat position is stored on each memory position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 102 Controls in detail Memory function* (Canada only)

Storing positions into memory* Recalling positions from memory*

̈ Adjust the seat (୴ page 85) to the de- ! Do not operate the power seats using the sired position. memory position button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could ̈ On the driver’s side: Adjust the steering cause damage to front or rear seats. wheel (୴ page 93) and the exterior rear First move seat backrest to an upright position. view mirrors (୴ page 97) to the desired position. ̈ Press and hold memory position button until the seat, steering wheel ̈ Press memory button M. and exterior rear view mirrors have M Memory button ̈ Release memory button M and press completely moved to the stored 1 2 3 Memory position buttons one of the memory position buttons positions. within 3 seconds. i The memory function* is operational at any i Releasing the memory position button time. Seat and steering wheel adjustment is al- An acoustic signal sounds to confirm. immediately stops movement to the stored ways possible. The settings are stored with the select- positions. ed position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 103 Controls in detail Memory function* (Canada only)

Storing exterior rear view mirror ̈ Stop the vehicle. parking position* ̈ Switch on the ignition. For easier parking, you can adjust the pas- ̈ Press button 2. senger-side exterior rear view mirror so The passenger-side exterior rear view that you can see the right rear wheel as mirror is selected. soon as you engage the reverse gear. ̈ Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear For information on activating the parking view mirror with button 3 so that you position, see “Activating exterior rear view see the rear wheel and the road curb. mirror parking position* (Canada only)” (୴ page 101). 1 Driver’s side exterior rear view ̈ Press memory button 4. mirror button ̈ Within 3 seconds, press one of the ar- 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view rows of adjustment button . mirror button 3 3 Adjustment button The parking position is stored if the 4 Memory button mirror does not move. i If the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored, you can move the mirror again.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 104 Controls in detail Fastening the seat belts ̄ Fastening the seat belts

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving According to accident statistics, children Never let more people ride in the vehicle off. Always make sure all of your passengers are safer when properly restrained in the than there are seat belts available. Be sure are properly restrained. rear seating positions than in the front seat- everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re- Failure to wear and properly fasten and ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend strained with a separate seat belt. Never use position your seat belt greatly increases that children be placed in the rear seats a seat belt for more than one person at a your risk of injuries and their likely severity whenever possible. Regardless of seating time. in an accident. You and your passengers position, children 12 years old and under should always wear seat belts. must be seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler Warning! G If you are ever in an accident, your injuries restraint, or booster seat recommended for can be considerably more severe without the size and weight of the child. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat your seat belt properly buckled. Without backrest in an excessively reclined position your seat belt buckled, you are much more A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is as this can be dangerous. You could slide likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be significantly increased if the child restraints under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide ejected from it. You can be seriously injured are not properly secured in the vehicle and under it, the seat belt would apply force at or killed. the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. the abdomen or neck. That could cause se- In the same crash, the possibility of injury or rious or even fatal injuries. The seat back- death is lessened if you are wearing your rest and seat belt provide the best restraint For additional information on children in seat belt. The air bags can only provide the when the wearer is in a nearly upright posi- the vehicle, see “Children in the vehicle” protection they were designed to afford if tion and the seat belt is properly positioned (୴ page 51). the occupants are using their seat belts on the body. (୴ page 36).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 105 Controls in detail Fastening the seat belts

̈ Pull the seat belt smoothly from the Proper use of seat belts Warning! G seat belt outlet 1. ț Do not twist the seat belt when fasten- ̈ Place the shoulder portion of the seat Read and observe the additional warning no- ing. tices printed in the “Safety and Security” belt across the top of your shoulder ț Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder section. and the lap portion across your hips. portion is located as close as possible ̈ Push latch plate 2 into buckle 4 until to the middle of the shoulder (it should it clicks. not touch the neck). Never pass the ̈ If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the shoulder portion of the seat belt under correct height (୴ page 107). your arm. ̈ If necessary, tighten the lap portion to ț Position the lap belt as low as possible a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion on your hips (over hip joint) and not up. across the abdomen. ̈ To release the seat belt, press release ț Place the seat backrest in a nearly up- button 3 and guide latch plate 2 right position. back to seat belt outlet 1. ț Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. ț Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time. When using a seat belt to secure 1 Seat belt outlet infant restraints or toddler restraints or 2 Latch plate children in booster seats, always follow 3 Release button the child seat manufacturer’s instruc- 4 Buckle tions. Information Provided by:Provided Information 106 Controls in detail Fastening the seat belts

ț Check your seat belt during travel to For more information, see “Seat belts” ̈ Lowering: Press and hold release make sure it is properly positioned. (୴ page 46). button 1. ț Make sure the seat belt is always fitted ̈ Slide the seat belt height adjuster Seat belt height adjustment snugly. Take special care of this when downward. wearing loose clothing. You can adjust the height of the seat belt ̈ Release button1 and make sure the for the driver’s and front passenger seat. seat belt height adjuster engages into Warning! G place.

Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They could tear. Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt. Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts. 1 Release button Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may ̈ severely weaken them. In a crash, they may Raising: Slide the seat belt height ad- not be able to provide adequate protection. juster upward. Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were The seat belt height adjuster engages highly stressed in an accident must be re- in different positions. placed. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 107 Controls in detail Lighting i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive 1 ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two i If you hear a warning signal you have on the other side of the road than the country in stops) forgotten to switch off the low beam headlamps which the vehicle is registered, you must have or the parking lamps before opening the driver’s the headlamps modified for symmetrical low 2 ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left door. beams. Relevant information can be obtained at one stop) In addition the message Switch Off Lights your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 3 M Off appears in the multifunction display. Switch off the low beam headlamps or the park- Exterior lamp switch Daytime running lamp mode ing lamps. (୴ page 110) If the message Switch Off Lights or Re- 4 * Automatic headlamp mode move Key appears in the multifunction display Daytime running lamp mode remove the SmartKey from the starter switch or (୴ page 110) switch off the automatic headlamp mode. 5 C Parking lamps (also side marker ! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps when lamps, tail lamps, license plate leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged lamps, instrument panel lamps) battery. 6 B Low beam headlamps or high Low beam headlamps beam headlamps The low beam headlamps can be switched 7 ‡ Front fog lamps on and off with the exterior lamp switch us- 8 † Rear fog lamp ing the manual headlamp mode. ̈ Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp switch to position B. The green indicator lamp C in the exterior lamp switch comes on.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 108 Controls in detail Lighting

The following lamps switch on: ̈ Turn the exterior lamp switch to Warning! G ț Low beam headlamps position *. With the SmartKey in starter switch ț Tail and parking lamps If the exterior lamp switch is set to *, the headlamps will not be automatically position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* ț License plate lamps switched on under foggy conditions. start/stop button (Canada only) ț Side marker lamps pressed once, the tail and parking To minimize risk to you and to others, lamps, the license plate lamps and the ̈ Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp side marker lamps will switch on and switch to position M. switch to position B when driving or off depending on the brightness of the The green indicator lamp C in the when traffic and/or ambient lighting condi- ambient light. tions require you to do so. exterior lamp switch goes out. When the engine is running, the low In low ambient lighting conditions, only beam headlamps, the tail and parking Automatic headlamp mode switch from position * to B with the lamps, the license plate lamps, and the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. The following lamps switch on and off au- side marker lamps will switch on and Switching from position * to B will tomatically depending on the brightness of off depending on the brightness of the briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so the ambient light: ambient light. while driving in low ambient lighting condi- ț Low beam headlamps tions may result in an accident. i Canada only: High beam headlamps are only available with the ț Tail and parking lamps The automatic headlamp feature is only an exterior lamp switch in position B. ț License plate lamps aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all ț Side marker lamps times.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 109 Controls in detail Lighting

Daytime running lamp mode Canada only The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (୴ page 108). In Canada the daytime running lamp mode i With the exterior lamp switch in is mandatory and therefore in a constant position M or *, you cannot switch on the USA only mode. high beam headlamps. In the USA the daytime running lamp mode The high beam flasher is available at all times. i With the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated by default. Activate the day- For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior activated and the exterior lamp switch in lamp switch to position B to permit activa- position M, you cannot switch on the high time running lamp mode using the control beam headlamps. system, see “Setting daytime running lamp tion of the high beam headlamps. The high beam flasher is available at all times. mode (USA only)” (୴ page 171). Vehicles with automatic transmission*: For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior ̈ Turn exterior lamp switch to When the engine is running and you shift from a driving position to position N or P, lamp switch to position B or * to permit position M or *. activation of the high beam headlamps. with the vehicle at a standstill the low When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a de- When the engine is running, and you turn beam headlamps are switched on. lay of 3-minutes. the exterior lamp switch to position C or B, the manual headlamp mode has In low ambient light conditions, the fol- When the engine is running, and you lowing lamps will switch on additional- priority over the daytime running lamp ț ly: turn the exterior lamp switch to mode. position C, the low beam head- The corresponding exterior lamps switch ț Tail and parking lamps lamps, the tail and parking lamps, the on (୴ page 108). ț License plate lamps license plate lamp and the side marker lamps switch on. ț Side marker lamps ț turn the exterior lamp switch to i With the daytime running lamp mode activat- position B, the manual headlamp ed and the engine running, the low beam head- mode has priority over the daytime run- lamps cannot be switched off manually. ning lamp mode. Information Provided by:Provided Information 110 Controls in detail Lighting

Locator lighting and interior lighting i Fog lamps cannot be switched on manually Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only) delayed shut-off with exterior lamp switch in position *. To ̈ Turn the exterior lamp switch to activate the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch The locator lighting and night security illu- position (୴ page 108). to position B first. B mination are described in the “Control sys- ̈ Pull out exterior lamp switch to second tem” section, see “Setting locator lighting” Front fog lamps stop. (୴ page 172) and “Setting interior lighting delayed shut off” (୴ page 173). ̈ Turn the exterior lamp switch to The front fog lamps and the rear fog position C or B (୴ page 108). lamp switch on. Fog lamps ̈ Pull out exterior lamp switch to first The yellow indicator lamp † in the stop. exterior lamp switch comes on ୴ Warning! G The front fog lamps are switched on. ( page 108). ̈ The green indicator lamp ‡ in the Push in the exterior lamp switch to first In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, stop. only switch from position * to B with exterior lamp switch comes on ୴ the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. ( page 108). The rear fog lamp switches off. Switching from position * to B will ̈ Push in the exterior lamp switch. The yellow indicator lamp † in the briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so The front fog lamps are switched off. exterior lamp switch goes out. while driving in low ambient lighting condi- The front fog lamps remain lit. tions may result in an accident. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the exterior lamp switch goes out. i Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation. by:Provided Information 111 Controls in detail Lighting

Switching on high beams Headlamp cleaning system* Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* (With Bi-Xenon* headlamps only) The headlamps are automatically cleaned with a high-pressure water jet when, at the The corner-illuminating front fog lamps same time, improve illumination of the area in the ț the engine is running direction into which you are turning. ț the headlamps are switched on The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with: ț the windshield wipers have wiped the ț the exterior lamp switch in windshield with washer fluid for the position or (୴ page 108) first time. B * or Combination switch The headlamps are cleaned every tenth 1 High beam time the windshield is washed with washer ț the daytime running lamp mode acti- 2 High beam flasher fluid. vated (୴ page 110). ̈ High beam: Turn the exterior lamp When you switch off the headlamps or the i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will switch to position B (୴ page 108). ignition, the automatic function is reset only come on in low ambient lighting conditions. and will start counting the next time from ̈ Push the combination switch in the di- the beginning. i If you are driving faster than 25 mph rection of arrow 1. (40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps switched For information on filling up the washer on, the corner-illuminating front fog lamps The high beam indicator A in the in- reservoir, see “Windshield washer system function is not available. strument cluster comes on and headlamp cleaning system*” (୴ page 26). (୴ page 330). ̈ High beam flasher: Pull the combination switch briefly in the direction of

arrow 2. by:Provided Information 112 Controls in detail Lighting

Switching on corner-illuminating front i The corner-illuminating lamps temporarily Switching off the corner-illuminating fog lamps come on both sides of the vehicle if you turn the lamps steering wheel in one direction and then in the ̈ Switch on the left or right turn signal other direction shortly thereafter. The combination switch for the turn signal (୴ page 108), depending on whether resets automatically after major steering you are turning left or right. i The corner-illuminating lamps will come on wheel movements. This will switch off the automatically depending on the steering angle, corner-illuminating lamps if they were acti- The respective corner-illuminating even if you did not switch on either turn signal. If vated by switching on the left or right turn front fog lamp comes on and illumi- the corner-illuminating lamps came on automat- signal. nates the area in the direction into ically, they will also go out automatically depend- which you are turning. ing on the steering angle. If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and corner-illu- or When you shift the transmission in reverse i minating lamp can be switched off by ̈ gear, the corner-illuminating lamp opposite to Turn steering wheel in desired your steering direction comes on. returning the combination switch to its direction. original position. The turn signal has no influence on the The corner-illuminating front fog lamp corner-illuminating lamp on the outside of the i The corner-illuminating lamp may remain lit on the side of your steering direction curve. for a short time. The corner-illuminating lamp comes on. comes on for no more than 20 seconds with the vehicle standing still. It is then switched off even i If you have switched on the turn signal for if the turn signal is still switched on or you have one side but turn the steering wheel in the turned the steering wheel to full lock. opposite direction, the corner-illuminating front fog lamp comes on for the side indicated by the turn signal. The corner-illuminating front fog lamp remains lit for a maximum of 3 minutes. Afterward, it goes out even if the turn signal is still switched on.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 113 Controls in detail Lighting

Hazard warning flasher ̈ Switching on: Press hazard warning Interior lighting flasher switch. The hazard warning flasher can be All turn signals will flash. Overhead control panel switched on at all times, even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch i With the hazard warning flasher activated or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* and the combination switch set for either left or removed from the vehicle. right turn, only the respective left or right turn signals will operate when the SmartKey in the The hazard warning flasher is automatical- starter switch is in position 1 or 2 or the ly switched on if KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (Canada only) (୴ page 84) is pressed once or twice. ț an air bag has been triggered ̈ Switching off: Press hazard warning ț you brake the vehicle strongly at a flasher switch again. speed of more than 50 mph (70 km/h) and bring it to a complete stop If the hazard warning flasher was activated automatically, press hazard warning flasher switch 1 twice to switch off the hazard warning flasher. The hazard warning flasher switched off automatically at vehicle speeds of 1 Rear interior lighting on/off approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or 2 Interior lighting control more. 3 Right reading lamp on/off 4 Front interior lighting on/off 5 Left reading lamp on/off 6 Left/right reading lamp 1 Hazard warning flasher switch 7 Front interior lamps

Information Provided by:Provided Information 114 Controls in detail Lighting

! An interior lamp switched on manually does ̈ Activating: Press button 2 again. Manual control not go out automatically. The button returns to its original posi- ̈ Switching on/off front interior light- Leaving an interior light switch in the ON position tion and sits flush with the other but- ing: Press button 4. for extended periods of time with the engine tons. Automatic control of the interior turned off could result in a discharged battery. ̈ Switching on/off rear interior light- lighting is activated. ing: Press button 1. Automatic control The interior lighting switches on in ̈ Switching on/off front reading darkness, when you: i The interior lighting is factory-set to auto- lamps: Press button 3 or 5. ț unlock the vehicle matic mode. The left and right front reading lamps ̈ Deactivating: Press button 2. ț open a door are located in the lower edge of the interior rear view mirror. The button engages when pressed in. ț remove the SmartKey from the Automatic control of the interior light- starter switch ing is deactivated. The interior lighting switches off The interior lighting remains switched automatically. off in darkness, even when you: You can set whether the interior light- ț unlock the vehicle ing should come on when you remove the key from the starter switch via the ț open a door control system, see “Setting interior ț remove the SmartKey from the lighting delayed shut-off” starter switch (୴ page 173). i If the door remains open, the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately 5minutes.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 115 Controls in detail Lighting

Interior lighting in the rear Door entry lamps Trunk lamp

For better orientation in the dark, the cor- The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is responding door entry lamps will switch on opened. in darkness when you open a door and the If the trunk remains open, the trunk light- automatic control is activated. ing switches off automatically after ap- The door entry lamps switch off when the proximately 10 minutes. corresponding door is closed. i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit 1 Right rear reading lamp on/off for approximately 5 minutes. 2 Left rear reading lamp on/off 3 Left reading lamp 4 Rear interior lamp 5 Right reading lamp ̈ Switching on/off rear reading lamps: Press button 1 or 2. The respective left or right rear reading lamp comes on. Switch the rear interior lamp on/off with the button in the overhead control panel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 116 Controls in detail Windshield wipers ̄ Windshield wipers ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers windshield after the car has been driven through (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate- an automatic car wash, then wax or other resi- ly. due is on the windshield. Shortly after washing ț For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe the car in an automatic car wash, clean the wind- location and, shield with windshield washer fluid. ț remove the SmartKey from starter ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when switch the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on or a windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on ț turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and Combination switch a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, al- open the driver’s door (with the driver’s 1 Switching on windshield wipers ways operate the windshield wipers with wind- door open, starter switch is in 2 Single wipe shield washer fluid. position 0, same as with SmartKey re- Wiping with windshield washer fluid moved from starter switch) ț engage the parking brake before attempting to remove any blockage. ț Remove blockage. ț Turn the windshield wipers on again. If the windshield wipers fail to function at all in combination switch position U or V, ț set the combination switch to the next higher wiper speed ț have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ̈ Switch on the ignition. Information Provided by:Provided Information 117 Controls in detail Windshield wipers

Switching on/off windshield wipers Single wipe Intermittent wiping

̈ Turn the combination switch to the ̈ Press the combination switch briefly in Only switch on intermittent wiping under desired position depending on the the direction of arrow 2 (୴ page 117) wet weather conditions or in the presence intensity of the rain. to the resistance point. of precipitation. M Windshield wipers off The windshield wipers wipe one time ! Vehicles with rain sensor*: without washer fluid. U Slow intermittent wiping Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic (rain sensor* operation with low car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers sensitivity) will operate in the presence of water sprayed on V Fast intermittent wiping the windshield, and the windshield wipers may be damaged as a result. (rain sensor* operation with high sensitivity) ! Vehicles with rain sensor*: If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on the u Slow continuous wiping surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may t Fast continuous wiping cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undesired fashion. This could then damage the wind- i When the windshield wipers are switched on shield wiper blades or scratch the windows. You and you brake the vehicle to a stop, the wipers should therefore switch off the windshield wip- operate more slowly. ers when weather conditions are dry.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 118 Controls in detail Windshield wipers

̈ Turn the combination switch to posi- i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the Wiping with windshield washer fluid tion U or V. vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is opened. This protects persons getting into or out ̈ Press the combination switch in the di- Intermittent wiping starts with selected of the vehicle from being sprayed. rection of arrow 2 (୴ page 117) past wiping interval. Intermittent wiping will be continued when the resistance point. Vehicles with rain sensor*: ț all doors are closed The windshield wiper operates with After the initial wipe, pauses between washer fluid. wipes are automatically controlled by and ț the rain sensor. the clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with i To prevent smears on the windshield or Intermittent wiping interval is depen- manual transmission noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with wind- dent on wetness of windshield. or shield washer fluid every now and then even when it is raining. ț the gear selector lever is position D or R (vehicles with automatic transmission*) i Vehicles with headlamp cleaning system*: or The headlamp cleaning system* will clean the ț the wiper setting is changed using the com- headlamps automatically after the first and every bination switch tenth time windshield washer fluid is used while the engine is running (୴ page 112). For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (୴ page 330).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 119 Controls in detail Power windows

Opening and closing power windows Warning! G Warning! G The door windows are opened and closed electrically. The switches Do not keep any part of your body up against When closing the windows, make sure there the side window pane when opening a win- is no danger of anyone being harmed by the ț for all door windows are on the driver’s dow. The downward motion of the pane may closing procedure. door pull that part of your body down between Activate the override switch (୴ page 57) ț for the front passenger door window the window pane and the door frame and when children are riding in the back seats of are on the front passenger door trap it there. If there is a risk of entrapment, the vehicle. The children may otherwise in- ț for each rear door window are on the release the switch and press it again to jure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped respective rear door close the window. in the window opening. The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the lower part of the respective switch again. The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pressed the switch past 1 Left front door window the resistance point and released it to close 2 Right front door window the window, the automatic reversal function 3 Right rear door window will stop the window and open it slightly. 4 Override switch 5 Left rear door window Information Provided by:Provided Information 120 Controls in detail Power windows

̈ Opening: Press the desired switch 1 If the window encounters an obstruction i You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening fea- to 4 (୴ page 120) to the resistance that blocks its path in a circumstance where ture” (୴ page 123) and “Convenience closing point. you are closing the window by pressing and feature” (୴ page 124). holding the switch, by pressing and holding The corresponding window will move button ‹ on the SmartKey or SmartKey i Operating the windows from the rear is not down until you release the switch. possible if you activate the override switch with KEYLESS-GO*, by pressing and holding ̈ (୴ page 57). Closing: Pull the desired switch 1 to the sensor surface (vehicles with 4 (୴ page 120) to the resistance KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside door handle, i With the SmartKey in starter switch point. or by pressing and holding button , on position 0 or removed from the starter switch, the climate control panel (Canada only), the the power windows can be operated: The corresponding window will move automatic reversal function will not operate. ț until you open the driver’s or front passenger up until you release the switch. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the door SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ț for approximately 5 minutes if no door was Warning! G from the starter switch, take it with you, and opened lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- ̈ Switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). If you press and hold the switch up when tended in the vehicle, or with access to an closing the window, and upward movement unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- of the window is blocked by some obstruc- cess to a vehicle could result in an accident tion including but not limited to arms, hands, and/or serious personal injury. fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate. ୴୴

Information Provided by:Provided Information 121 Controls in detail Power windows

୴୴̈ Express-opening: Press the switch 1 ̈ Stopping during Express-operation: to 4 (୴ page 120) past the resistance Warning! G Briefly press the respective power win- point and release. dow switch again. If a window is blocked while closing and re- The corresponding window opens com- opens, it can be closed with greater force if pletely. you pull the switch to the resistance point ̈ Express-closing: Pull the switch 1 within 2 seconds. ୴ to 4 ( page 120) past the resistance If the window is blocked again and reopens, point and release. you can close it with deactivated anti-trap The corresponding window closes com- protection by pulling the switch again to the pletely. resistance point within 2 seconds. When closing windows with the anti-trap Warning! G protection deactivated, make sure no one can become trapped, as this could result in Driver’s door only: serious or fatal injuries. If within 5 seconds you again press the switch past the resistance point and re- ! If the upward movement of the window is lease, the automatic reversal will not oper- blocked during the closing procedure, the win- ate. dow will stop and open slightly. Remove the obstruction, press the respective power window switch again past the resistance point and release. If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction, press and hold the respective power window switch. The side window will then close without the protection of the automatic reversal feature.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 122 Controls in detail Power windows

Summer opening feature ̈ Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey Vehicles with panorama roof* towards the sensor in the driver’s out- If roller sunblinds are retracted: If the weather is warm, you can ventilate side door handle. The SmartKey must the vehicle before driving off by simulta- be in close proximity to the driver’s ̈ Press and hold button Œ. The side neously: door handle. windows and roller sunblinds begin to open/extend after approximately ț opening the side windows ̈ Press button to unlock the Œ 1 second. ț opening the tilt/sliding sunroof or pan- vehicle. ̈ With the side windows and roller blinds orama roof with power tilt/sliding pan- fully opened/extended, press and hold el* and roller sunblinds Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof button Œ again. The tilt/sliding pan- ̈ Press and hold button Œ until the i The “Summer opening” function can only be el tilts and opens. activated via the remote control of the SmartKey side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. have reached the desired position. If roller sunblinds are extended: ̈ Release button Œ to interrupt pro- ̈ Press and hold button Œ. The side cedure. windows move down and the tilt/sliding panel tilts and opens after approximately 1 second. ̈ Release button Œ to interrupt procedure.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 123 Controls in detail Power windows

Convenience closing feature Vehicles with SmartKey If potential danger exists, proceed as follows: When you lock the vehicle, you can close the side windows and tilt/sliding sunroof ț Release button ‹ to stop the closing or panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel* procedure. To open, press and hold but- simultaneously. ton Œ. To continue the closing after making sure that there is no danger of Afterward, you can close the roller sun- anyone being harmed by the closing pro- blinds* of the panorama tilt/sliding sun- cedure, press and hold button ‹. roof*. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only): i The function of the SmartKey overrules the ț Release the sensor surface on the out- KEYLESS-GO function. side door handle (୴ page 125) to stop ̈ Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey the closing procedure. towards the sensor in the driver’s out- Warning! G ț Immediately pull on the same outside side door handle. The SmartKey must door handle and hold firmly. The side be in close proximity to the driver’s When closing the windows and the tilt/slid- windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof or door handle. ing sunroof or panorama roof with tilt/slid- panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel* will open for as long as the outside door ̈ Press button ‹ to lock the vehicle. ing panel*, make sure there is no danger of handle is held but the door is not anyone being harmed by the closing proce- opened. Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof dure. ̈ Press and hold button ‹ until the side windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof are completely closed. ̈ Release button ‹ to interrupt procedure.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 124 Controls in detail Power windows

Vehicles with panorama roof* The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be Vehicles with panorama roof* located outside the vehicle within approxi- ̈ Press and hold button ‹ until the ̈ Touch and hold sensor surface 1 until side windows and the tilt/sliding panel mately 3 ft (1 m) of a door. the side windows and the tilt/sliding are completely closed. ̈ Close all doors. panel are completely closed. ̈ Press and hold button ‹ again. Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof i Make sure you are only touching the sensor The roller sunblinds close. surface. ̈ Touch and hold sensor surface 1 until ̈ Touch and hold sensor surface 1 ̈ Release button ‹ to interrupt pro- the windows and the tilt/sliding sun- again. cedure. roof are completely closed. The roller sunblinds close. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* i Make sure you are only touching the sensor ̈ Release sensor surface 1 to interrupt (Canada only) surface. procedure. ̈ Release sensor surface 1 to interrupt procedure.

1 Sensor surface on door handle

Information Provided by:Provided Information 125 Controls in detail Driving and parking

Starting the engine Manual transmission Warning! G

Make sure absolutely no objects are ob- Warning! G structing the pedals’ range of movement. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon the footwell, make sure the pedals still have monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un- sufficient clearance. consciousness and possible death. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers Do not run the engine in confined areas the objects could get caught between the (such as a garage) which are not properly pedals. You could then no longer brake or ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for manual transmission accelerate. This could lead to accidents and fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, For more information, see “Manual trans- injury. have the cause determined and corrected mission” (୴ page 136). immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive with at least one window fully open.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 126 Controls in detail Driving and parking

̈ Starting: Depress brake pedal. Automatic transmission* SmartKey ̈ Make sure the gearshift lever is in ̈ Starting: Make sure the gear selector neutral position (no gear selected). lever is set to P. ̈ Fully depress clutch pedal. ̈ Do not depress the accelerator. Otherwise the engine cannot be ̈ Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch started due to the integrated safety to position 3 and hold until the engine interlock. starts. ̈ Do not depress the accelerator. i You can also use the “touch-start” function. ̈ Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts Gearshift pattern for automatic to position 3 and hold until the engine automatically. starts. transmission You can also start the engine with the auto- For information on turning off the engine, P Park position i matic transmission set to N. see “Turning off the engine” (୴ page 134). R Reverse gear N Neutral For information on turning off the engine D Drive position with the SmartKey, see “Turning off the en- For more information on how to operate gine” (୴ page 134). the gear selector lever, see “Automatic transmission*” (୴ page 127).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 127 Controls in detail Driving and parking

KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) i You can also start the engine with the automatic transmission set to N. Warning! G i If you wish to start the vehicle with the SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO feature, As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. the starter switch and proceed as described in Therefore, never leave children unattended “Starting with the SmartKey” (୴ page 127). in the vehicle, as they could otherwise acci- For information on turning off the engine dentally start the engine. with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off the en- When leaving the vehicle, always take the gine” (୴ page 134). 1 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and (Canada only) lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an ̈ Starting: Make sure KEYLESS-GO unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- start/stop button is inserted in the cess to a vehicle could result in an accident starter switch (୴ page 83). and/or serious personal injury. ̈ Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P. You can start your vehicle without the ̈ Depress the brake pedal during the SmartKey in the starter switch using the starting procedure. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the starter switch. ̈ Do not depress the accelerator. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be ̈ Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button located in the vehicle. once. The engine starts if the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GOby:Provided Information is in the vehicle. 128 Controls in detail Driving and parking

Starting difficulties ̈ Start the engine with the SmartKey as Driving off radio signals from another source may Remember that extended starting attempts ! be interfering with the SmartKey with can drain the battery. KEYLESS-GO*. Warning! G ̈ Repeat the starting procedure The engine does not start. You can hear When leaving the vehicle, always remove the (୴ page 126). the starter. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* There could be a malfunction If the engine does not start after several (Canada only) from the starter switch, take starting attempts: it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not ț in the engine electronics, or ̈ Call Roadside Assistance. leave children unattended in the vehicle, or ț in the fuel supply system with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children ̈ Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Carry out the following steps: could release the parking brake, which Center. could result in an accident and/or serious ̈ If you are starting the engine with the personal injury. SmartKey: Turn SmartKey in starter The engine does not start. You cannot switch to position 0 and repeat starting hear the starter. procedure (୴ page 126). The battery may not be sufficiently Warning! G ̈ If you are starting the engine with charged. KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that On slippery road surfaces, never downshift ̈ Get a jump start (୴ page 451). may be open to allow for better detec- in order to obtain braking action. This could tion of the SmartKey with If the engine will not start despite a jump result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- KEYLESS-GO*. start: cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. or ̈ Call Roadside Assistance. ̈ Remove the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop ̈ Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz button from starter switch. Center.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 129 Controls in detail Driving and parking

i At vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph Manual transmission (15 km/h), the automatic central locking system ̈ Fully depress the clutch pedal. engages and the locking knobs in the doors drop down. ! In order to avoid damage to the transmis- The automatic door lock feature can be deacti- sion, place the gearshift lever to reverse gear vated (୴ page 173). only when the vehicle is stopped. You can open a locked door from the inside. ̈ Move gearshift lever to first gear to Open door only when conditions are safe to do drive forward, or to reverse gear to so. drive in reverse. ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator ̈ Release the brake pedal. 1 Release handle pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine 2 Parking brake pedal performance and causes premature brake and ̈ Simultaneously slowly release the drivetrain wear. clutch pedal and carefully depress the ̈ Release the parking brake by pulling on accelerator pedal. release handle 1. ! Do not run a cold engine at high engine speeds as this may shorten its service life. Shift gear in a timely manner and do not ex- The indicator lamp ; (USA only) ! ceed the maximum permissible engine speed for or 3 (Canada only) in the instru- each gear. ment cluster goes out. Do not allow the wheels to spin as this could ! If you hear a warning signal, the red indica- damage the drive train. tor lamp 0 (USA only) or ! (Canada only) in the instrument cluster flashes and the message Release Parking Brake appears in the multifunction display when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake. Release the parking brake.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 130 Controls in detail Driving and parking

Automatic transmission* ̈ Release the parking brake by pulling on Turn signals release handle 1. Warning! G The indicator lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only) in the instru- It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le- ment cluster goes out. ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high- ̈ Shift automatic transmission to D or R. er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel- i Wait for the gear selection process to com- erate quickly forward or in reverse. You plete before setting the vehicle in motion. could lose control of the vehicle and hit ! Shift the automatic transmission to P or R someone or something. Only shift into gear only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid when the engine is idling normally and when damaging the transmission. Combination switch your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. ̈ Release the brake pedal. 1 Turn signals, right 2 Turn signals, left ̈ Shifting from gear position P to position R, Carefully depress the accelerator i ̈ Press the combination switch in the N, or D is only possible with the brake pedal de- pedal. direction of arrow 1 or 2. pressed. Without the brake pedal depressed, the After a cold start, the automatic transmis- gear selector lever can be moved, but the park- sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. The corresponding turn signal indicator ing pawl remains engaged, not allowing shifting lamp L or K in the instrument to occur. This allows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier. cluster flashes (୴ page 26). ̈ Depress the brake pedal. For more information, see “Driving instruc- The combination switch resets automati- The gear selector lever can now be tions” (୴ page 311). cally after major steering wheel move- used. ments.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 131 Controls in detail Driving and parking i To signal minor directional changes such as The coolant temperature is above In case of accident 248°F (120°C) changing lanes, press combination switch only If the vehicle is leaking gasoline: to point of resistance and release. The corre- The coolant is too hot and is no longer sponding turn signals will flash three times. ̈ Do not start the engine under any cir- cooling the engine. cumstances. Problems while driving ̈ Stop the vehicle in a safe location as ̈ Move away from vehicle. soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool ̈ Notify local fire and/or police authori- The engine runs erratically and misfires off. ties. ț An ignition cable may be damaged. ̈ Check the coolant level and add cool- If the extent of the damage cannot be de- ț The engine electronics may not be op- ant if necessary (୴ page 329). termined: erating properly. ̈ i Excessive coolant temperatures trigger a Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz ț Unburned gasoline may have entered warning message in the multifunction display Center. ୴ the catalytic converter and damaged it. ( page 402). If no damage can be determined on the ̈ Give very little gas. ț major assemblies ̈ Have the problem repaired at an autho- ț fuel system rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. ț engine mount: ̈ Start the engine in the usual manner.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 132 Controls in detail Driving and parking

Parking ț Manual transmission: Move the gear- Warning! G shift lever into neutral position (no gear is selected). Warning! G Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle ț Firmly depress parking brake pedal. is in motion can cause the rear wheels to With the engine not running, there is no ț Manual transmission: Move the gear- lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle power assistance for the brake and the shift lever into first or reverse gear. and cause an accident. In addition, the steering systems. In this case, it is impor- ț Automatic transmission*: Move the vehicle’s brake lights do not light up when tant to keep in mind that a considerably gear selector lever to position P. the parking brake is engaged. higher degree of effort is necessary to brake ț Slowly release brake pedal. and steer the vehicle. ț When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb. ț Turn the SmartKey to starter switch Warning! G position 0 and remove, or press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- (୴ page 84). bustible materials such as grass, hay, or ț Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with leaves can come into contact with the hot KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle exhaust system, as these materials could be when leaving. ignited and cause a vehicle fire. To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re- 1 Release handle sult of vehicle movement, before turning off 2 Parking brake pedal ୴୴ the engine and leaving the vehicle always: ț Keep right foot on brake pedal.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 133 Controls in detail Driving and parking

୴୴̈ Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2. Turning off the engine Position P alone may not prevent your vehi- When the engine is running, the cle from moving, possibly hitting people or ̈ Manual transmission: Move the gear- warning lamp ; (USA only) objects. Always set the parking brake in ad- shift lever into first or reverse gear. or 3 (Canada only) in the instru- dition to shifting to position P (୴ page 140) ment cluster will be illuminated. (manual transmission: first or reverse gear ̈ Automatic transmission*: Place the (୴ page 126). gear selector lever in position P. Warning! G When parked on an incline, always turn the i Vehicles with automatic transmission*: front wheels towards the road curb. You can switch off the engine with the selector lever in position N. However, to secure the vehi- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Getting out of your vehicle without taking SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* cle, you need to set the selector lever to P and the above measurements to secure it is apply the parking brake. (Canada only) from the starter switch, take dangerous. The SmartKey can only be removed from the it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not starter switch with the gear selector lever in leave children unattended in the vehicle, or position P. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or i Always set the parking brake in addition to move the gear selector lever from shifting to position P (manual transmission: first or reverse gear). position P, either of which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 134 Controls in detail Driving and parking

KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) Releasing seat belts Warning! G ̈ Turning off: Press the KEYLESS-GO ̈ Press the seat belt release button start/stop button to turn off the en- Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle (୴ page 106). has come to a complete stop. With the engine. Allow the retractor to completely re- gine not running, there is no power assis- With the driver’s door closed, the start- wind the seat belt by guiding the latch tance for the brake and steering systems. In er switch is now in position 1. With the plate. this case, it is important to keep in mind that driver’s door opened, the starter switch a considerably higher degree of effort is nec- is set to position 0, same as SmartKey ! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that essary to brake and steer the vehicle. removed from starter switch. the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get caught or pinched in the door or in the seat i In an emergency you can turn off the engine mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and SmartKey while driving by pressing and holding the impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or ̈ Turning off: Turn the SmartKey in the KEYLESS-GO start/ stop button for approxi- cause damage to the door and/or door trim pan- mately 3 seconds. starter switch to position 0 and remove el. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. it. The immobilizer is activated. Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 135 Controls in detail Manual transmission

Manual transmission is standard Do not park this vehicle in areas where equipment on C 300 Sport and not Warning! G combustible materials such as grass, hay or available on other models. leaves can come into contact with the hot On slippery road surfaces, never downshift For information on driving with a manual exhaust system, as these materials could be in order to obtain braking action. This could transmission, see “Manual transmission” ignited and cause a vehicle fire. result in drive wheel slip and reduced ୴ ( page 130). vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control. Warning! G Warning! G When leaving the vehicle, always remove the For vehicles equipped with a manual trans- Warning! G SmartKey from the starter switch, take it mission, getting out of your vehicle with the with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave gearshift lever not engaged in first or Make sure absolutely no objects are ob- children unattended in the vehicle, or with reverse gear and parking brake engaged is structing the pedals’ range of movement. access to an unlocked vehicle. Children dangerous. Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- could move the gearshift lever, which could cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged result in an accident and/or serious person- the footwell, make sure the pedals still have first or reverse gear alone may not prevent al injury. your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting sufficient clearance. people or objects. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers Always set the parking brake in addition to the objects could get caught between or be- engaging first or reverse gear (୴ page 134). neath the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate. This could lead to acci- When parked on an incline, turn front wheels dents and injury. towards the road curb.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 136 Controls in detail Manual transmission

! When you are shifting into the 5th or 6th Shifting into reverse gear, make sure you press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise, you could accidentally shift ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehi- into the 3rd or 4th gear and damage the trans- cle is stationary, as the transmission could oth- mission. erwise be damaged. Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the ̈ Stop the vehicle completely. engine can result in engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran- ̈ Fully depress clutch pedal. ty. ̈ Move the gearshift lever to neutral Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using position (no gear selected). Gearshift pattern for manual transmission the clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- ̈ Move the gearshift lever to the left until ited Warranty. you feel a certain resistance. Do not exceed the engine speed limits. Refer to ̈ Push the gearshift lever past this tachometer (୴ page 149) for engine speeds. resistance. ̈ Then move the gearshift lever forward into position R.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 137 Controls in detail Automatic transmission*

For more information on driving with an Gear selector lever automatic transmission, see “Automatic Warning! G transmission*” (୴ page 131). The gear selector lever is located on the Make sure absolutely no objects are ob- lower part of the center console. Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear structing the pedals’ range of movement. shifting process to your individual driving Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- style by continually adjusting the shift cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in points up or down. These shift point adjust- the footwell, make sure the pedals still have ments are performed based on current sufficient clearance. operating and driving conditions. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers If the operating conditions change, the the objects could get caught between be- automatic transmission reacts by neath the pedals. You could then no longer adjusting its shift program. brake or accelerate. This could lead to acci- i During the brief warm-up, transmission dents and injury. upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature. P Park position R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position i The current gear selector lever position P, R, N or D appears in the multifunction display (୴ page 140).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 138 Controls in detail Automatic transmission*

Shifting procedure ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Warning! G Do not place full load on the engine until the The automatic transmission selects indi- operating temperature has been reached. It is dangerous to shift the gear selector vidual gears automatically, depending on: Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only lever out of park position P or neutral ț gear selector lever position D when the vehicle is stopped. position N if the engine speed is higher than (୴ page 140) with gear ranges Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the (୴ page 143) on slippery road surfaces. This may cause seri- brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate ous damage to the drivetrain which is not cov- quickly forward or reverse. You could lose ț the selected program mode (C/S) ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. control of the vehicle and hit someone or (୴ page 144) When the gear selector lever is in drive something. Only shift into gear when the ț the position of the accelerator pedal position D, you can influence transmission engine is idling normally and when your right (୴ page 142) shifting by: foot is firmly on the brake pedal. ț the vehicle speed ț limiting the gear range An additional indication of the current gear ț changing gears manually selector lever position can be found on the cover of the shifting-gate. The indicators come on when you activate a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or opening a door) and go out after approximately 15 minutes.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 139 Controls in detail Automatic transmission*

Gear selector lever positions Effect Effect The current gear selector lever position ì Park position The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch appears in the multifunction display. Gear selector lever position with the gear selector lever in when the vehicle is parked. Place park position P. With the gear selector lever in park SmartKey removed, the gear position P only when vehicle is selector lever is locked in park stopped. The park position is not position P. intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. If the vehicle’s electrical system Rather, the driver should always is malfunctioning, the gear set the parking brake in addition selector lever could remain to placing the gear selector lever locked in park position P in park position P to secure the (୴ page 426). 1 Current gear selector lever position vehicle. í Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 140 Controls in detail Automatic transmission*

Effect ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in neutral Warning! G ë Neutral position N can result in transmission damage No power is transmitted from the that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Limited Warranty. engine to the drive axle. When SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* the brakes are released, the (Canada only) from the starter switch, take vehicle can be moved freely Warning! G it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not (pushed or towed). leave children unattended in the vehicle, or Getting out of your vehicle without shifting with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children To avoid damage to the trans- into park position P is dangerous. Also, park could move the gear selector lever from mission, never engage neutral position P alone is not intended to or capa- park position P, which could result in an ac- position N while driving. ble of preventing your vehicle from moving, cident and/or serious personal injury. ® If the ESP is deactivated or possibly hitting people or objects. Getting out of your vehicle without taking malfunctioning: Always set the parking brake (୴ page 140) the above measurements to secure it is Move gear selector lever to neu- in addition to shifting to park position P. dangerous. tral position N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on When parked on an incline, turn the front icy roads. wheels towards the road curb. ê Drive Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or The transmission shifts leaves can come into contact with the hot automatically. All forward gears exhaust system, as these materials could be are available. ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 141 Controls in detail Automatic transmission*

Driving tips Stopping Working on the vehicle When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: G Accelerator position ̈ Leave the transmission in gear. Warning! Your driving style influences the ̈ Hold the vehicle with the brake. When working on the vehicle, set the transmission’s shifting behavior: When you stop for a longer period of time parking brake and move gear selector lever Less throttle Earlier upshifting with the engine idling and/or on a hill: to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away. More throttle Later upshifting ̈ Set the parking brake. Kickdown ̈ Move the gear selector lever to park position P. Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration. Maneuvering ̈ Press the accelerator past the point of When you maneuver in tight areas, resistance. e.g. when pulling into a parking space: Depending on the engine speed the ̈ Control the vehicle speed by gradually transmission shifts into a lower gear. releasing the brakes. ̈ Ease on the accelerator when you have ̈ Accelerate gently. reached the desired speed. ̈ Never abruptly step on the accelerator. The transmission shifts up again.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 142 Controls in detail Automatic transmission*

Gear ranges The selected gear range appears in the Effect multifunction display. With the gear selector lever in drive è The transmission shifts through position D, you can select a gear range for third gear only. the automatic transmission to operate With this selection you can use within. the braking effect of the engine. Gear selector lever (୴ page 145): ç The transmission shifts through You can limit the gear range by pressing second gear only. the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and Allows the use of engine’s reverse the gear range limit by pressing braking power when driving the gear selector lever to the right (D+). ț on steep downgrades 1 Current gear range ț in mountainous regions Effect ț under extreme operating ï The transmission shifts through conditions sixth gear only. æ The transmission operates in î The transmission shifts through first gear only. fifth gear only. For maximum use of engine’s é The transmission shifts through braking effect on very steep or fourth gear only. lengthy downgrades.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 143 Controls in detail Automatic transmission*

Automatic shift program The selected program mode appears in the ̈ Press program mode selector switch multifunction display. repeatedly until the letter of the The program mode selector switch is desired program mode appears in the located on the lower part of the center multifunction display. console. Select C for comfort driving: ț The vehicle starts out in second gear (both forward and reverse) for gentler starts. This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected. ț Traction and driving stability are 1 Selected program mode (comfort or improved on icy roads. sport) ț Upshifts occur earlier even when Program mode selector switch ! Never change the program mode when the you give more gas. The engine then gear selector lever is out of park position P. This operates at lower rpms and the C Comfort For comfort driving could result in a change of driving characteristics wheels are less likely to spin. S Sport For standard driving for which you may not be prepared. Select S for standard driving: i The last selected program mode (C or S) is switched on when the engine is restarted. ț The vehicle starts out in first gear. ț Upshifts occur later.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 144 Controls in detail Automatic transmission*

Gear selector lever one-touch ̈ Briefly press the gear selector lever to Canceling gear range limit gearshifting D- the left in the direction. ̈ Press and hold the gear selector lever The transmission will shift to the next in the D+ direction until D reappears in With the gear selector lever in drive lower gear as permitted by the shift the multifunction display (୴ page 140). position D, you can limit or extend the gear program. This action simultaneously range. The transmission will shift from the limits the gear range of the transmis- current gear range directly to gear sion (୴ page 143). ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. range D. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached. i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower Shifting into optimal gear range Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only gear if the engine’s max. speed would be ̈ when the vehicle is stopped. exceeded. Press and hold the gear selector lever Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off in the D- direction. on slippery road surfaces. This may cause seri- Extending gear range The transmission will automatically ous damage to the drivetrain which is not cov- select the gear range suited for optimal ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ̈ Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D+ direction. acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more Limiting gear range The transmission will shift to the next gears. higher gear as permitted by the shift Warning! G program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmis- On slippery road surfaces, never downshift sion. in order to obtain braking action. This could If you press on the accelerator when the en- result in drive wheel slip and reduced i gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected. prevent this type of loss of control.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 145 Controls in detail Automatic transmission*

Emergency operation (Limp-Home Mode)

If vehicle acceleration becomes less re- sponsive or sluggish or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be selected. ̈ Stop the vehicle in a safe location. ̈ Move the gear selector lever to park position P. ̈ Turn off the engine. ̈ Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting. ̈ Restart the engine. ̈ Move the gear selector lever to position D (for second gear) or position R. ̈ Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 146 Controls in detail Instrument cluster ̄ Instrument cluster A full view illustration of the instrument Multifunction display Warning! G cluster can be found in the “At a glance” section of this manual (୴ page 26). The multifunction display is activated when No messages will be displayed if either the you: instrument cluster or the multifunction dis- You can change the instrument cluster ț open a door play is inoperative. settings in the instrument cluster submenu of the control system (୴ page 168). ț As a result, you will not be able to see infor- switch on the ignition mation about your driving conditions, such ț switch on the exterior lamps as speed or outside temperature, warning/ The language setting for the multifunction indicator lamps, malfunction/warning mes- display can be changed via control system sages or the failure of any systems. Driving (୴ page 168). characteristics may be impaired. If you must continue to drive, please do so with added caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 147 Controls in detail Instrument cluster

Adjusting instrument cluster display ̈ Brightening illumination: Turn Coolant temperature gauge illumination dimmer 1 clockwise. The coolant temperature gauge is on the ̈ Dimming illumination: Turn left side in the instrument cluster dimmer 1 counterclockwise. (୴ page 26).

Warning! G

ț Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned. 1 Dimmer ț Steam from an overheated engine can i The instrument cluster illumination is cause serious burns and can occur just dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am- by opening the hood. Stay away from bient light conditions. the engine if you see or hear steam com- The instrument cluster illumination will also be ing from it. adjusted automatically when you switch on the Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from vehicle’s exterior lamps. other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 148 Controls in detail Instrument cluster

! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a Tachometer Outside temperature indicator warning in the multifunction display (୴ page 402). The red marking on the tachometer de- The outside temperature is indicated in the The engine should not be operated with the cool- notes excessive engine speed. multifunction display (୴ page 151). ant temperature above 248°F (120°C), i.e. in Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as the red zone of the coolant temperature gauge. ! it may result in serious engine damage that is not G Doing so may cause serious engine damage Warning! covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- Warranty. ited Warranty. The outside temperature indicator is not de- To help protect the engine, the fuel supply signed to serve as an ice-warning device and During severe operating conditions, i is interrupted if the engine is operated is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C), i.e. close to within the red marking. Indicated temperatures just above the freez- the red zone of the temperature gauge. ing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 149 Controls in detail Instrument cluster

The outside temperature sensor is located Fuel gauge in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or The fuel gauge is on the left-hand side of engine heat during idling or slow driving. the instrument cluster (୴ page 26). Once Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed the fuel level has fallen below the reserve temperature can only be verified by com- mark, the yellow fuel tank reserve warning parison to a thermometer placed next to lamp 4 for the fuel reserve comes on the sensor, not by comparison to external (୴ page 380). displays (e.g. bank signs, etc.). When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed. A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 150 Controls in detail Control system ̄ Control system The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G turned to position 2 or as soon as the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (Canada A driver’s attention to the road and traffic only) is in position 2. The control system conditions must always be his/her primary enables you to: focus when driving. ț call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction ț change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the For example, you can use the control driver when traffic and road conditions system to find out when your vehicle is permit it to be done safely. next due for service, to call up statistical Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Text field data on your vehicle, and much more. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Line for main menus covering a distance of 44 feet 3 Temperature (approximately 14 m) every second. 4 Current program mode (automatic transmission*) The control system relays information to 5 Current gear selector lever the multifunction display. position/gear range (automatic transmission*) Additional speedometer (manual transmission) 6 Digital clock Settings, functions, submenus as well as any malfunctions are shown to you in the text field. Information Provided by:Provided Information 151 Controls in detail Control system

Multifunction steering wheel Item Item The displays in the multifunction display 1 Multifunction display 4 L to cancel Voice Control*, and the settings in the control system are Operating control system back, confirm messages controlled using the buttons on the multi- 2 Volume control: 5 To call up line for menus and select function steering wheel. Press button menus: Press button æ to increase volume & to scroll to the right ç to decrease volume ( to scroll to the left Telephone*: Press button To select submenu or scroll through lists: s to take a call Press button to dial a call $ to scroll up t to end a call to reject an incoming call % to scroll down F to mute Press button 3 ! to activate Voice Control* # to confirm selection or messages

i Voice Control* is only available with COMAND*. Refer to separate operating instructions.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 152 Controls in detail Control system

Depending on the selected menu The number of menus available in the sys- ̈ Press and hold button L until the (୴ page 155), pressing the buttons on the tem depends on which optional equipment standard display featuring the odome- multifunction steering wheel will alter what is installed in your vehicle. ter and speedometer appears. is shown in the multifunction display. i The headings used in the menus table are ̈ To confirm selection: The information available in the multifunc- designed to facilitate navigation within the sys- Press button #. tion display is arranged in menus, each tem and are not necessarily identical to those ̈ To confirm display message: containing a number of functions or sub- shown in the control system displays. Press button # or L. menus. The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system The control system saves certain dis- The individual functions are then found you are in. play messages. Calling up display mes- within the relevant menu (radio or CD op- sages (୴ page 164). erations under Audio, for example). These Using the control system functions serve to call up relevant informa- For information about warning and mal- tion or to customize the settings for your ̈ To select a menu: function messages appearing in the multi- vehicle. Press button ( or &. function display (୴ page 387). In the Settings menu, instead of functions ̈ To select a submenu: you will find a number of submenus for Press button % or $. calling up and changing settings. For ̈ To go to the next higher menu level: instructions on using these submenus, see Press button L. “Submenus in the Settings menu” ̈ To select the standard display: Press (୴ page 166). button L repeatedly until the stan- It is helpful to think of the menus, and the dard display featuring the odometer functions within each menu, as being and speedometer appears. arranged in a circular pattern. or

Information Provided by:Provided Information 153 Controls in detail Control system

Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an through the menus. overview of the individual menus.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 154 Controls in detail Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Trip computer Navi* Audio Tel* Service Settings (୴ page 156) (୴ page 158) (୴ page 158) (୴ page 160) (୴ page 164) (୴ page 165) Standard display Show route guid- Selecting radio To take a call Call up vehicle mal- Reset to factory ance instructions, station function, warning and settings current direction system status mes- traveled sages stored in mem- ory1 Fuel consumption Selecting satellite Select a phone Tire Pressure Monitor- Instrument cluster statistics since start radio station* book entry ing System (TPMS) submenu (USA only) Fuel consumption Operating Redial Run Flat Indicator statistics since the CD player* (Canada only) last reset

Commands/submenus Distance to empty Call up maintenance service display Digital speedometer or outside temperature 1 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 155 Controls in detail Control system

Trip menu Standard display Fuel consumption statistics since start In the standard display, the trip odometer ̈ Press ( or & to select the Trip In the Trip menu, you can show an addi- and the main odometer are shown in the menu. tional display for the speedometer and call multifunction display. up or reset your vehicle’s statistical data. ̈ Press % to select From Start. The following information is available: Function Page Standard display 156 Fuel consumption statistics 156 since start Trip odometer 1 1 Distance driven since start Fuel consumption statistics 157 Main odometer 2 2 Time elapsed since start since last reset If another display is shown instead of the 3 Average speed since start Distance to empty 157 standard display: 4 Average fuel consumption since start Digital speedometer 158 ̈ Press ( or & to select the Trip i All values that are based on the last start are Resetting 157 menu. reset when you turn off the vehicle’s engine for more than four hours. or If you turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 again ̈ Press button L repeatedly until the during this time, the values will not be reset. standard display appears. After 999 hours or 9999 miles (kilometers), the or fuel consumption statistics after start are automatically reset. ̈ Press and hold button L until the standard display appears.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 156 Controls in detail Control system

Fuel consumption statistics since last Resetting values Distance to empty reset You can reset the values for the following ̈ Press ( or & to select the Trip ̈ Press ( or & to select the Trip functions: menu. menu. ț Trip odometer ̈ Press % or $ to select Range. ̈ Press or to select Since % $ ț Fuel consumption statistics since start With the ignition switched on, the Reset. ț Fuel consumption statistics since last calculated remaining driving range reset based on the current fuel tank level appears in the multifunction display. ̈ Press ( or & to select the Trip menu. ̈ Press % or $ to select the function you wish to reset. 1 Distance driven since last reset ̈ Press #. 2 Time elapsed since last reset 3 Average speed since last reset 1 Approximate distance 4 Average fuel consumption since last reset When the reserve tank is half empty, only the fuel pump symbol W is displayed. i After 9999 hours or 99999 miles (kilometers), the fuel consumption statistics since last reset are automatically reset. Example illustration: Reset fuel consumption statistics since start ̈ Press % to select Yes. ̈ Press # to confirm. Information Provided by:Provided Information 157 Controls in detail Control system

Digital speedometer Navi* menu Audio menu ̈ Press ( or & to select the Trip The Navi menu contains the functions The functions in the Audio menu operate menu. needed to operate your navigation system. the audio equipment which you currently ̈ Press % or $ to select the digital have turned on. ̈ Press ( or & to select the Navi speedometer. menu. If no audio equipment is currently turned ț If COMAND* is switched off, the mes- on, the message Audio Off appears in the multifunction display. sage Navi Off appears in the multifunction display. The following functions are available: ț With COMAND* switched on but route Function Page guidance not activated, the direction of Selecting radio station 159 1 Digital speedometer travel and, if available, the name of the street currently traveled on appear in Selecting satellite radio station* 159 the multifunction display. Operating CD player* 160 ț With COMAND* switched on and route guidance activated, the direction of ̈ To adjust the volume: Press æ or travel and maneuver instructions ap- ç on the multifunction steering pear in the multifunction display. wheel. Please refer to the COMAND* manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system*.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 158 Controls in detail Control system

Selecting radio station i You can only store new stations using the ̈ Turn on the audio system (୴ page 188) corresponding feature on the radio (୴ page 198). and press button b on audio control unit. Vehicles with COMAND*: Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to Refer to separate operating instructions. separate operating instructions. You can also operate the radio in the usual manner. 1 SAT mode ̈ Press ( or & to select the Audio 2 Channel name and/or number menu. The currently tuned station Selecting satellite radio station* appears in the multifunction display. ̈ Select next or previous stored chan- The satellite radio is treated as a radio nel: Press % or $ briefly to se- application. lect a stored channel. ̈ ୴ Turn on the radio ( page 188) and se- ̈ Select next or previous channel in lect the satellite radio with the audio waveband: Press and hold % or control unit. $ to select a channel. Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions. i A subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio ser- 1 Waveband setting vice provider is required for the satellite radio op- 2 Station frequency ̈ Press ( or & to select the Audio eration. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz menu. The currently tuned channel ̈ Select next or previous stored sta- Center for details and availability for your appears in the multifunction display. vehicle. tion: Press % or $ briefly to select a stored station. For more information on satellite radio operation, see “Satellite radio*” (୴ page 200). ̈ Select next or previous station in Vehicles with COMAND*: waveband: Press and hold % or Refer to separate operating instructions. $ to select a station.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 159 Controls in detail Control system

Operating the CD player* i To select a CD from the CD changer* maga- TEL menu* ̈ Turn on the radio and select the CD zine, press a number on the audio system or the COMAND* system key pad located in the center You can use the functions in the Tel menu mode (୴ page 213). console. to operate your Bluetooth® enabled tele- Vehicles with COMAND*: phone, if it is switched on and connected Refer to separate operating For more information on CD operation, see via the Bluetooth® interface to the audio instructions. “CD mode” (୴ page 208) and for the CD changer*, see (୴ page 214). system. ̈ Press ( or & to select the Audio Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to sepa- menu. The settings for the currently be- rate operating instructions. ing played CD appear in the multifunction display. Warning! G

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from 1 Current track using a cellular telephone while driving. Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety i Level of information displayed will vary de- reasons, the driver should not use the cellu- pending on the information contained on the CD lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion. 1 Current CD (with additional number with MP3 files insert in the audio or COMAND* system. Stop the vehicle in a safe location before from 1 to 6 when running from placing or answering a call. CD changer*) For more information on MP3, see “Notes If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile 2 Current track about MP3 mode” (୴ page 210). phone while driving, please use the hands- ̈ Press % or $ to select a track. free device and be sure to pay attention to the traffic situation at all times. Use the mobile phone only when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Information Provided by:Provided Information 160 Controls in detail Control system

̈ Press ( or & to select the Tel Otherwise, you may not be able to observe menu. traffic conditions and could endanger yourself and others. Which messages will appear in the Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph multifunction display depends on whether (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is your telephone is switched on or off: covering a distance of 44 feet ț If the Bluetooth® function on the audio (approximately 14 m) every second. system is disabled, the message Blue- This standby message indicates that your tooth not activated in system set- telephone is ready for use and you can tings appears. To enable Bluetooth® operate it using the control system. Warning! G (୴ page 193). You may carry out the following functions: ț If the telephone is switched on, the Never operate radio transmitters equipped Function Page telephone will then search for a net- with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- work. During this time, the message No Dialing a number from the phone 162 out being connected to an external antenna) Service appears in the multifunction book from inside the vehicle while the engine is display. If no network available, the running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- Redialing 163 multifunction display message No Ser- tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, Answering a call 163 vice is shown continuously. possibly resulting in an accident and Ending a call or rejecting an in- 163 personal injury. ț If the telephone is on, as soon as the coming call telephone has found a network, Phone ̈ Switch on the telephone and audio sys- Ready appears in the multifunction dis- tem. play. ̈ Activate and register the telephone (୴ page 225).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 161 Controls in detail Control system

Dialing a number from the phone book The message Connecting call… appears on the multifunction display, as i For using the phone book of the audio sys- well as the dialed telephone number or tem you can import business cards (vCards) from external Bluetooth® phones into your audio name as long as it is stored in the system's phone book (୴ page 233). phone book. If your telephone is ready to receive calls, The dialed number is saved in the “Di- you may select and dial a number from the 1 Name from the phone book aled numbers” list. phone book at any time. i If you press and hold % or $ for Once a connection has been estab- ̈ Press ( or & to select the Tel more than 1 second, the system scrolls lished, the name appears on the multi- menu. rapidly through the list of names. function display, provided that it has If you press and hold % or $ for more than been stored in the phone book, other- ̈ ୴ Log on to the network ( page 193). 4 seconds, the control system shows the first wise the dialed telephone number ap- ̈ Press % or $ or # to switch four entries of the letter next used. Release the pears. to the phone book. button to stop the quick search. The search stops automatically at the end of the list. The stored names are displayed in ̈ Press s or to start dialing. ascending alphabetical order. # If several entries are present for the ̈ Press % or $ to select the de- same name, they are all shown. sired name. ̈ Press % or $ to select the desired entry. i If you do not want to dial from the phone book, press t or L. The message Ready ̈ Press s or # to start dialing. again appears in the multifunction display.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 162 Controls in detail Control system

Redialing Answering a call Ending a call or rejecting an incoming call The control system stores ten of the last When your telephone is ready to receive dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the calls, you can answer a call at any time. You can end a call or reject an incoming need to search through your entire phone When you are in the Tel menu, you will see call at any time. book. the following message on the multifunc- ̈ Press t to end or reject a call. tion display: ̈ Log on to the network (୴ page 193). ̈ Press s to switch to the number and/or name last dialed in the redial memory. ̈ Press % or $ to select the desired number and/or name. ̈ Press s or # to start dialing. ̈ Press sto take the call. Once a connection has been estab- i The caller’s number appears only if it is lished, the name appears in the multi- transmitted. function display, provided that it has The caller’s name appears only if the number and been stored in the phone book, other- the name are stored in the phone book. wise the dialed telephone number appears.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 163 Controls in detail Control system

Service menu Calling up vehicle malfunction, warning and system status messages stored in Warning! G The Service menu is used for memory Malfunction and warning messages are only ț calling up messages Use the vehicle status message memory indicated for certain systems and are inten- ț checking tire inflation pressure elec- menu to scan malfunction and warning tionally not very detailed. The malfunction tronically with the TPMS (standard on messages that may be stored in the and warning messages are simply a remind- U.S. vehicles) system. Such messages appear in the er with respect to the operation of certain multifunction display and are based on systems and do not replace the owner’s ț activating Run Flat Indicator (standard conditions or system status the vehicle’s on Canada vehicles) and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain system has recorded. the vehicle’s operating safety by having all ț calling up the maintenance service in- The vehicle status message memory menu required maintenance and safety checks dicator display only appears if there are any messages performed on the vehicle and by bringing stored. the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages (୴ page 387).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 164 Controls in detail Control system

̈ Press ( or & to select the i See the “Practical hints” section for mal- Settings menu Service menu. function and warning messages (୴ page 387). In the Settings menu there are two If conditions have occurred causing status i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter functions: messages to be recorded, the number of switch to position 0 and then back to position 2, messages appears in the multifunction all messages will be deleted from the message ț The function Reset to factory display: memory. settings, with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory Checking tire inflation pressure settings. For information about checking tire infla- ț A collection of submenus with which tion pressure (୴ page 339). you can make individual settings for your vehicle. Activating Run Flat Indicator 1 Number of messages (Canada only) ̈ Press % or $ to select the mes- For information about activating Run Flat ୴ sage. Indicator ( page 342).

̈ Press # to confirm. Calling up the maintenance service The stored messages will now be indicator display displayed in the order in which they For information about calling up the main- have occurred. tenance service indicator display ̈ Use % or $ to scroll through the (୴ page 362). messages.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 165 Controls in detail Control system

Resetting all settings ̈ Press % or $ to select Yes or No. The submenus are arranged by hierarchy. Select Yes if you want to reset to facto- You can reset most of the functions of the Scroll down with %, scroll up ry settings. submenus to the factory settings. with $. ̈ Press # to confirm. With the selection marker on the desired For safety reasons, the following function i submenu, use the # to access the indi- are not reset while driving: The confirmation message appears in vidual functions within that submenu. ț the multifunction display. the Headlamp mode function in the Light- Once within the submenu, you can use ing submenu The functions of the submenus will re- the $ to move to the next function or ̈ Press ( or & to select the set to factory settings. the % to move to the previous function Settings menu. within that submenu. Submenus in the Settings menu ̈ Press % or $ to select the The table below shows what settings can Factory settings function. ̈ Press ( or & to select the Set- be changed within the various submenus. tings menu. ̈ Press #. Detailed instructions on making individual The menu Reset to factory settings settings can be found on the following No/Yes appears in the multifunction pages. display.

̈ Press % or $ to select a submenu.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 166 Controls in detail Control system

Instrument cluster Time/Date Lighting Vehicle Convenience (୴ page 168) (୴ page 170) (୴ page 171) (୴ page 173) (୴ page 174) Select speedometer Set the time (hours) Setting daytime running Set automatic Activate easy-entry/exit display mode lamp mode (USA only) locking feature* (Canada only) Switch the additional Set the time (minutes) Setting locator lighting Setting fold-in function* speedometer on or off for exterior rear view (vehicles with manual mirrors transmission) Permanent display Set the date (month) Setting night security (vehicles with automatic illumination transmission*) Set the date (day) Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off Set the date (year)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 167 Controls in detail Control system

Instrument cluster submenu The selection marker is on the current Select language setting. Access the Instr. Cluster submenu via Selecting the language for the multifunc- the Settings menu. Use the Instr. Clus- tion display is only possible with the Audio ter submenu to change the instrument system (୴ page 193) or with COMAND*. cluster display settings. Vehicles with COMAND*: Refer to separate operating instructions. The following functions are available: The language select in the Audio system or Function Page COMAND* is also used for the displays Select speedometer display 168 ̈ Press % or $ to set speedome- and messages in the multifunction display. mode ter unit to km or miles. Available languages: ̈ Switch the additional speedome- 169 Press # to confirm the setting. ț German ter on or off (vehicles with manu- The selected display unit is valid for: ț English al transmission) ț Odometer and trip odometer ț Permanent display (vehicles with 169 Spanish ț automatic transmission*) Trip computer ț French ț Digital speedometer in the trip menu ț Italian Select speedometer display mode ț Cruise control ̈ Press % or $ to select the Instr. Cluster submenu. ̈ Press #. ̈ Press % or $ to select Display Unit Speed-/odometer function.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 168 Controls in detail Control system

Showing or hiding additional Depending on the previous status, the speedometer (vehicles with manual additional speedometer will be transmission) switched On or Off. You can have an additional digital speed- Permanent display (vehicles with auto- ometer shown on the multifunction dis- matic transmission*) play. The speed is shown in the unit of kilometers/hour (USA) or miles/hour You can use the Permanent Display func- ̈ Press # again if you would like to (Canada). tion to choose to display either the outside change the current status. temperature or the speed in kilometers ̈ Press % or $ to select the Depending on the previous status, the (USA) or miles (Canada) permanently. Instr. Cluster submenu. Permanent Display will be switched ̈ Press or to select the ̈ Press #. % $ between Outside temperature or Instr. Cluster submenu. Speedometer (km/h) (USA)/Speedome- ̈ Press % or $ to select the Addi- ̈ Press . ter (miles) (Canada). tional Speedometer function. # ̈ Press % or $ to select the Per- The selected display is then shown ̈ Press #. manent Display function. continuously in the lower display. The current setting is shown. ̈ Press #. The current setting Outside temperature or Speedometer (km/h) (USA)/Speedometer (miles) (Canada) is shown.

̈ Press # again if you would like to change the current status. Information Provided by:Provided Information 169 Controls in detail Control system

Time/date submenu Set the time Access the Time/date submenu via the This function is not available if your vehicle Settings menu. Use the Time/Date is equipped with the COMAND* system submenu to change the instrument cluster and navigation module*. display settings. i Vehicles with COMAND*: The following functions are available: For information on setting the time, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions. ̈ Press button % or $ to change Function Page the setting which is highlighted. ̈ Press % or $ to select the Set the time (hours) 170 ̈ Instr. Cluster submenu. Press # to store the entry. Set the time (minutes) 170 ̈ Press #. Set the date Set the date (month) 170 ̈ Press % or $ to select the This function is not available if your vehicle Set the date (day) 170 Time/date function. is equipped with the COMAND* system Set the date (year) 170 ̈ Press #. and navigation module*. ̈ Press % or $ to select the Time i Vehicles with COMAND*: function. For information on setting the date, refer to the separate COMAND operating instructions. ̈ Press #. ̈ Press % or $ to select the The current time appears in the multi- Instr. Cluster submenu. function display. ̈ Press #. ̈ To set a new time press # again. ̈ Press % or $ to select the ̈ Press button or to select ( & Time/date function. the setting you wish to change: hours ̈ Press #. or minutes.by:Provided Information 170 Controls in detail Control system

̈ Press % or $ to select the date Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode function. (USA only) Access the Lights submenu via the ̈ Press #. Settings menu. Use the Lights submenu i This function is not available in countries to change the lamp and lighting settings on The current date appears in the multi- where the daytime running lamp mode is manda- your vehicle. tory and therefore in a constant mode. function display. The following functions are available: ̈ Press % or $ to select the ̈ To set a new date press # again. Lights submenu. ̈ Press button ( or & to select Function Page ̈ Press #. the setting you wish to change: month, Setting daytime running lamp 171 day or minutes. mode (USA only) ̈ Press % or $ to select the Day- time Running Lamps feature. Setting locator lighting 172 ̈ Press . Setting interior lighting delayed 173 # shut-off The current setting Enabled or Disabled is shown.

̈ Press button % or $ to change the setting which is highlighted. ̈ Press # to store the entry.

̈ Press # again if you would like to change the current status. ୴୴

Information Provided by:Provided Information 171 Controls in detail Control system

୴୴ Depending on the previous status, the i Make sure the light switch is set to B daytime running lamps feature will be or * when you switch off the daytime running Enabled or Disabled. lamps while driving at night. With Daytime Running Lamps mode En- i For safety reasons, resetting the Lights abled selected and the exterior lamp submenu to factory settings (୴ page 165) while switch at position M or *, the low driving will not deactivate the daytime running beam headlamps are switched on when lamp mode. ̈ Press # again if you would like to the engine is running. The following message appears in the change the current status. multifunction display: In low ambient light conditions the follow- Lighting - Cannot be completely reset Depending on the previous status, the ing lamps will switch on additionally: to factory settings while driving. locator lighting feature will be Enabled ț Parking lamps or Disabled. Setting locator lighting ț Tail lamps With the locator lighting feature activated ̈ Press % or $ to select the and the exterior lamp switch in ț License plate lamps Lights submenu. position U, the following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehi- ț Side marker lamps ̈ Press #. cle is unlocked with the SmartKey: also illuminates the instrument cluster. ̈ Press % or $ to select the Sur- ț Parking lamps For more information on the daytime run- round Lighting feature. ț Tail lamps ning lamp mode (୴ page 110). ̈ Press #. ț License plate lamps i If you turn the exterior lamp switch to anoth- The current setting Enabled er position, the corresponding lamp(s) will or Disabled is shown. ț Side marker lamps switch on. ț Front fog lamps also illuminates the instrument cluster.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 172 Controls in detail Control system

The locator lighting switches off when the Vehicle submenu driver’s door is opened. Access the Vehicle submenu via the If you do not open a door after unlocking Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps to make general vehicle settings. will switch off automatically after The following function is available: approximately 40 seconds. ̈ Press # again if you would like to Function Page Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off change the current status. Setting automatic locking 173 Use this function to set whether you would Depending on the previous status, the like the interior lighting to remain on for interior lighting delayed shut-off fea- Setting automatic locking 10 seconds during darkness after you have ture will be Enabled or Disabled. Use this function to activate or deactivate removed the SmartKey from the starter the automatic central locking. With the switch. automatic central locking system ̈ Press % or $ to select the activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at Lights submenu. vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph ̈ Press #. (15 km/h). ̈ ̈ Press % or $ to select the Inte- Press % or $ to select the rior Lighting Delay feature. Vehicle submenu. ̈ ̈ Press #. Press #. ̈ The current setting Enabled Press % or $ to select the Auto- ୴୴ or Disabled is shown. matic Door Lock feature.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 173 Controls in detail Control system

̈ ୴୴ Press #. Function Page Activate easy-entry/exit feature* (Canada only) The current setting Enabled Activate easy-entry/exit 174 or Disabled is shown. feature* (Canada only) Warning! G Setting fold-in function* for exte- 175 rior rear view mirrors You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. ̈ Press # again if you would like to To stop steering wheel movement, do one of change the current status. the following: Depending on the previous status, the ț Move steering wheel adjustment stalk* ୴ automatic central locking feature will ( page 94). be Enabled or Disabled. ț Press memory position switch* (୴ page 104). Convenience submenu Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Access the Convenience submenu via the Children could open the driver’s door and Settings menu. Use the Convenience submenu to change the settings for the unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit convenience features. feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. The following functions are available:

Information Provided by:Provided Information 174 Controls in detail Control system

̈ Press % or $ to select the Setting fold-in function* for exterior ̈ Press % or $ to select the Convenience submenu. rear view mirrors Convenience submenu. ̈ Press #. Using this function, you can set the exteri- ̈ Press #. or rear view mirrors to be automatically ̈ Press % or $ to select the Easy ̈ Press % or $ to select the Fold folded in when you lock the vehicle. Entry/Exit feature. Mirrors in when Locking function. ̈ Press #. i With this function set to Enabled and the ̈ Press #. exterior rear view mirrors folded in using the but- The current setting Enabled ton on the door control panel, the exterior rear The current setting Enabled or Disabled is shown. view mirrors will not fold out when you switch on or Disabled is shown. the ignition. You will then have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors using the button on the door control panel. Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are folded out completely before driving off.

̈ Press # again if you would like to ̈ Press # again if you would like to change the current status. change the current status. Depending on the previous status, the Depending on the previous status, the easy-entry/exit feature will be Enabled automatic fold-in function* for exterior or Disabled. rear view mirrors will be Enabled or Disabled.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 175 Controls in detail Audio system

Audio and telephone, operation Audio system overview

These instructions are intended to help you become familiar with your Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions.

Warning! G

In order to avoid distraction which could Item Page lead to an accident, the driver should enter 4 Delete button 184 system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when 5 Audio controller 182 road and traffic conditions permit. Always 6 Back button 184 pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph Item Page (approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a distance of 44 feet 1 Audio display 180 (approximately 14 m) every second. 2 Opening button 180 3 Audio control unit 177

Information Provided by:Provided Information 176 Controls in detail Audio system

Operating safety Audio system components Audio control unit With the audio control unit you can: With the audio system you can operate the Warning! G following main functions: ț switch the audio system on/off ț audio function with the radio, Sat*, ț adjust the volume Any alterations made to electronic disc (CD audio or MP3 mode) components can cause malfunctions. ț select the operating modes ț the telephone* with the phone book The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite ț enter telephone numbers and accept, radio*, and telephone* are interconnected. ț various system settings reject, initiate and end telephone calls When one of the components is not opera- The audio system consists of the following: ț load and eject CDs tional or has not been removed/replaced properly, the function of other components ț audio control unit may be impaired. ț audio display This condition might seriously impair the ț audio controller with back and delete operating safety of your vehicle. button We recommend that you have any service In addition, the audio system can also be work on electronic components carried out operated with the multifunction steering at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. wheel (୴ page 152). In these instructions, the keypad (right side of audio control unit) and the function buttons are referred to as “buttons”.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 177 Controls in detail Audio system

Audio control unit overview

Information Provided by:Provided Information 178 Controls in detail Audio system

Item Page Item Page Item Page 1 Switching to radio mode 196 6 Keypad b Confirming a passcode 228 Switching wavebands 196 Tuning to a station via the 197 Accepting a call 239 Switching to Sat* mode station memory Initiating a call 237 2 Switching to CD audio or 213 Storing stations manually 198 Redial 238 MP3 mode Entering a passcode 228 c Rejecting a call 239 3 Disc slot Entering a telephone 237 Ending an active call 238 number Loading CDs d Opening system menu 192 Sending DTMF tones 240 Ejecting CDs e Switching sound on/off 189 CD changer*: Selecting CD 217 Updating the map software Switching hands-free 240 4 Load/eject button 214 7 Tuning to a station via 197 microphone on/off station search 5 Clear button for deleting 184 f Switching to telephone 225 digit or entire entries 237 Fast forward 219 mode Entering a passcode 228 Selecting next track 219 g Sound settings 189 Entering a telephone 237 8 Switching audio on/off 188 number 9 Setting the volume 189 a Tuning to a station via sta- 197 tion search Fast reverse 219 Selecting previous track 219

Information Provided by:Provided Information 179 Controls in detail Audio system

Audio display Audio display cover ̈ Opening: Press opening button 1. The audio display has a protective cover. The audio display cover opens, the audio display is visible, and the audio sys- Do not place any objects on the cover of the ! tem switched on. audio display. This may obstruct the movement when the cover is being opened/closed. The ̈ Closing: Press the audio display cover cover could be damaged. Do not place any ob- down until it engages. jects in front of the audio display and/or secure any objects to the audio display itself. The audio If the audio system is still switched on, display could be damaged. you can continue to listen to the radio Avoid touching the audio display at all times. The or a CD and operate the device via the display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface, buttons on the audio control panel. there is a risk of it being scratched. Do not press 1 Opening button directly in the display face. Otherwise, the audio i You cannot operate the audio system via the display will be damaged. audio controller when the protective cover is closed. i For information about cleaning and care of the audio display, see “Audio display” (୴ page 371).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 180 Controls in detail Audio system

Display The status line 3 displays the time and Mobile phone readiness is indicated by The currently selected mode and the asso- the current settings for radio and additional information being shown in the ciated menus are shown on the audio dis- telephone mode. status line: play. The audio display is divided into You can request the required function ț In the main menu TEL: Name of the several areas. using the menu bar 1. Bluetooth® device (calls made and received via the Bluetooth® interface). The selection is made using the audio controller. ț Mobile phone network signal strength I. This information will only be shown with suitable telephones. ț Receiver symbol 4 ö In this example, the audio main function is For example, radio selected set to the radio mode and the main 1 Menu bar area 2 is active. 2 Main area 3 Status line i The layout of the menus may vary depending on your vehicle’s equipment. This manual shows the menus for a fully equipped vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 181 Controls in detail Audio system

Instrument cluster multifunction Audio controller display This section describes features and controls via the audio control unit, display and controller only. Please refer to the “Instrument cluster control system” section of this manual (୴ page 151) for function descriptions and operation of the instrument cluster multifunction display and multifunction steering Operating audio controller wheel buttons as they relate to audio func- 1 Audio controller The audio controller features the following tions described in this section. options: The menu functions are selected on the audio display using the audio controller. ț press briefly or press and hold n For this purpose, a selector bar is moved. ț rotate to the left or right ymz In this way, you can open menus or lists, ț slide to the left or right omp move within menus or lists, and quit menus or lists. ț slide up or down qmr i You cannot operate the audio system via the audio controller when the protective cover is closed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 182 Controls in detail Audio system

Symbol How to use the audio controller Function ̈ Press briefly. ț Confirms the selecting of a menu item or list entry. n ̈ Press and hold until the selected ac- ț Save a station. tion has been carried out. ̈ Rotate. ț Move through vertical or horizontal menus or through lists. ymz ț Move through text. ț Program settings. ̈ Slide. ț Move through vertical menus or lists. qmr ț Exit horizontal menus. ̈ Slide. ț Move through horizontal menus. omp ț Exit vertical menus. ̈ Slide and hold. ț Fast forward or reverse for audio CD playback.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 183 Controls in detail Audio system

Back button ̈ Switching to the next highest menu: Clear button Press button í briefly. The audio system switches to the next highest menu level within the currently active mode. i You can also exit a menu or list by sliding the audio controller omp or qmr. ̈ Switching to the main menu: Press and hold button í. The audio system switches to the basic 1 Back button í 1 Clear button î menu of the currently active mode. ̈ To delete an individual character: Briefly press the button î. ̈ To delete an entire entry: Press and hold the button î until the entry is deleted.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 184 Controls in detail Audio system

The illustration below shows the structure Each mode has a basic menu. In the menu Each menu item in turn has several sub- of the modes and their menus. line of the basic menu display are several menu items. menu items listed.

Button Mode/Basic menu Menu Page b Radio Radio (FM/AM) 194 Weather Band 194 Sat Radio* 200 Presets 198 Sound 189 é Disc CD/MP3 208 Track list/folder list 219 CD changer* 214 Sound 189 h Telephone* Telephone* 222 Name 233 Call lists 236 ê System System 192 Language 193

Information Provided by:Provided Information 185 Controls in detail Audio system

Calling up an operating mode Horizontal menus Vertical submenus ̈ Press the respective button (b, é, h,orê) on the audio control unit. The basic menu of the selected mode appears in the audio display. The main area is active. The active area is highlighted. ̈ Moving through the menu bar: ̈ Moving through the menu: i The following screens show the audio dis- Slide omp or rotate ymz. Slide qmr or rotate ymz. play's day design. The appearance of the high- A white bar under the menu indicates A white bar under the submenu indi- lighted items in the menu will vary depending on the display design. the selected menu. cates the selected submenu. ̈ Confirm the selected menu item: ̈ Confirm the selected submenu Press n. item: Press n. ̈ Exiting the menu bar without con- ̈ Exiting a menu without confirming a firming a selection: Slide qm in the selection: Slide omp in the opposite opposite direction of the list orienta- direction of the list orientation. tion. or or ̈ Press button í. Illustration: radio function basic menu ̈ Press button í. ̈ Moving to the menu bar: Slide mr.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 186 Controls in detail Audio system

Example of how to use the audio ̈ Selecting “Radio” in the menu bar: ̈ Confirming selection: Press n. system Slide or rotate . om ymz The Enter Frequency submenu ap- Example: direct frequency input, pears. FM 104.5 MHz. In the descriptions below, the mode always serve as the starting point for locating the individual menu items. Example: b Radio Enter Frequency ̈ Confirming selection: Press n. The individual steps for the above-men- The Radio menu is selected and a list of i It is not possible to enter a frequency in the tioned example are described below. submenus appears. respective waveband which is outside the frequency range. Frequencies within the current ̈ Press button b on audio control frequency range, but outside the current fre- unit repeatedly until desired waveband quency step width are rounded to the next lower FM has been selected. allowed frequency. ̈ Switching to the menu bar: ̈ Enter 1045 with the keypad on the au- Slide mr. dio control unit. The audio system tunes in to the ̈ Selecting “Enter Frequency” in the frequency entered. “Radio” menu: Slide mr.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 187 Controls in detail Audio system

Operation Switching audio system on or off The audio system will come back on with the last selected function. In the following descriptions, an operation step is described as in example below. i If the audio system is switched on without the SmartKey in the starter switch, it will ̈ b Radio Enter Frequency automatically switch off again after approximately 30 minutes. is the short for If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone*, the ̈ Press button b on audio control audio display may prompt you to enter your PIN unit repeatedly until desired waveband (GSM network) or passcode (CDMA network). has been selected. ̈ Switching off: Press push ̈ Slide mr. button o. Rotary control/push button o ̈ Slide or rotate the audio con- om ymz 1 Push button o or troller to select Radio. 2 Rotary control ̈ Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch ̈ Press the audio controller n. ̈ Switching on: Press push to position 0. The Radio menu is selected and a list of button o. i Should excessively high temperatures occur submenus appears. or while the audio system is being operated, HIGH TEMP will appear in the audio display, after ̈ Slide or rotate the audio con- qm ymz ̈ Open the audio display cover. which the audio system will be switched off for a troller to select Enter Frequency. cooling-down period. or ̈ Press the audio controller n. ̈ If the audio system was on as you i When you switch off the audio system, you also switch off the currently playing audio source The Enter Frequency submenu is switched off the ignition, turn the selected and appears in the audio and the telephone* operating via audio control SmartKey in the starter switch to unit is not possible. display. position 2.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 188 Controls in detail Audio system

Adjusting volume Adjusting volume for telephone calls Selecting sound settings In hands-free mode, you can adjust the vol- You can select different sound settings for ume of a telephone call while the call is each individual audio source. The particu- currently active. lar Sound menu can be opened from the basic menu for the desired operating During a telephone call: mode, or by pressing the TONE button on ̈ Turn rotary control 2. the audio control unit. The volume will increase or decrease Example: depending on the direction turned. b Sound Bass i The volume of the audio system or a tele- Rotary control/push button o phone call can also be adjusted by pressing the Adjusting bass or treble 1 Push button o æ or ç button on the multifunction steering wheel (୴ page 158). ̈ Press TONE button repeatedly until 2 Rotary control Bass or Treble appears in the audio ̈ Adjusting: Turn rotary control 2. Sound display. The volume will increase or decrease ̈ To switch on/off: Press button F or depending on the direction turned. on the audio control unit (୴ page 177). ̈ Select SoundBass or Treble. The sound of the current audio source The setting last selected is indicated by is switched on or off. an red pointer. ୴୴ i When the sound is switched off, the symbol F appears in the status line. If you change the audio source, or alter the volume, the sound is automatically switched on again. Information Provided by:Provided Information 189 Controls in detail Audio system

୴୴ Adjusting balance or fader The setting is stored and the menu is exited. Balance is used to determine whether the sound focus should be shifted toward the ̈ To exit menu without saving: Press driver’s side or the passenger’s side. button í. Fader is used to determine whether the Surround sound* (Canada only) sound focus should be shifted toward the front or rear of the vehicle If your vehicle is equipped with the har- Example Bass mann/kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound ̈ Select Sound Bal/Fad. ̈ To change setting: Slide rmq or system, you can choose between LOGIC7® rotate ymz until desired treble or bass The current setting is indicated by an On and LOGIC7® Off for surround sound. red cross-hair symbol. setting is reached. Harman/kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound ̈ To save setting: Press n. is available for the following operating modes: The setting is stored and the menu is exited. ț Radio (FM only) ̈ To exit menu without saving: Press ț Sat* button í or slide omp. ț CD audio ț MP3 Adjusting balance and fader ̈ To change setting: Slide rmq or omp ț AUX until desired balance/fader setting is achieved. ̈ To save setting: Press n.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 190 Controls in detail Audio system i The LOGIC7® On function of the Adjusting surround sound i Balance and fader will be set to the default harman/kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound sys- value (0/0) automatically by activating or deacti- With surround sound, you can choose be- ® tem permits the playback of discrete 5.1 and ste- ® ® vating LOGIC7 . reo recordings with an optimal surround sound tween LOGIC7 On and LOGIC7 Off. platform for each passenger. ̈ Select Sound Sound. i Please note the following: The LOGIC7® distributes the 5.1 surround infor- ț For an optimal sound experience from all mation over the 13-channel system architecture seats, the balance and fader should be ad- to provide the optimum sound experience from justed to the center of the passenger com- all seats. This produces the sound characteristic partment with LOGIC7® switched on. as intended by the sound engineer during the ț The best sound results are achieved when original recording. playing high-quality audio CDs. Harman/kardon LOGIC7® converts all two-chan- ț For MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at nel stereo sound material into multi-channel sur- least 128 kbit/s. round sound. The surround information stored A dot R indicates the current setting. ț Surround playback cannot be activated in during the original recording is read out using mono-signal sources as AM or Weatherband. LOGIC7® and likewise distributed over the ̈ To select a setting: Slide rmq or It will not function for mono-signal sources 13 channels. No effects are created during this rotate ymz. as, e.g. mono audio tracks on some specific process; only that which was already there be- ̈ audio CDs. comes audible. To save setting: Press n. ț In the case of poor radio reception quality, In addition, harman/kardon LOGIC7® moves the The setting is stored and the menu is e.g. in tunnels, LOGIC7® should be switched perceived sound source away from the individual exited. off, as otherwise a dynamic switchover from loudspeakers, thus generating a natural 360° ̈ stereo to mono and thus temporary sound sound experience for each passenger. To exit menu without saving: Press button í or slide omp. characteristic shifts can occur. i By selecting LOGIC7® Off, all compatible ț With certain stereo recordings, the resulting formats are played back as they are present on sound characteristic may deviate from con- the medium. Due to the vehicle’s spatial charac- ventional stereo playback. teristics, an optimal sound experience is not en- sured from all seats. by:Provided Information 191 Controls in detail Audio system

SYS menu Display settings Bluetooth® settings You can adapt the brightness of the audio General information about Bluetooth® SYS settings menu overview display to the prevailing light conditions. Bluetooth® technology is the standard for Menu Page Setting the display design short-range wireless technologies, suitable for transmitting voice and data. It is possi- System ̈ ê System Display. ble to connect Bluetooth® devices wire- Display 192 ̈ Select Brightness, Day Mode, Night lessly. Bluetooth® can be used to Brightness Mode or Automatic. exchange vCards or make calls using a hands-free device. Day Mode i When you select Brightness, a scale appears on which you can set the brightness Bluetooth® technology uses the freely Night Mode manually. available ISM (Industrial Scientific Medi- Automatic In the Automatic setting, the audio system an- cal) wireless network that works at alyzes the automatic vehicle light sensor and Activate Bluetooth® 192 2.45 GHz. Ranges of up to ten meters are switches between the display designs automati- possible with Bluetooth®. Reset 193 cally. Language 193

Information Provided by:Provided Information 192 Controls in detail Audio system

Activate or deactivate Bluetooth® Reset Setting the system language ̈ ê System Activate Blue- i You can reset the audio system back to its ̈ ê Language. tooth. factory settings. In this case, all personal data (e.g. address book entries), among other things, are deleted. We recommend that you reset the values, for example, before selling your vehicle. ̈ ê System Reset. A prompt appears asking whether you really want to reset. The language list appears. A dot R in You have activated or deactivated ̈ Select Yes or No. front of an entry indicates the current Bluetooth®. A checkmark appears setting. If you select Yes another prompt will when Bluetooth® is activated. appear asking whether you really want ̈ To change the setting: Slide rmq or to reset. rotate ymz and select desired language. ̈ Select Yes or No. ̈ To save setting: Press n. If you select Yes, the audio system will be reset and restarted. The setting is stored and the menu is exited. ̈ To exit menu without saving: Press button í or slide omp. ୴୴

Information Provided by:Provided Information 193 Controls in detail Audio system

୴୴i The language select in the Audio system is Radio operation ! Do not attach metallic film to the inside or also used for the displays and messages in the outside of windows which are fitted with an aeri- multifunction display. al. Obstructing the metallic aerial structure on Available languages: Warning! G the window will interfere with radio reception. Cutting the film on the window can permanently ț German Please devote your attention first and fore- damage the aerial wires. ț English most to the traffic situation you are in. The radio mode is interrupted by an ț Spanish Before your journey, please familiarize your- incoming call on the telephone* ț French self with the radio functions. (୴ page 222). ț Italian Only use the audio system when road and traffic conditions permit you to do so. Other- wise you could be involved in an accident in which you or others could be injured.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 194 Controls in detail Audio system

Menu overview i The components and operating principles of the audios system can be found on (୴ page 187). Information about sound settings can be found on(୴ page 189).

Radio Presets Channel Sound (except Weather Band) (except Weather Band) (only Weather Band) Enter frequency Autostore List of channels Treble Station information List of stored stations Bass (in FM waveband only) Balance/Fader Surround sound*

Information Provided by:Provided Information 195 Controls in detail Audio system

Switching to radio mode i Station names 3, available for the FM Calling up wavebands ̈ Press button b on audio control waveband, can only be seen when the station You can choose from among the FM, AM transmits a name. unit. and WB wavebands and then request the In the WB waveband, the audio system displays Sat mode*. Pressing again will switch back The radio basic menu appears in the the channel number, e.g. Channel 6, instead of to FM radio mode. audio display once you have switched the station names and/or frequency. to radio mode. You will hear the Waveband Frequency station/channel last tuned in the previ- Information displayed in the status line ously selected waveband, provided (example) WB (Weather Band) Weather channels that the station/channel can be re- The following information is displayed in FM 87.7...... 107.9 MHz ceived. the status line: AM 530...... 1710 KHz ț Time (04:38) ̈ Press button b on audio control ț Station name (WNYC) unit repeatedly until desired waveband Mobile phone readiness is indicated by has been selected. additional information being shown: The FM, AM, and WB wavebands and ț Mobile phone network signal the satellite radio* mode are called up strength I one after another. Illustration: radio mode in FM waveband ț Receiver symbol 4 ö. The waveband currently selected 1 Status line appears in the status line of the audio 2 Station name display. The last selected station in the 3 Store position of station selected waveband is heard. 4 Main area with waveband

Information Provided by:Provided Information 196 Controls in detail Audio system

Selecting a station/channel ̈ Press button b on audio control Selecting a station using station unit repeatedly until the FM/AM/WB memory You have the following selection options: waveband is selected. ț The station search function i This function is not available for Weather ̈ Slide omp or rotate ymz when the Band. ț The channel list main area in the basic menu is active. ̈ (Weather Band) Press b button on audio control Depending on the direction in which unit repeatedly until desired waveband ț Station memory the controller is being slid or rotated, has been selected. (except Weather Band) the system searches upward or down- ̈ Select Presets. ț The manual frequency entry ward and stops at the next receivable (except Weather Band) station/channel. or ̈ The station search proceeds in the or Press n when the main area is selected. following frequency increments: ̈ Press button G or H on audio ț 200 kHz in FM range control unit. The memory menu appears. The dot R in front of a memory position indicates Depending on the pressed button, the ț 10 kHz in AM range that the currently selected station is system searches upward or downward saved there. Tuning to a station/channel via and stops at the next receivable ̈ station/channel search function station/channel. Select station in memory by rotating ymz or sliding qmr and press n. The search function searches for the next i or receivable station in the FM or AM waveband. In Weather Band (WB) the search function ̈ Press desired station button 1 to switches to the next channel in the channel list. R, with the keypad in audio control For tuning to a station/channel you can also use unit briefly. the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel (୴ page 159). Information Provided by:Provided Information 197 Controls in detail Audio system

Tuning to a station by entering the fre- Storing stations quency manually You can store ten AM and ten FM stations i This function is not available for Weather in the memory. Band. i If you select a memory preset which is al- ̈ b Radio Enter Frequency ready in use, it will be overwritten by the new station. The menu for manual frequency entry appears. ̈ Enter frequency with keypad: Storing stations manually with keypad Enter desired frequency with ̈ Tune in desired station. buttons 1 to R, with the keypad Basic menu is shown in the audio in audio control unit briefly. display. The audio system tunes in to the fre- ̈ Press and hold desired station quency entered. button 1 to R until a brief signal i It is not possible to enter a frequency in the tone sounds. respective waveband which is outside the fre- or The station is stored. quency range. ̈ Press button , on the keypad in ó ̈ Exiting menu without making an en- audio control unit briefly. try: Press button í in the center console (୴ page 184).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 198 Controls in detail Audio system

Storing stations manually with station ̈ Selecting a memory position: Basic menu is shown in the audio memory menu Slide qmr or rotate ymz. display. ̈ Tune in desired station. ̈ Storing a station to a selected mem- ̈ Press n when the main area is active. Basic menu is shown in the audio ory position: Press and hold until a n or display. brief signal tone sounds. ̈ Select Presets. ̈ Press n when the main area is active. or The station memory display appears in the or ̈ Press and hold desired station audio display. button 1 to R on keypad, until a ̈ Select Presets. brief signal tone sounds. ̈ Slide qmr or rotate ymz to select Au- The station memory display appears in the tostore. The station is stored. audio display. ̈ Press n. Autostore – automatic station memory The audio system searches for receivable i This function is not available for Weather stations. A corresponding message is dis- Band. The autostore function automatically as- played. The available stations are automat- signs receivable stations to the memory, sorted ically stored in memory. The first received according to reception quality at the moment of station will be automatically played. performing the autostore. The stations which ̈ were stored in the station memory manually are Canceling storage procedure: Press n while the “Searching” mes- The dot R in front of a memory position completely lost in this process. If less than ten sage is being displayed. indicates that the currently tuned station is stations are found, the remaining entries are left empty. stored there. ̈ Press b button on audio control unit repeatedly until desired waveband has been selected.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 199 Controls in detail Audio system

Satellite radio*

Warning! G

Please devote your attention first and fore- most to the traffic situation you are in. Before your journey, please familiarize yourself with the radio functions. Only use the audio system when road and traffic conditions permit you to do so. Other- wise you could be involved in an accident in which you or others could be injured.

Submenu overview i The components and operating principles of the audio system can be found on (୴ page 187).

Sat Presets Info Category Sound Channel List Station presets Show program info All channels Treble Channel Entry Select category Bass Service Balance/Fader Surround sound* Information Provided by:Provided Information 200 Controls in detail Audio system

Satellite radio i Note that categories and channels shown in Subscribing to satellite radio illustrations are dependent on programming con- ̈ Press button b on audio control i Additional satellite radio equipment and a tent delivered by the service provider. Program- subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio service ming content is subject to change. Therefore, unit repeatedly until satellite radio Sat provider are required for the satellite radio oper- channels and categories shown in illustrations is selected. ation described in this chapter. and descriptions contained in this manual may The following options are possible: Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center differ from the channels and categories for details and availability for your vehicle. delivered by the service provider. ț Satellite radio service is not activated SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over i Satellite radio service may be unavailable or 130 channels of digital-quality radio, in- interrupted from time to time for a variety of rea- ț Satellite radio service is fully cluding 100% commercial-free music, sons, such as environmental or topographic con- activated sports, news and entertainment. SIRIUS ditions and other things we can’t control. Service If a satellite receiver is not installed or not Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-orbit might also not be available in certain places i (e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or within or properly installed: satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day, next to buildings) or near other technologies. In The message Device unavailable will ap- coast to coast, in the contiguous U.S. and such situations, the satellite radio’s main menu pear. Canada. shows the “Acquiring signal...” screen. At this If the satellite radio service is not activated, the “SIRIUS Preview” display appears. This diverse, satellite-delivered program- point, the radio’s functions are restricted and the service info display (୴ page 207) appears. ming is available for a monthly subscription fee. For more information and service availability call the SIRIUS Service Center (୴ page 207) (1-888-539-7474), or contact ț www.sirius.com (USA) ț www.siriuscanada.com (Canada) Information Provided by:Provided Information 201 Controls in detail Audio system

Satellite radio service is not activated The activation process may take up to Satellite radio service is activated The telephone number of the SIRIUS Ser- 10 minutes. If it is successful, you will The basic satellite radio menu appears. vice Center and the twelve-digit electronic see the display with the message You will hear the channel last tuned in, pro- Acquiring Signal... followed by the serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular vided that it can be received. satellite radio basic menu. receiver are required when calling the SIRIUS Service Center for an activation re- i Activating the satellite radio service might Switching on quest. not be available in certain places (e.g., in tun- For important subscription information see nels, parking garages, or within or next to build- ̈ b Sat Service. ings). If a subscription is not included with “Subscribing to satellite radio” system purchase, credit card information is re- (୴ page 201). quired to activate your account. ̈ Press button b on audio control The activation process takes approximately 5 to unit repeatedly until satellite radio Sat 10 minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Cen- is selected. ter. The message Acquiring Signal... will If a satellite receiver is not installed or not properly installed: appear when the signal is not available. The message Device unavailable will ap- After the audio system acquires the ̈ Closing screen: Press n. pear. signal, the satellite radio basic menu ̈ To activate satellite radio service: will appear. The station last tuned to i It is also possible to activate the satellite ra- will begin to play. Contact satellite radio service provider dio service online. To do so please visit SIRIUS at the telephone number displayed in Satellite Radio's website at www.sirius.com the service display. (USA) or www.siriuscanada.com (Canada). After the connection is made: ̈ Follow the instructions given by the operator.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 202 Controls in detail Audio system

Main satellite radio menu i Main area 1 can show all channels includ- The category list appears. ed in your subscription. Which channels are ̈ Select a category: Slide qmr or ro- shown depends on the selected program tate . category 4. ymz Note that categories and channels shown in illus- ̈ Set the selected category: Press n. trations are dependent on programming content delivered by the service provider. Programming The selected program category (alpha- content is subject to change. betical order) will appear in the audio Therefore, channel and categories shown in illus- display. The channel last tuned in the trations and descriptions contained in this man- new category will begin to play. 1 Main area with channel display ual may differ from the channels and categories 2 Selected program category delivered by the service provider. When searching, tuning in, or selecting 3 Number of selected channel from the channel list, the “All Chan- 4 Selected channel Selecting program category nels” option accesses all of your sub- 5 Sound settings scribed channels. The channels are categorized. Categories al- 6 To select program category i low you to tune to stations broadcasting a cer- i When you select the category “All Chan- 7 Current artist and title tain type of program. nels”, you have access to all the channels you 8 Channel information subscribe to, regardless of category. 9 Preset options Satellite radio channels are split up into a Satellite radio options categories such as News, Sports News, or Country Music, if available. The category list is sorted alphabetically. ̈ Call up category list: b Cat. or ̈ Slide omp or rotate ymz until Cat is highlighted.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 203 Controls in detail Audio system

Tuning in channels Depending on the pressed button, the Further operation depends on whether the system searches upward or downward You have the following selection options: selected channel number is valid or if the and stops at the next receivable channel is included in your subscription. ț The channel skip function channel. ̈ Exiting menu without making an ț The manual channel number entry i Which channels are available depends on entry: Press button í in the center ț The channel list which channels you have subscribed to and the console (୴ page 184). program category you have selected ț The channel presets (୴ page 203). For tuning in channels you can Channel number is valid and channel is also use the buttons on the multifunction steer- included in subscription: The audio sys- Tuning in channels using channel search ing wheel (୴ page 159). tem tunes in the channel entered. function Channel number is invalid: The message Tuning in channels using manual chan- ̈ Slide or rotate when the Invalid Channel appears in the audio dis- omp ymz nel number entry main area in the basic menu is active. play. ̈ b Sat Enter Channel. Depending on the direction in which ̈ Press n to close the message in the the controller is being slid or rotated, The menu for manual channel number audio display. the system skips upward or downward entry appears. and stops at the next subscribed chan- or nel. ̈ Press button ó, on the keypad in or audio control unit briefly. ̈ Press button G or H on audio ̈ Channel number entry with keypad: control unit. Enter desired channel number with buttons 1 to R, with the keypad in audio control unit briefly.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 204 Controls in detail Audio system

Channel number is valid, but channel is Tuning in channels using satellite radio ̈ Select station in memory by rotating not included in subscription: The mes- channel presets ymz or sliding qmr. sage Please call SIRIUS to subscribe ̈ b Presets. ̈ Press n to confirm. pops up (୴ page 202). or or ̈ Press n to close the message in the audio display. ̈ Press n when the main area is select- ̈ Press desired station button 1 to ed. R, with the keypad in audio control unit briefly. Tuning in channels using the satellite ra- The preset menu appears. The dot R dio channel list in front of a preset position indicates The audio system tunes in the correspond- ̈ b Sat Channel List. that this is the channel currently selecting channel as long as it is included in your ed and being listened to. subscription and is still available. The channel list appears. The dot R in front of a list entry indicates the cur- If the channel is not included in your sub- rently selected channel. scription, you will see the message described in the section “Satellite radio ̈ Select channel by rotating or ymz service is not activated” (୴ page 202). sliding qmr. If the channel is no longer available, you ̈ Press to confirm. n will see the message Invalid Channel. i The contents of the channel list depends on ̈ Closing message: Press n. which channels are included in your subscription and which program category you have selected (୴ page 203). If only the preview channel is activated, the channel list contains only the preview channel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 205 Controls in detail Audio system

Storing channels ̈ Storing a preset position: Press and i The program provider determines what in- hold n until you hear a signal. formation is displayed on the screen. The audio i There are ten preset positions available. system shows no more than two lines per item of The channel is stored. ̈ Press n when the main area is select- information. If an item of information is too long, ed. or the audio system shortens it. or ̈ Press and hold desired channel With the telephone keypad button ô button 1 to R on keypad, until a you can call up an popup screen, if provid- ̈ Presets. b brief signal tone sounds. ed by the program provider, that shows the In both cases, the preset menu will appear name of the actor and title of the current The channel is stored. in the audio display. The dot R in front of track played on the selected channel. a preset position indicates that the chan- Show program info ̈ Closing screen: Slide omp or nel currently selected is stored there. press n. ̈ b Info. i If the program provider does not offer any information, the “Info” menu item cannot be selected. You will see a screen that may contain the following information (if available): ț Selected program category ̈ Selecting a preset position: Slide qmr or rotate ymz. ț Selected channel ț Artist of the track currently being played ț Name of current track

Information Provided by:Provided Information 206 Controls in detail Audio system

Calling SIRIUS Service Center Channel update Sound settings i It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS Ser- The service provider may conduct a chan- For sound adjusting see: nel update. vice Center if, for example: ț Volume (୴ page 189) ț You want to cancel the subscription or During the update, the message Updating ț re-subscribe at a later date. channels... will appear on the audio dis- Balance control and fader (୴ page 190) ț You forget to pay the bill. play. The channel last tuned will be muted until ț ୴ ț You sell the car to another person. Bass and treble control ( page 189) the update is completed. You cannot oper- ț ୴ ̈ b Sat Service. ated the satellite radio during the update. Surround sound* ( page 190) The telephone number of the SIRIUS After completion of the update, the satel- Service Center and the twelve-digit lite radio basic menu will appear. The sta- electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of tion last tuned to will begin to play. If not the particular receiver are displayed. available, the next subscribed channel ̈ Closing screen: Slide omp or starts beginning with channel 1. press n.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 207 Controls in detail Audio system

CD mode

Submenu overview

CD or MP3 Track list (Audio CD) or Folder Changer Sound (MP3) (only CD-changer*) Normal Track Sequence Select track (CD mode only) Select medium Treble Random Tracks Select folder and/or tracks Eject All Bass (CD mode only) (MP3 mode only) Random Folders Fill Empty Slots Balance/Fader (MP3 mode only) AUX Surround sound* i The components and operating principles of the audio system can be found on (୴ page 187). The audio system will be fitted with either a single CD drive or a CD changer*. The single CD player and the CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 files. The available menu options will vary depending on the equipment and the type of CD.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 208 Controls in detail Audio system

Safety precautions General notes Warning! G G i Audio CDs with copy protection are not Warning! Only carry out the following when the vehi- compatible with the CD audio standard and therefore may not be able to be played by the cle is stationary: The single CD player and the CD changer* single CD player and/or the CD changer*. are classified as a Class 1 laser product. You ț Inserting a disc There may be playback problems when playing copied discs. must not open the casing. There is a risk of ț Ejecting a disc There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing soft- exposure to invisible laser radiation if you There is a risk of accident by being distract- open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or ware and writers available. This variety means ed from road and traffic conditions if you that there is no guarantee that the system will be damaged. load a CD while the vehicle is in motion. able to play discs that you have written/copied The single CD player and the CD changer* Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph yourself. do not contain any parts that you are able to There may be playback problems if you use CD-R (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is maintain yourself. For safety reasons, all or CD-RW type discs you have copied yourself covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- maintenance work must be carried out by with a storage capacity of more than 700 MB. ly 14 m) every second. qualified technicians. These CDs are not compatible with currently applicable standards. ! If you affix stickers to the CDs, they can become warped due to the heat that develops in the CD drive or CD changer*. In certain situations, the CDs can no longer be ejected and can cause damage to the drive. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 209 Controls in detail Audio system

! Your CD drive or CD changer* has been de- Tips on handling CDs Notes about MP3 mode signed to play CDs which correspond to the ț Only touch the CDs at the edges. The single CD player and the CD changer* IEC 60908 standard. You can therefore only use can play audio CDs as well as CDs with CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm. ț Handle CDs carefully to prevent MP3 files. If you insert thicker discs, e.g. ones that have interference during playback. data on both sides (one side with DVD data, the ț Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust i Due to the branched data structure, play- other side with audio data), they cannot be eject- back of the first track may be delayed slightly. ed and will damage the drive. on the CDs. ț Do not use CDs with an 8 cm diameter. At- The CDs must only be labeled using Permissible media for MP3 files pens specially designed for this pur- tempting to play CDs with an 8 cm diame- ț CD-DA ter or playing such CDs with an adapter pose. ț may cause damage to the CD drive. Such ț Clean CDs from time to time with a CD-R damage is not covered by the commercially available cleaning cloth. ț CD-RW Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Never wipe the CD in a circular motion; Only use round, 12 cm diameter discs. instead, wipe it in a straight line start- Permissible file systems ing in the center and moving outward. ț ISO9660/Joliet for CDs Should excessively high or low tempera- Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays, tures occur while in CD changer mode*, etc. for cleaning. CD ERROR will appear in the display, and the ț CD will be muted until the temperature has Replace the CD in its case after use. reached an acceptable level for the system ț Protect CDs from heat and direct to continue operation. sunlight. The single CD player and the CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 files.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 210 Controls in detail Audio system

Multisession CDs File structure on a disc Track and folder names For multisession CDs, the first session When you create an MP3 disc, the MP3 When you create an MP3 disc, you can as- type of the CD determines how the audio tracks can be organized in folders. A folder sign names to the MP3 tracks and folders. system will process the CD. can also contain other folders. A disc can The audio system uses these names for contain a maximum of 255 folders. Each For example, if the first session type is ac- the corresponding display in MP3 mode. folder can contain a maximum of cording to the audio CD standard and the Empty folders or folders which contain 255 tracks and 255 folders. A disc can second session type is according to the data other than MP3 tracks are not dis- contain a maximum of 4000 tracks. Usual- data CD standard containing MP3 tracks, played by the audio system. ly this number will not be reached because the audio system will treat the CD as a con- If MP3 files are saved in the root directory each minute of an MP3 track requires ap- ventional audio CD. This means that it is itself (uppermost directory on storage me- proximately 1 MB of storage space. only possible to access the audio CD dium), the root directory will also be treat- tracks. Access to the MP3 tracks is not ed as a folder. The audio system will then possible. show the name of the root directory as the Similarly, if the first session type is accord- folder name. ing to the data CD standard containing MP3 tracks and the second session type is according to the audio CD standard, the audio system will treat the CD as a data CD. This means that it is only possible to access the MP3 tracks. Access to the audio CD tracks is not possible.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 211 Controls in detail Audio system

You must observe the following when as- Permissible MP3 formats i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of at signing track names: The audio system supports the MPEG1 Au- least 128 kbit/s or higher and a sampling rate of at least 44.1 kHz or higher. Smaller rates can ț Track names must have at least one dio Layer 3 format. cause a noticeable deterioration in sound quali- character. i This format is generally known as “MP3”. ty. This is especially the case if you have activat- ț Track names must have the extension ed the surround sound* function. “mp3”. Compatible file systems and compres- Notes on copyright ț There must be a period between the sion methods The music tracks that you create for MP3 track name and the extension. The following compression methods are mode and can play back in MP3 mode are compatible: Example of a correct track name: generally subject to copyright protection in Track1.mp3 ț MP3 accordance with the applicable interna- The audio system is unable to recognize an ț WMA tional and national regulations. MP3 track if: In many countries, reproductions are not i If music files, created with different com- ț there is no period between the track pression methods, in addition to MP3 files, are permitted without the prior consent of the title and the extension stored together on a disc, the loading process copyright holder, not even for private use. may take longer before the first track is played. ț there is no extension Make sure you know the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with i The audio system does not support ID3 tags. Permissible bit and sampling rates these. ț Fixed and variable bit rates up to If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for 320 kbit/s your own compositions and recordings, or ț Sampling rates of 24 kHz – 48 kHz the copyright holder has granted you per- mission, these restrictions do not apply.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 212 Controls in detail Audio system

Operating the CD player Single CD player Warning! G The single CD drive and the CD changer* ̈ Switching to CD mode: Press have the same controls. button é on the audio control unit. Only insert a CD when the vehicle is station- The CD display appears when you ary. There is a risk of accident by being dis- switch to CD mode. CDs start to play tracted from road and traffic conditions if automatically when they are inserted. you load a CD while the vehicle is in motion. The following message will appear if no Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph CD is inserted. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

! If a CD is already loaded, it must be ejected 1 CD slot before inserting a new CD. Inserting a second 2 Eject/load button CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will 3 Forward cause damage to the CD drive not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 4 Rewind

Information Provided by:Provided Information 213 Controls in detail Audio system

̈ Ejecting a CD: Press eject/load ̈ Loading a CD: Insert CD into CD button 2. slot 1. The system ejects the CD. Please The system automatically pulls the CD Remove Disc appears in the display. into the CD slot 1 and starts to play the audio CD if it has been inserted cor- ̈ Remove CD from CD slot 1. rectly and is permissible. NO Disc appears in the display. CD changer* i If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot 1 within approximately. 15 seconds, the The CD changer can hold up to a total of 6 Warning! G system automatically pulls the CD back in and audio CDs plays it. Only insert a CD when the vehicle is station- ̈ Switching to CD mode: Press If a CD is pulled back in, press eject/load ary. There is a risk of accident by being dis- button 2 again; the CD will then be ejected. button é on the audio control unit. tracted from road and traffic conditions if The CD changer display appears when you load a CD while the vehicle is in motion. i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this side must face upwards when loaded. If neither you switch to CD changer mode. If Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph side is printed, the side to be played must face there is a CD in one of the magazine (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is downwards. trays, it will start to play automatically. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot The following message will appear if no ly 14 m) every second. be read, Disc Unreadable appears in the CDs are inserted. display.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 214 Controls in detail Audio system i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this ̈ Press n to confirm. ̈ Press button é, or the eject/load side must face upwards when loaded. If neither The CD changer will switch to the se- button 2 on the audio control unit to side is printed, the side to be played must face finish the loading process. downwards. lected magazine compartment. The message Please Wait... appears in The CD changer plays the disc if it has If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot the display. been inserted correctly and is permissi- be read, Disc Unreadable appears in the ble. display. i Only insert a CD after the audio system has ̈ Loading an individual magazine prompted you to do so with the message Please ̈ To interrupt loading procedure: compartment: Press eject/load Insert Disc . Only insert one CD per mag- Press the eject/load button again. azine compartment. button 2. or ̈ Insert CD into CD slot 1. A menu indicates which magazine com- ̈ Press button í in the center con- partments are currently loaded. The The CD changer automatically pulls the sole (୴ page 184). first available magazine compartment CD into the CD slot 1 and places it in is indicated by a red number. the selected magazine compartment. The message Loading Disc ̈ Press desired button 1 to 6, in appears in the display. the keypad to select a magazine compartment. i The loading process may take a while, depending on the type of disc. If you do not insert a or disc, the display will switch back to the Maga- ̈ Slide omp or rotate ymz to select a zine menu after approximately 20 seconds. magazine compartment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 215 Controls in detail Audio system

̈ Filling an empty magazine compart- ̈ Insert CD into CD slot 1. ̈ To interrupt loading procedure: ments: Press eject/load button 2. The CD changer automatically pulls the Press the eject/load button 2 again. A menu indicates which magazine com- CD into the CD slot 1 and places it in or partments are currently loaded. The an empty magazine compartment. The ̈ Press button í in the center first available magazine compartment message Please Wait... appears in console (୴ page 184). is indicated by a red number. the display. If the CD is loaded, the CD changer will switch to the next empty The loading process has not been complet- magazine compartment. The message ed, the audio system will play the last in- Please Insert Disc appears in serted CD. the display. Ejecting CDs from CD changer* ̈ Repeat the steps until all compartments have been loaded. Warning! G ̈ Press eject/load button 2 on the au- ̈ Slide mr to select the menu bar. dio control unit to finish the loading Only eject a CD when the vehicle is stationary. There is a risk of accident by being dis- ̈ Slide omp or rotate ymz the audio process. tracted from road and traffic conditions if controller to select Fill Empty Slots. The CD changer plays the last loaded you unload a CD while the vehicle is in ̈ Press the audio controller n. disc if it has been inserted correctly motion. and is permissible. The message Please Insert Disc Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph appears in the display. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- Only insert a CD after the audio system has i ly 14 m) every second. prompted you to do so with the message Please Insert Disc . Only insert one CD per magazine compartment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 216 Controls in detail Audio system i If you eject a CD while another is being ̈ Remove the CD from CD slot 1. ̈ Press n to confirm. played, the audio system interrupts playback. If you do not remove the CD from the The CDs are ejected one after the Playback will continue once the CD has been ejected completely. CD slot 1, the CD changer will auto- other. matically pull the CD back in after a ̈ Remove the CD from CD slot 1. ̈ Ejecting one CD: Press eject/load short while. button 2. The CD changer switches to the next ̈ Ejecting all CDs: Press eject/load occupied magazine compartment and The magazine menu with active main button 2. area appears in the audio display. The ejects the CD. The magazine menu with active main magazine compartment with the cur- If you do not remove the CD from the area appears in the audio display. The rent CD is highlighted. CD slot 1, the CD changer will auto- magazine compartment with the cur- matically pull the CD back in after a rent CD is highlighted. short while. ̈ Repeat the last step until the magazine is empty. Selecting a CD ̈ é Changer. ̈ Press desired button 1 to 6, in The magazine menu with active main the keypad to select a magazine com- area appears in the audio display. The ̈ Slide to select the menu bar. partment. mr magazine compartment with the cur- ̈ or Slide omp or rotate ymz the audio rent CD is highlighted. controller to select “Eject All”. ̈ ̈ Slide omp or rotate ymz the audio Slide omp or rotate ymz the audio controller to select the desired CD. controller to select the desired CD. ̈ ̈ Press n to confirm. Press n to confirm. by:Provided Information 217 Controls in detail Audio system

Playing CDs Example display in audio CD mode Example display in MP3 mode i The following section is valid for the single CD player and the CD changer*. The illustrations show the audio display of the CD changer*.

Additional button functions In CD mode, you can use two additional buttons on the telephone keypad: Track number Track number ô displays information about the 1 1 track, if this has been saved 2 Track name (only if saved on the disc) 2 File name with the track on the CD. 3 Elapsed track time 3 Elapsed track time 4 Disc name (only if saved on the disc) 4 Mode ó enables you to enter the track 5 Disc number (CD changer*) 5 Folder name (only if saved on the disc) number directly. 6 Disc type 6 Disc number (CD changer*) 7 Disc type

Pause function ̈ Pausing playback: Press F briefly. ̈ Continuing playback: Press F again briefly.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 218 Controls in detail Audio system

Selecting a track The track list appears. In MP3 mode, Selecting a folder the track list of the current folder ap- ̈ Skipping forwards or backwards to This function is only available in audio MP3 pears. The dotR indicates the current i a track: Rotate ymz or slide omp. mode. track. or ̈ é Folder. ̈ Select a track by rotating ymz or slid- ̈ Briefly press button G or H on ing qmr. or audio control unit. ̈ Press n to confirm. ̈ Press n when main area is selected. i Skipping forwards through the tracks skips i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks in The track list of the current folder ap- to the next track. Skipping backwards through pears. the tracks skips to the beginning of the current alphabetical order. track if the track has been playing for more than ̈ Selecting one folder higher: Select 8 seconds. If the track has been playing for less Fast forward/rewind the Q symbol. than 8 seconds, it skips to the start of the previ- ̈ ous track. Select main area. The display changes to the next folder If you have switched on the “Random Tracks” ̈ Slide and hold omp until desired place up in the folder structure on the disc. playback option, the order of the tracks is ran- is reached. ̈ dom. Selecting a folder: Slide qmr or ro- or tate ymz the audio controller, to se- ̈ Selecting from the track list: lect the desired folder. é Track List. ̈ Press and hold button G or H on audio control unit. ̈ Press n to confirm. or You will see the tracks in the folder. ୴୴ ̈ Press n when the main area is selected.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 219 Controls in detail Audio system

୴୴̈ Select a track by sliding qmr or rotat- ̈ Selecting an option: é CD/MP3. Audio Aux mode ing the audio controller. ymz The option list appears. A dot R indi- An external audio source (Aux) can be con- ̈ Press n to confirm. cates which option is switched on. nected to the audio system. The The track is played and the correspond- ̈ Select an option and press n. cinch-connector for connecting the exter- ing folder is now the active folder. The option is switched on. For all op- nal audio source (Aux) is located in the tions except Normal Track Sequence, glove box. Please contact an authorized Playback options you will see a corresponding indicator Mercedes-Benz Center for more informa- The following options are available: in the main area. tion ț Normal Track Sequence i The “Normal Track Sequence” option is au- Tracks playback in the order on the tomatically activated when you select a different disc (e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.). medium. If an option is activated, it remains activated after the audio system is switched on/off. ț Random Tracks Tracks playback in a random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5, etc.). ț Random Folder (in MP3 mode only) Tracks in the active folder and any sub- folders playback in random order. 1 External audio source (Aux) cinch-connector

Information Provided by:Provided Information 220 Controls in detail Audio system

Calling up Aux mode The following settings can be made in the Warning! G audio Aux mode: G ț ୴ Only operate an external audio source (Aux) Warning! Volume ( page 189) when the vehicle is stationary. There is a risk ț Balance control and fader Due to the different volumes of the external of accident by being distracted from road (୴ page 190) audio sources, system messages (e.g. traffic and traffic conditions if you operate an ex- and navigation announcements) may be ț Bass and treble control (୴ page 189) ternal audio source (Aux) while the vehicle is much louder. You may need to disable these in motion. ț Surround sound (୴ page 190) system messages or adjust the volume of Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph these messages manually. i The volume of external audio sources is ex- (approximately 50 km/h), your car is tremely variable. It is possible that a device con- covering a distance of 44 feet nected as an external audio source will sound ̈ Selecting audio Aux mode: (approximately 14 m) every second. quieter or louder in the vehicle or that the usual é CD/MP3 Aux. maximum volume cannot be achieved. On certain devices the volume can be set separately. In The audio Aux menu appears. The me- this case, start at a moderate volume and in- dium in the external audio source is crease it slowly. In this way, you can determine heard, provided it is connected and whether the system is capable of playback with- switched to playback. out distortion, even at high volume.

Please refer to the relevant operating guide i Switch back to CD mode for operation of the external audio source. ̈ Select Back To Disc in the audio Aux menu. The CD mode is switched on.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 221 Controls in detail Audio system

Telephone* When the telephone is connected via the Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is you can operate the telephone using the Safety precautions covering a distance of 44 feet (approxi- following devices: mately 14 m) every second. ț audio system (୴ page 237) Warning! G ț Audio controller Warning! G Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from ț Audio control unit using a cellular telephone while driving. Never operate radio transmitters equipped Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety ț buttons s and t on the multi- with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- reasons, the driver should not use the cellu- function steering wheel (୴ page 152) out being connected to an external antenna) lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion. ț from inside the vehicle while the engine is mobile phone keypad Stop the vehicle in a safe location before running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- placing or answering a call. Please note that these functions are only tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- available with Mercedes-Benz approved If you nonetheless choose to use the tele- sibly resulting in an accident and/or telephones. 1 phone while driving, please use the hands- personal injury. free device and be sure to pay attention to the traffic situation at all times. Use the telephone only when road, weather and traffic i The functions and services available to you while using the telephone depend on your ser- conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not vice provider and the type of telephone you are be able to observe traffic conditions and using. See also separate operating manual for in- could endanger yourself and others. structions on how to use your telephone.

1 Observe all legal requirements.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 222 Controls in detail Audio system

TEL Menu

Telephone Name Call lists Microphone off/on Phone list Phone book Call Lists Receive Business Card(s) (vCards) Delete Call Lists Mic On/Mic Off Delete external data

General notes Further information on suitable telephones ț you move from one mobile network and on connecting Bluetooth® enabled transmitter/receiver area (mobile net- Making calls via Bluetooth® interface telephones to the audio system are avail- work cell) into another and no channels The audio system telephone function via able at an authorized Mercedes-Benz are free or the cell is full. the Bluetooth® interface is available in Center. ț you are using a SIM card that is not conjunction with a Bluetooth® enabled compatible to the available network. Calls disconnected while the vehicle is telephone. in motion ț when using a telephone with “Twin- With a suitable telephone, you can use the card”, the telephone is simultaneously Interruptions to the connecting may occur hands-free device and receive electronic logged into the network with the sec- if business cards (vCards) via the Bluetooth® ond SIM card. interface. ț there is insufficient mobile network coverage in certain regions.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 223 Controls in detail Audio system

Operating options i In order for the functions described in this Caller ID ® section to work correctly, the Bluetooth tele- The audio system can display the tele- i The components and operating principles of phone must be linked to the audio system ୴ the audio system can be found on ( page 177) (୴ page 192). Please make sure any other Blue- phone number and the name of the caller, ୴ and ( page 187). tooth® device linked with the telephone is e.g. for an incoming call and also in other When the telephone is connected via the switched off before you use the telephone func- menus or displays. Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, tions with the audio system. For the telephone number to be displayed, you can operate the telephone using the Unless otherwise indicated, the descrip- the caller must transmit their telephone following devices: tions and illustrations in this section refer number. to audio system. This is also the case for name displays. For ț buttons s and t and keypad on this, the telephone number and the name audio control unit of the caller must also be saved in the tele- ț audio controller in center console phone book. ț multifunction steering wheel Please note that these functions are only available with Mercedes-Benz approved telephones. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on features available for your telephone of choice.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 224 Controls in detail Audio system

Functional restrictions ț If you switch off the audio system in the Activating the telephone You will not be able to use the telephone, middle of a call, e.g. by switching off Prerequisites for the telephone or you may have to wait a while, in the fol- the ignition, that call will be cut off. You can prevent this from happening as following situations: For making calls using the audio system lows: via the Bluetooth® interface, you will need ț If the telephone is switched off. ț Switch the phone to “private mode” a Bluetooth® enabled telephone. ț If the telephone is not connected via before switching the audio system Before attempting to make or receive calls the Bluetooth® interface to the audio off (see telephone operating in- via the Bluetooth® interface, check your system. structions). phone's hands-free profile. It must support ț The telephone must not be locked. version 1.0 or higher (see telephone oper- ț If the telephone has not yet logged into ating instructions). the network. i Not all telephones on the market are suit- The telephone automatically tries to able. Further information on suitable telephones ® log into a network. If no network is and on connecting Bluetooth enabled telephones to the audio system are available from an available, you will also not be able to authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. make a “911” emergency call. If you attempt to make an outgoing call, the No Service message will appear for a short while.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 225 Controls in detail Audio system

Activating Bluetooth® ̈ ê System Activate Blue- Searching for a telephone tooth. ̈ Switch on the telephone ̈ h Tel Phone List Update. (see telephone operating instructions). You have activated or deactivated The audio system searches for suitable Bluetooth®. A checkmark appears ̈ Enter the PIN (not necessary at each Bluetooth® telephones within range when Bluetooth® is activated. telephone or network). and enters them in the telephone list. ̈ Activate Bluetooth® connection on the Registering a telephone (authorizing) Authorized Bluetooth® telephones will telephone (see telephone operating in- be identified by a telephone-symbol in structions) When you use your telephone in conjunc- front of the list entry once the tele- tion with the audio system for the first phone list has been updated. (The sym- ̈ Press button h on the audio control time, you must register (authorize) it. unit to call up the telephone mode. bol will be grayed out if the authorized It is possible to register several telephone is not located in the Bluetooth® i On certain telephones, not only do you have phones. The connection is always estab- range.) to activate the Bluetooth® function but your own lished to the last activated telephone in device must additionally be made “visible” for signal range. When you authorize a new i The duration of the search procedure depends on the number and type of Bluetooth® other devices. telephone, it is activated automatically. Each Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth® device telephones. The search may take a few minutes. name. It is recommended to give your telephone You can switch between the authorized a personal name, by which you can clearly recog- telephones. i If the telephone list is already full (15 en- nize your telephone. tries), you must de-authorize one of the authorized devices. Then you will start the search i If the Bluetooth® function on the audio sys- again. Otherwise a new device you are looking tem is disabled, the message Bluetooth not for will not appear in the list. activated in system settings appears. If the audio system does not find your phone, ex- ̈ Activate Bluetooth® connection on the ternal authorization may be necessary (୴ page 228). audio system (୴ page 193).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 226 Controls in detail Audio system

Authorizing a Bluetooth® device i The passcode is any one- to sixteen-digit With the audio controller: ̈ Select the desired unauthorized device number, which you can set yourself. For the ̈ Entering passcode: Select the digits quality of coding of the connection it is recom- from the telephone list by pushing the mend to use a passcode of at least four digits. in the menu bar one by one, by audio controller. You must enter the same number in the audio sliding omp or rotating ymz the audio controller. or system and also in the device to be authorized. Please also refer to the instructions in the tele- ̈ Press n to confirm each digit. ̈ Select Options Authorize. phone operating guide. ̈ Confirming passcode: Select din The input menu for the passcode On the audio system, you can enter the the menu bar and press n to confirm. appears. passcode via the digits in the on-screen menu bar or via the telephone keypad in ̈ Deleting digits: Select õ in the the audio control unit. menu bar and briefly press n to delete one digit, or press and hold n to delete all entered digits. ̈ Canceling entry: Press button í in the center console (୴ page 184).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 227 Controls in detail Audio system

With keypad on audio control unit: Entering passcode into the telephone External authorization ̈ Entering passcode: Press the desired If a Bluetooth® connection is established If the audio system cannot find your tele- numbers on the keypad. successfully, you will be prompted to enter phone, this may be due to special security a code into the telephone (see the operat- settings on your telephone. In this case, ̈ Confirming passcode: Press ing instructions for the telephone). you can check whether, conversely, your button s or button ô in the au- telephone can find the audio system. The dio control unit to confirm. ̈ Enter the same passcode on the tele- audio systems Bluetooth® device name is phone as you did on the audio system. ̈ Deleting digits: Briefly press “MB Bluetooth”. button î in the audio control unit to You may need to enter a confirmation once i ̈ h Tel Phone List Update delete one number, or press and hold you have entered the passcode on your phone. Options External Authoriza- button î to delete all entered num- Check your phone display. tion. bers. If the message Authorization Procedure Unsuccessful appears on the audio system ̈ Start Bluetooth® search procedure on ̈ Canceling entry: Press button í in display, you may have exceeded the preset peri- the center console (୴ page 184). the telephone (see the operating in- od for authorization. Repeat the process. structions for the telephone). The device is authorized. You can now ̈ Select the audio system (“MB Blue- make calls via the audio system hands-free tooth”). device using the authorized telephone. ̈ When prompted to do so, enter the passcode on the telephone and then on the audio system.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 228 Controls in detail Audio system

Displaying details on a telephone i If you de-authorize a device which has been ̈ h Tel Phone List. authorized in the past and which is not detected ̈ h Tel Phone List. ̈ Select an authorized telephone from in the search, this device will no longer be dis- the list. ̈ Select the telephone from the list. played in the device list. Devices which have been authorized in the past ̈ ̈ Press n to confirm. Select Options Details. but which are not detected in the search are ei- The details screen for the device is ther not switched on or not in the vehicle. The selected phone will be searched shown in the audio display. for and connected if it is located in the Activating another telephone Bluetooth® range and Bluetooth® is ac- ̈ To close details screen: tivated on the corresponding device. Slide omp the audio controller or If you have several authorized telephones, The selected telephone is activated. press button í in the center you can switch between the individual tele- console. phones. A dotR in front of the entry, indicates You cannot switch to another authorized the current active telephone in the ® i De-authorizing a Bluetooth device phone during a call. phone list. ̈ h Tel Phone List. When you authorize a new telephone, it is Receiving business cards ̈ Select authorized device. automatically activated. Only one telephone can be active at a time. You can import business cards (vCards) ̈ Select Options De-Authorize. into the address book from external Blue- ® A prompt appears asking whether you tooth devices (୴ page 233). really want to de-authorize this device. ̈ Select Yes or No. If you select Yes, the device will be de-authorized.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 229 Controls in detail Audio system

TEL-Basic display The bars indicate the current signal Setting transmit and receive volume strength of the mobile phone network ̈ Press button h on the audio control for reception. Optimum reception is in- i These settings should normally not be unit to call up the telephone mode. changed as the factory settings are matched to dicated by all bars full. All bars empty most mobile phones. Find out about the opti- When the connected phone is ready for op- indicates very poor or no reception. mum settings for your mobile phone at an eration, the display will look like this: ț Receiver symbol s or t. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The receiver symbol indicates whether i Changes may result in significant impair- a call is being connected or is in ments to the transmission quality. These set- progress: tings may not be changed during an active phone t - not active call. ț READY indicates that a call is possible. ̈ h Tel Phone List. ț NO SERVICE indicates that the mobile ̈ Select an mobile phone from the list. The following information is displayed in network is not available. ̈ Select Options Reception Volume the status bar: or Transmission Volume. ț Actual time: ̈ To set the volume: Slide qmr or 04:38 rotate ymz the audio controller. ț Bluetooth® device name of the con- The volume bar moves up or down. nected phone, in this case: ̈ To confirm selection: Press n or blue_mobil slide omp the audio controller. ț Mobile phone network signal strength I. This information will only be shown with suitable telephones.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 230 Controls in detail Audio system

“911” emergency call Consult the separate telephone operating GSM network phones instructions that came with your mobile i The “911” emergency call system is a public phone* for information on how to place a Placing a “911” emergency call using service. Using it without due cause is a criminal “911” emergency call on the mobile audio control unit with the phone un- offense. phone*. locked i This function places a call to the local 911 The following conditions must be met for a ̈ Press h button to switch to tele- provider. It does not initiate a Tele Aid call. “911” emergency call via the audio phone mode. system: The following describes how to dial a “911” ̈ Enter 911 using the number keypad on emergency call using the audio system ț Telephone must be switched on. the audio control unit. head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified ț The corresponding mobile communica- ̈ Press s button. mobile phone* is connected via the Blue- tions network must be available. tooth® interface to the audio system. Un- or less otherwise specified, the descriptions i Emergency calls may not be possible with all ̈ Press n for dialing to begin. refer to the audio system head unit. telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions are active. DIALING appears in the audio display Check with your local service providers. while the telephone establishes the If you cannot make an emergency call, you connection. will have to initiate rescue measures your- ̈ Wait until the emergency call center self. answers, then describe the emergency.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 231 Controls in detail Audio system i If no SIM card is in the mobile phone, with a CDMA network phones ̈ Press n for dialing to begin. few types of mobile phones NO SERVICE ap- DIALING appears in the audio display pears in the audio display. In that case, you only Placing a “911” emergency call using while the telephone establishes the can make an emergency call on the mobile audio control unit with the phone un- connection. phone itself, without the use of the audio control locked unit. ̈ Wait until the emergency call center ̈ Press button to switch to tele- h answers, then describe the emergency. Placing a “911” emergency call with the phone mode. phone locked ̈ Enter 911 using the number keypad on Placing a “911” emergency call with the i If the mobile phone is locked, you only can the audio control unit. phone locked make an emergency call on the mobile phone it- ̈ Press s button. If the mobile phone is locked, you only can self, without the use of the audio control unit. i or make an emergency call on the mobile phone itself, without the use of the audio control unit.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 232 Controls in detail Audio system

Phone book i If you switch to a different mode while Deleting external Data vCards are being received (e.g., press ̈ h Tel Delete External Data. You can save telephone numbers in the au- button b), reception of vCards will be abort- dio system's phone book. ed. A prompt appears asking whether the data should be deleted. i These entries are retained even if you use ̈ h Tel Receive Business the audio system with another mobile phone. Cards. ̈ Select Yes or No. You should delete these entries before handing ̈ Press n to confirm. If you select Yes all personal data are over or selling your vehicle. ̈ To import: Start the data transfer on then deleted from the phone book. Receiving business cards (vCards) the external Bluetooth® phone (“Export business cards (vCards)”, see the oper- Opening the phone book You can import business cards (vCards) ating instructions for the mobile ̈ Name. from external Bluetooth® phones into your h phone). audio system's phone book. To do this: Entries in the phone book are displayed The audio system imports the data for in alphabetical order. The smart speller ț Bluetooth® must be activated on the the business cards and displays the is active and appears near the bottom audio system and on the external Blue- number of business cards received. of the display. tooth® phone (see the operating instructions for the mobile phone). i Select Back or switch to a different mode to You can use the smart speller to reduce abort reception. the number of entries you need to make. ț The external Bluetooth® phone must be able to send vCards via Bluetooth® (see ̈ To end reception: Press n. the operating instructions for the mo- or bile phone). ̈ Press button í in the center con- ț ® The external Bluetooth phone in the sole (୴ page 184). vehicle must be switched on and authorized.

Information Provided by:Provided Information ୴୴ 233 Controls in detail Audio system

୴୴̈ Switching from the search speller to ̈ To enter characters: Slide omp or the list: Slide qm repeatedly or press rotate ymz the audio controller to se- and hold n until the search speller is lect the characters for the required en- hidden. try. or The first letters you enter determine the first letters of the word you are ̈ Select d. looking for. ̈ Switching from the list to the search ̈ Press to confirm. ̈ Select the characters for the required speller: Press button . n í entry one after another. The first entry containing the selected Selecting an entry initial letters is highlighted in the list. If As soon as the selection has been nar- there are a number of similar entries, rowed down to a single entry, the audio Selecting via search speller the next different character is system will switch to the list automatically. ̈ Switch if necessary from the list to the displayed. search speller. Example: ̈ To delete an individual character: In the example, the first letters of the Select õ and briefly press n. ̈ To switch search speller character names Fisher, Bob and Fisher, Kim are set: Select #. or the same. The first possible distinct letter ̈ Depending on the previous setting, this is the B or the K. Press buttonî next to the audio switches it to letters with special char- Therefore, B and K are offered as possibili- controller. acters or numbers with special charac- ties. After entering each character or after ters each deletion of a character, the clos- est matching entry is given at the top of the list.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 234 Controls in detail Audio system

̈ To delete an entire entry: Displaying details on an entry Deleting entry Select õ and press and hold n un- The audio system can also fully display an ̈ Select entry til the entire entry has been deleted. abbreviated entry. ̈ Slide mp to select Options. or ̈ Select entry. ̈ Press n to confirm. ̈ Press and hold until the entire en- ̈ Slide to select Options. î mp ̈ Select Delete. try has been deleted. ̈ Press to confirm. n You will be prompted to confirm that ̈ Ending search: Switch from the ̈ Select Details. you really want to delete the entry. search speller to the list. A screen with the details of the select- ̈ Select Yes or No. The top list entry is highlighted auto- ed entry appears. matically. If you select Yes the actual entry is de- ̈ To close details screen: Slide qmr, leted from the phone book. Selecting via list or omp, or rotate ymz, or press buttonî. ̈ Switch if necessary from the search speller to the list. ̈ Slide qmr or rotate ymz the audio controller until the desired entry is highlighted. ̈ Press n to confirm and a call will be initiated.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 235 Controls in detail Audio system

Call lists Deleting call lists

The audio system displays the calls re- i The saved call lists are retained in the audio system, even if you use the audio system with ceived (including missed calls) or made another mobile phone. For this reason you during phone mode in their own lists. should delete any call lists before handing over or selling the vehicle. i The particular menu item can only be selected if calls have already been received or made ̈ In the phone main menu select Call from audio system. i If there is a symbol with a telephone receiver Lists. The display of missed calls in the audio system in front of the phone number or the name, then ̈ Select Delete Call Lists. display is not possible with all mobile phones. you have missed this call (e.g. in the highlighted The control system displays the list of Dialed line of the following figure). You will be prompted to confirm that numbers in the multifunction display. you really want to delete the entry. The question Do you want to delete call The audio system's call lists are not syn- i lists appears in the display. chronized with the call lists on your mobile phone. If you make a call from your mobile phone ̈ Select Yes or No. and only use the audio system's hands-free de- ̈ vice, these calls will not be listed. Press n to confirm. If you select Yes both lists are deleted. Calling up the list ̈ ̈ h Call Lists. Slide qmr or rotate ymz the audio controller until the desired entry is ̈ Select Calls Received or Calls Di- highlighted. aled. ̈ Initiating call: Press button n or The appropriate list appears. s. ̈ To close the lists: Press button í. Information Provided by:Provided Information 236 Controls in detail Audio system

Making calls You can enter the * character by pressing the ó button once. You can en- ̈ Press button h on the audio control ter the + character by pressing the unit to call up the telephone mode. ó once and then again within ap- When the mobile phone is ready for opera- prox. 1.5 seconds. tion, the display will look like this: ̈ To delete individual digits: Briefly press button î in the audio control unit. ̈ To enter digits: Slide omp or ̈ To delete an entire entry: Press and rotate ymz the audio controller to se- hold button î until the entire entry lect the required digit. has been deleted. ̈ Press n to confirm. or ̈ Repeat the procedure, until you have ̈ Press button t. select all digits for the necessary Initiating an outgoing call phone number. Entering phone number via the audio ̈ To delete individual digits: Entering phone number via the audio controller Slide omp or rotate ymz to control unit In addition to the actual menu bar, the tele- select õ and briefly press n. You can enter numbers and special charac- phone main menu features a second bar or ters via the telephone keypad. containing numbers, the number menu. ̈ Press î button next to the audio ̈ Entering: Use 0 to 9, ô and ó to When the bar is active (highlighted), you controller. enter characters. can select elements.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 237 Controls in detail Audio system

̈ To delete entire phone number: Initiating a call to a call list entry The dialed calls list appears. The call di- Slide omp or rotate ymz to aled last will be at the top of the list. ̈ h Call Lists. select , press and hold until õ n ̈ To select a call: Slide qmr or the phone number has been deleted. ̈ Select Calls Received or Calls Di- rotate ymz the audio controller until aled. or the desired entry is highlighted. The appropriate list appears. ̈ Press and hold î until the entire en- ̈ Initiating call: Press button n try has been deleted. ̈ Select entry (୴ page 236). or s. or ̈ Press button s or n. Aborting dialing or ending a call ̈ Press button t. Redialing ̈ h 4 and press button n. ̈ To initiate a call: Slide omp or or rotate ymz the audio controller to select ö. ̈ Press button t on the audio control unit. ̈ Press n to confirm. or ̈ Press button s.

Initiating a call to a phone book entry i In order to use the redial function, no numbers may have been entered. ̈ h Name. ̈ Press button s. ̈ Select entry (୴ page 234). or ̈ Press button s or n. ̈ Select ö and press button n.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 238 Controls in detail Audio system

Rejecting or accepting calls If you have accepted the call using the au- You will be notified of an incoming call by dio control unit, audio controller, or the the ringing tone and a message on the dis- multifunction steering wheel, the call will play. be conducted via the hands-free system. The volume of the call can be adjusted i Depending on the mobile phone you are us- (୴ page 189). ing, the audio system's ringing tone may differ from the one you have set on your phone. You Further operating functions can be found may hear ̈ To accept: Press button s on audio in the “Functions during a single-call” section (୴ page 240). ț the ringing tone set on the mobile phone control unit. ț the audio system's preset ringing tone or You can also accept a call if the audio display is showing a screen other than the ț the audio system's preset ringing tone and ̈ Press n on the audio controller. the ringing tone set on the mobile phone. telephone mode screen. After accepting ̈ To reject: Press button t on audio the call, the display switches to the phone If the caller's name and number are among control unit. display. Once the call is over, the display the entries in the audio system's phone for the previous mode will appear again. book and the caller has not withheld this or information, it will appear on the display. If ̈ Slide om or rotate ymz the audio con- the caller withholds this information, you troller to select Reject, and press n will see: on the audio controller to confirm. The call is rejected.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 239 Controls in detail Audio system

Functions during a single call Sending DTMF tones ̈ Transmitting a phone number of a phone book entry as a sequence of This function is not possible with all mobile i characters: Select Name. Switching hands-free microphone on or phones. ̈ Select the desired phone book entry. off Answering machines or other devices can The menu bar changes when you make or be controlled via DTMF tones, e.g. for re- The entry is transmitted immediately as receive a call. Instead of the Call Lists mote query functions. a sequence of characters. menu item, Mic Off or Mic On will appear. ̈ To transmit individual characters: ̈ To switch back to call display: Select ̈ To switch off: Select Mic Off. During a call select the required char- Back. acters. The following message will flash up on the display: The microphone is off. or When the microphone is switched off ̈ Press the corresponding button on the the symbol > appears in the main audio control unit. area. Every selected character is transmitted ̈ To switch on: Select Mic On. immediately. The following message will flash up on the display: The microphone is on. The microphone is switched on and the symbol > disappears in the main area.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 240 Controls in detail Driving systems ̄ Driving systems The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages: Warning! G Warning! G ț Cruise control, with which the vehicle The cruise control is a convenience system The cruise control brakes automatically so can maintain a preset speed. designed to assist the driver during vehicle that the set speed is not exceeded. The ț Hill start assist system which helps you operation. The driver is and must always brake pedal depresses when the cruise con- to start off smoothly on a hill. remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed trol engages the brakes. and for safe brake operation. For information on the ABS, Adaptive Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in- Brake, BAS, EBP, ESP®, and 4MATIC, see Only use the cruise control if the road, cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob- “Driving safety systems” (୴ page 59). traffic, and weather conditions make it jects stored in this area may impair pedal advisable to travel at a steady speed. movement which could interfere with the Cruise control ț The use of the cruise control can be braking ability of the cruise control system. dangerous on winding roads or in heavy Do not place your foot under the brake pedal The cruise control automatically maintains traffic because conditions do not allow – your foot could become caught. the speed you set for your vehicle. safe driving at a steady speed. Keep in mind that the cruise control is a con- ț The use of the cruise control is recom- The use of the cruise control can be venience system designed to assist the driv- dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid mended for driving at a constant speed for er during vehicle operation. The driver is and changes in tire traction can result in extended periods of time. must always remain responsible for the ve- wheel spin and loss of control. You can set or resume the cruise control at hicle’s speed and for safe brake operation. ț Deactivate the cruise control when any speed over 20 mph (30 km/h). driving in fog. The cruise control function is operated by The “Resume” function should only be means of the cruise control lever. operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 241 Controls in detail Driving systems

Activating cruise control Setting current speed You can activate the cruise control if the ̈ Accelerate or decelerate to the desired vehicle speed is above 20 mph (30 km/h). speed. In the following cases you cannot activate ̈ Briefly lift the cruise control lever in the cruise control: direction of arrow 1 or depress in ț when you brake direction of arrow 2. ț the vehicle is secured with the parking The current speed is set. brake ̈ Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. 1 Setting current or higher speed ț Vehicles with automatic transmission*: Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to re- when the gear selector lever is set to The cruise control is activated. sistance point) or 5 mph increments P R N position , , or ț The last set speed appears in the (past resistance point) ț when ESP® is switched off multifunction display for approxi- (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h) mately 5 seconds. 2 Setting current or lower speed i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom- Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to re- eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for ț The corresponding speedometer sistance point) or 5 mph increments the cruise control system. segments from the selected speed (past resistance point) to the vehicle maximum speed in (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h) the multifunction display are illumi- 3 Cancel cruise control nated. 4 Resume to last set speed

Information Provided by:Provided Information 242 Controls in detail Driving systems

i Vehicles with manual transmission: i The cruise control switches off If you depress the clutch pedal when shifting into automatically and the segments in the multifunc- another gear, the engine speed may increase. tion display go out when ț Always drive at sufficient, but not excessive, ț you step on the brake pedal. engine speed. ț you press the parking brake pedal. ț Shift gear in a timely manner. The cruise control switches off automatically, ț Avoid shifting down more than one gear if at the segments in the multifunction display go out all possible. and an acoustic warning sounds when ț the vehicle speed is below 20 mph Canceling cruise control (30 km/h). 1 Segments There are several ways to cancel the cruise ț the ESP® is in operation or switched off with ® i On uphill grades, the cruise control may not control: the ESP switch (୴ page 63). be able to maintain the set speed. Once the ț Vehicles with manual transmission: ̈ Step on the brake pedal. grade eases, the set speed will be resumed. you engage neutral or depress the clutch On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains The cruise control is canceled. The last pedal for more than 6 seconds during shift- the set speed by braking with the vehicle’s speed set is stored for later use. ing into another gear. braking system. In addition, on longer downhill ț Vehicles with automatic transmission*: or grades the automatic transmission* will down- you move the gear selector lever to shift automatically. ̈ Briefly push the cruise control lever in position N while driving. direction of arrow 3 (୴ page 242). Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear. The cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use. i The last stored set speed is canceled when the engine is turned off.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 243 Controls in detail Driving systems

! Vehicles with automatic transmission*: Setting a higher speed ̈ Briefly lift the cruise control lever to the Setting the automatic transmission to N while resistance point in direction of driving cancels the cruise control. However, the G arrow 1 (୴ page 242). gear selector lever should not be moved to Warning! position N while driving except to coast when ̈ Release the cruise control lever. If you increase the set vehicle speed, keep in the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy The vehicle set speed increases in in- roads). mind that it may take a brief moment until crements 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). the vehicle has reached the set speed. i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceler- Increase the set vehicle speed to a value Adjustment in 5 mph ation (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will re- that the prevailing road conditions and legal (Canada: 10 km/h) increments sume the last speed set. speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle i The set speed value is increased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift could cause an accident and/or serious the cruise control lever up past the resistance injury to you and others. point. ̈ Briefly lift the cruise control lever past You can increase the set speed in two the resistance point in direction of ways. arrow 1 (୴ page 242). Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) ̈ Release the cruise control lever. increments The vehicle set speed increases in in- i The set speed value is increased in 1 mph crements 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift The new speed is set and the vehicle will ac- the cruise control lever up to the resistance i celerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief point. moment until the vehicle has reached the set speed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 244 Controls in detail Driving systems

Setting a lower speed Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) ̈ Release the cruise control lever. increments The vehicle set speed decreases in in- Warning! G i The set speed value is decreased in 1 mph crements 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you The new speed is set and the vehicle will de- If you decrease the set vehicle speed, keep press the cruise control lever down to the resis- i tance point. celerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief in mind that it may take a brief moment until moment until the vehicle has reached the set the vehicle has the vehicle has reached the ̈ Briefly press the cruise control lever speed. set speed. down to the resistance point in direc- Decelerate the set vehicle speed to a value tion of arrow 2 (୴ page 242). Setting to last stored speed (“Resume” function) that the prevailing road conditions and legal ̈ Release the cruise control lever. speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and The vehicle set speed decreases in in- unexpected deceleration of the vehicle Warning! G could cause an accident and/or serious increments 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). jury to you and others. The set speed stored in memory should only Adjustment in 5 mph be set again if prevailing road conditions (Canada: 10 km/h) increments You can reduce the set speed in two ways. permit. Possible acceleration or decelera- i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph tion differences arising from returning to the When you use the cruise control lever to de- i (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you preset speed could cause an accident celerate, the brake system will automatically press the cruise control lever down past the re- and/or serious injury to you and others. brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power sistance point. does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. ̈ Briefly press the cruise control lever down past the resistance point in direction of arrow 2 (୴ page 242).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 245 Controls in detail Driving systems

̈ Briefly pull the cruise control lever in Hill start assist system ̈ Slowly release the clutch pedal, remov- the direction of arrow 4 (୴ page 242). ing your foot from the brake pedal at The cruise control resumes to the last the same time, and carefully depress Warning! G set speed or if no speed is stored, it will the accelerator pedal. set and store the current speed. ̈ Automatic transmission*: Move the The hill start assist system is not designed gear selector lever to position D or R. ̈ Remove your foot from the accelerator to function as an parking brake and does not pedal. prevent the vehicle from moving when ̈ Remove your foot from the brake pedal parked on an incline. and carefully depress the accelerator The last set speed appears in the multi- pedal. function display for approximately Always depress the parking brake in 5 seconds, and the corresponding addition to shifting to park position P. i When you remove your foot from the accel- speedometer segments from the se- erator, the vehicle will remain stationary for ap- lected speed to the vehicle maximum On uphill grades with a gradient angle of prox. 1 second. speed are illuminated. more than 5°, the hill start assist system The hill start assist system is inactive maintains the pressure in the brake sys- i The last stored set speed is deleted when ț when starting off on a level road or tem for approximately 1 second after you the engine is turned off. downhill grades have released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can start off smoothly without the ț vehicles with automatic transmission* vehicle moving immediately after releasing with the gear selector lever in the brake pedal. position N ̈ Depress the brake pedal ț with the parking brake depressed ̈ Manual transmission: Engage for- ț if the ESP® has switched off due to a ward or reverse gear. malfunction

Information Provided by:Provided Information 246 Controls in detail Air vents ̄ Air vents

Item Item Item 5 Left center air vent, adjustable 9 Thumbwheel for air volume control 1 Left side air vent, adjustable 6 Right center air vent, adjustable for right side air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control 2 a Right side air vent, adjustable for left side air vent 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control b Climate control panel 3 Left side defroster vent, fixed for right center air vent 4 Thumbwheel for air volume control 8 Right side defroster vent, fixed for left center air vent

Information Provided by:Provided Information 247 Controls in detail Air vents

Please comply with the following instruc- Opening and closing air vents Warning! G tions in order for the automatic climate control to function optimally: i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders When operating the automatic climate con- for the center air vents and side air vents to the ț trol, the air that enters the passenger com- Keep the air intake grille in front of the middle position. partment through the air vents can be very windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, hot or very cold (depending on the set tem- and any other debris. Center air vents perature). This may cause burns or frostbite ț Always keep all air vents and grilles in ̈ Opening/closing: to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the passenger compartment free from Turn thumbwheels 4 and 7 upward the air vents. obstruction. or downward. Always keep sufficient distance between un- ̈ Adjusting air distribution: Push the protected parts of the body and the air slide for the left center air vent 5 or vents. If necessary, use the air distribution right center air vent 6 to the left, adjustment (୴ page 248) to direct the air to right, up, or down. air vents in the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin. The air flow is directed in the corresponding direction.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 248 Controls in detail Air vents

Side air vents Rear center console air vents ̈ Opening/closing: Turn ̈ Opening/closing: thumbwheel 1 upward or downward. Turn thumbwheels 2 and/or 9 up- ̈ Adjusting air distribution: Push the ward or downward. slide for the left center air vent 3 or right center vent to the left, right, ̈ Adjusting air distribution: Push the 2 up, or down. slide for the left side air vent 1 or right side air vent a to the left, right, up, or The air flow is directed in the corre- down. sponding direction. The air flow is directed in the corresponding direction. 1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for rear passenger compartment air vents. 2 Right center air vent, adjustable 3 Left center air vent, adjustable

Information Provided by:Provided Information 249 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control

Dual-zone automatic climate control panel Item Item Item 1 Temperature control, driver’s side 4 2 AC cooling on/off a · Decreasing air volume 2 ´ Automatic climate control 5 y Front defroster b Display on/off 6 Temperature control, passenger side c Z Air distribution 3 MAX COOL on/off (USA only) 7 , Air recirculation d U Air distribution and air vol- z Adopting driver’s side set- 8 ¯ Rear window defroster ume (automatic mode) tings for all zones (Canada only) 9 Q Increasing air volume

Information Provided by:Provided Information 250 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control

The dual-zone automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is run- Warning! G Warning! G ning. You can operate the dual-zone automatic climate control system in either the When operating the climate control, the air Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) automatic or manual mode. The system that enters the passenger compartment may require replacement of the filter before cools or heats the interior depending on through the air vents can be very hot or very its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will the selected interior temperature and the cold (depending on the set temperature). reduce the air volume to the interior and the current outside temperature. This may cause burns or frostbite on unpro- windows could fog up, impairing visibility tected skin in the immediate area of the air and endangering you and others. Have a It can only function optimally when you are vents. Always keep sufficient distance be- clogged filter replaced as soon as possible driving with the windows and the tilt/slid- tween unprotected parts of the body and the at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ing sunroof/panorama sunroof* closed. air vents. If necessary, use the air distribution control (୴ page 248) to direct the air to The air conditioning will not engage (no air vents in the vehicle interior that are not cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated in the immediate area of unprotected skin. (୴ page 258).

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and Warning! G odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through Follow the recommended settings for heat- the air distribution system. ing and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 251 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control i Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind- Deactivating the climate control ̈ Press button ´ (୴ page 250) again. system shield free of snow and debris. The indicator lamp in the button goes Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the out.The previous settings are once air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear again in effect. window. Warning! G or, i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the in- When the climate control is switched off, the terior before driving off, see “Summer opening ̈ Press button U (୴ page 250) while outside air supply and circulation are also feature” (୴ page 123). The climate control will the engine is running. then adjust the interior temperature to the set switched off. Only choose this setting for a The indicator lamp in the button comes value much faster. short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering on. The air volume and air distribution you and others. are adjusted automatically.

̈ Deactivating: Press button ´ (୴ page 250). The indicator lamp in the button comes on. ̈ Reactivating: Make sure the ignition is switched on.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 252 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control

Operating the climate control system ̈ Deactivating: Press button U Setting the temperature in automatic mode (୴ page 250) again. Use temperature controls 1 and 6 The indicator lamp in the button goes (୴ page 250) to separately adjust the air i When operating the climate control system out. The automatic operation of air vol- in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to temperature on each side of the passenger ume and air distribution switches off. adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri- compartment. You should raise or lower The symbols of air distribution and air bution. the temperature setting in small incre- volume appear in display b. In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). switched on. This function can be switched off if ̈ Adjust air distribution (୴ page 254). The climate control will adjust to the set necessary (୴ page 258). ̈ Adjust air volume (୴ page 254). temperature as fast as possible. ̈ Activating: Press button U ̈ Increasing: Turn temperature (୴ page 250) while the engine is run- control 1 and/or 6 (୴ page 250) ning. slightly clockwise. The indicator lamp in the button comes The climate control system will corre- on. The air volume and air distribution spondingly adjust the interior air tem- are adjusted automatically. perature. ̈ Use temperature controls 1 and 6 ̈ Decreasing: Turn temperature (୴ page 250) to separately adjust the control 1 and/or 6 (୴ page 250) air temperature on each side of the slightly counterclockwise. passenger compartment. The climate control system will corre- The temperature of the vehicle interior spondingly adjust the interior air tem- is adjusted automatically. perature.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 253 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control

Adjusting air distribution ̈ Press button Z (୴ page 250) re- Using driver-side settings for all tem- peatedly until you have select the de- perature zones (Canada only) Use button Z (୴ page 250) to adjust sired setting and the corresponding the air distribution manually. The following symbol is shown in display b. You can use the settings of the driver’s symbols are shown in display b: side, such as temperature, air volume and The indicator lamp in button U goes air distribution, for all temperature zones. Symbol Function out. The automatic air distribution is switched off. The air distribution is ̈ Activating: Press button z { Directs air to the windshield controlled according to the selected (୴ page 250). and the side defroster vents control setting. The indicator lamp in the button comes a Directs air through the center, on. side and rear passenger Adjusting air volume compartment air vents The driver-side settings are used for all Seven blower speeds are available. temperature zones. Y Directs air to the footwells ̈ Press button · to decrease ̈ Deactivating: Press button z or Q (୴ page 250) to increase air (୴ page 250) again. i You can also select a position between two symbols with button Z. volume to the desired level. The indicator lamp in the button goes The indicator lamp in button U out. (୴ page 250) goes out. The air volume is adjusted corresponding to the set blower speed. The automatic air distribution remains switched on.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 254 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control

Front defroster i You can adjust the temperature and the air Windshield fogged on the outside volume when the front defroster is switched on. You can use this setting to defrost the i Keep this setting selected only until the ̈ Deactivating: Press button windshield is clear again. windshield, for example if it is iced up. y (୴ page 250) again. You can also defog the windshield and the ̈ Switch the windshield wipers on side windows. The indicator lamp in the button goes (୴ page 117). out. Defrosting is turned off. i Keep this setting selected only until the If the automatic mode of the climate con- windshield or the side windows are clear again. The previous settings are once again in trol is switched off: effect. ̈ Activating: Press button y ̈ Press button Z (୴ page 250) re- (୴ page 250). i To switch defrosting off, you can also press peatedly until one of the following sym- button ´, U, ·, Q or temperature bols appears in display b: a The indicator lamp in the button comes controls 1 and 6 (୴ page 250). or Y (୴ page 250). on. The air conditioning switches i The cooling remains switched on. automatically to the following functions: ț cooling on to dehumidify ț most efficient blower speed and heating power, depending on outside temperature ț air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows ț the air recirculation mode is switched off Information Provided by:Provided Information 255 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control

Maximum cooling MAX COOL ̈ Deactivating: Press button 3 Rear window defroster (USA only) (୴ page 250) again. The indicator lamp in the button goes You can use this setting to provide the fast- Warning! G out. The previous settings are once est possible cooling of the vehicle interior again in effect. (when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof or Any accumulation of snow and ice should be tilt/sliding panel* are closed). i To switch the maximum cooling function off, removed from the rear window before driv- you can also press button ´, U or y ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, ̈ Activating: Press button 3 (୴ page 250). endangering you and others. (୴ page 250). The indicator lamp in the button comes ̈ Activating: Switch on the ignition. on. ̈ Press button ¯ (୴ page 250). The air conditioning switches automatically to the following functions: The indicator lamp in the button comes on. ț maximum cooling The rear window defroster uses a large ț maximum blowing power ! amount of power. To keep battery drain to a min- ț the air recirculation mode is switched imum, switch off the defroster as soon as the on rear window is clear.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 256 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control

̈ Deactivating: Press button ¯ Air recirculation mode ̈ Activating: Press button , (୴ page 250). (୴ page 250). Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent The indicator lamp in the button goes The indicator lamp in the button comes unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle out. on. from the outside (e.g. before driving i The rear window defroster is automatically through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- deactivated after some time of operation de- intake of outside air and recirculates the matically at high outside temperatures. pending on the outside temperature. air in the passenger compartment. The indicator lamp in button , is not lit when If the rear window defroster switches off too the air recirculation mode is automatically i switched on. soon and the indicator lamp goes out, this indi- Warning! G cates that too many electrical consumers are op- A quantity of outside air is added after approxi- erating simultaneously and the load on the Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger- mately 30 minutes. battery is reducing available voltage. The system ing you and others. If the windows begin to ̈ responds automatically by deactivating the rear Deactivating: Press button , window defroster. fog on the inside, switching off the air (୴ page 250) again. recirculation mode immediately should clear The indicator lamp in the button goes interior window fogging. If interior window out. fogging persists, make sure the air conditioning (୴ page 258) is activated, or i The air recirculation mode is deactivated au- press button y. tomatically: ț after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C) ț after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is turned off ț after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41°F (5°C)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 257 Controls in detail Dual-zone automatic climate control

Air conditioning It is possible to deactivate the air condi- ̈ Activating: Press button 2 tioning (cooling) function of the climate (୴ page 250) again. The cooling function, only operational control system. The air in the vehicle will The indicator lamp in the button comes when the engine is running, cools the vehi- then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. on. cle interior down to the selected tempera- ̈ Deactivating: Press button 2 ture. The cooling function also The air conditioning uses the (୴ page 250). dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free thus preventing the windows from fogging The indicator lamp in the button goes of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone up. out. layer. The cooling function switches off after ! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on Warning! G a short delay. again, this indicates that the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it- Moist air can fog up the windows. You can self off. If you turn off the cooling function, the dehumidify the air with the air condition- Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest vehicle will not be cooled when weather ing. conditions are warm and the interior air is authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. not dried. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others. i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 258 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only) ̄ 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

3-zone automatic climate control panel, front Item Item Item 1 Temperature control, driver’s side 5 2 AC cooling on/off a Z Air distribution, passenger 2 U Air distribution and air vol- 6 T Residual engine side ume (automatic mode) heat/ventilation b Q Increasing air volume 3 ´ Automatic climate control 7 y Front defroster c · Decreasing air volume on/off 8 Temperature control, passenger side d Display 4 z Adopting driver’s side set- 9 ¯ Rear window defroster e Z Air distribution, driver’s side tings for all zones f , Air recirculation Information Provided by:Provided Information 259 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

The 3-zone automatic climate control is The air conditioning will not engage (no distribution control (୴ page 248) to direct operational whenever the engine is run- cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated the air to air vents in the vehicle interior that ning. You can operate the 3-zone automat- (୴ page 267). are not in the immediate area of unprotect- ic climate control system in either the ed skin. automatic or manual mode. The system Warning! G cools or heats the interior depending on It is possible to completely deactivate the the selected interior temperature and the Follow the recommended settings for heat- current outside temperature. 3-zone automatic climate control system (୴ page 261). ing and cooling given on the following pag- It can only function optimally when you are es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and driving with the windows and the tilt/slid- impairing visibility and endangering you and odors are filtered out before outside air en- ing sunroof/panorama sunroof* closed. others. ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system. Warning! G i Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris. Warning! G When operating the climate control, the air Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the that enters the passenger compartment air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) through the air vents can be very hot or very window. may require replacement of the filter before cold (depending on the set temperature). its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the in- This may cause burns or frostbite on unpro- reduce the air volume to the interior and the terior before driving off, see “Summer opening tected skin in the immediate area of the air feature” (୴ page 123). The climate control will windows could fog up, impairing visibility vents. Always keep sufficient distance be- then adjust the interior temperature to the set and endangering you and others. Have a tween unprotected parts of the body and the value much faster. clogged filter replaced as soon as possible air vents. If necessary, use the air at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 260 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

Deactivating climate control system ̈ Reactivating: Make sure the ignition is Operating climate control system in switched on. automatic mode ̈ Press button ´ (୴ page 259) again. Warning! G i When operating the climate control system The indicator lamp in the button goes in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to When the climate control is switched off, the out.The previous settings are once adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri- outside air supply and circulation are also again in effect. bution. switched off. Only choose this setting for a or, In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is short time. Otherwise the windows could switched on. This function can be switched off if fog up, impairing visibility and endangering ̈ Press button U (୴ page 259) while necessary. the engine is running. you and others. ̈ Activating: Press button U The indicator lamp in the button comes (୴ page 259) while the engine is run- ̈ Deactivating: Press button ´ on. The air volume and air distribution ning. ୴ ( page 259). are adjusted automatically. The indicator lamp in the button comes The indicator lamp in the button comes on. The air volume and air distribution on. are adjusted automatically. ̈ Use temperature controls 1 and 8 (୴ page 259) to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. The temperature of the vehicle interior is adjusted automatically.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 261 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

̈ Deactivating: Press button U Setting the temperature ̈ Decreasing: Turn temperature (୴ page 259) again. control 1 and/or 8 (୴ page 259) Use temperature controls 1 and/or 8 The indicator lamp in the button goes slightly counterclockwise. (୴ page 259) to separately adjust the air out. The automatic operation of air vol- The climate control system will corre- temperature on each side of the passenger ume and air distribution switches off. spondingly adjust the interior air tem- compartment. You should raise or lower The symbols of air distribution and air perature. the temperature setting in small incre- volume appear in display d. ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). i If you turn the temperature control fully ̈ Adjust air distribution (୴ page 263). The climate control will adjust to the set counterclockwise for one side of the vehicle, you are decreasing the temperature for the other ̈ ୴ temperature as fast as possible. Adjust air volume ( page 263). side of the vehicle as well. ̈ Increasing: Turn temperature control 1 and/or 8 (୴ page 259) slightly clockwise. The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature. i You can also adjust the temperature in the rear passenger compartment (୴ page 268). i If you turn the temperature control fully clockwise for one side of the vehicle, you are increasing the temperature for the other side of the vehicle as well.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 262 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

Adjusting air distribution The indicator lamp in button U goes Using driver-side settings for all tem- out. The automatic air distribution is perature zones Use right a and/or left e button Z switched off. The air distribution is (୴ page 259) to adjust the air distribution controlled according to the selected You can use the settings of the driver’s manually for each side of the passenger control setting. side, such as temperature, air volume and compartment. The following symbols are air distribution, for all temperature zones. shown in display : d Adjusting air volume ̈ Press button z (୴ page 259). Symbol Function Use button U (୴ page 259) for auto- The indicator lamp in the button comes ୴ on. { Directs air to the windshield matic mode or button · ( page 259) and the side defroster vents or Q (୴ page 259) to adjust air volume The driver-side settings are used for all manually. a Directs air through the center, temperature zones. side and rear passenger Seven blower speeds are available for each compartment air vents side of the passenger compartment. Y Directs air to the footwells ̈ Press button · to decrease, or button Q to increase air volume to the desired level. i You can also select a position between two symbols with button Z. The indicator lamp in button U ̈ Press buttons Z (୴ page 259) re- (୴ page 259) goes out. peatedly until you have select the de- The air volume is adjusted correspond- sired setting and the corresponding ing to the set blower speed. The auto- symbol is shown in display d. matic air distribution remains switched on.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 263 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

Front defroster i You can adjust the air distribution when the Windshield fogged on the outside front defroster is switched on. You can use this setting to defrost the i Keep this setting selected only until the ̈ Deactivating: Press button windshield is clear again. windshield, for example if it is iced up. You y (୴ page 259) again. can also defog the windshield and the side ̈ Switch the windshield wipers on windows. The indicator lamp in the button goes (୴ page 118). out. Defrosting is turned off. i Keep this setting selected only until the If the automatic mode of the climate con- windshield is clear again. The previous settings are once again in trol is switched off: effect. ̈ Activating: Press button y ̈ Press right a and/or left e air distri- (୴ page 259). i To switch defrosting off, you can also press bution button Z (୴ page 259) re- button , , , or temperature peatedly until one of the following The indicator lamp in the button comes ´ U · Q controls 1 and 8 (୴ page 259). symbols appears in on. display d: a or Y The cooling remains switched on. The air conditioning switches i (୴ page 259). automatically to the following functions: ț cooling on to dehumidify ț most efficient blower speed and heating power, depending on outside temperature ț air flows onto the windshield and the front side windows ț the air recirculation mode is switched off

Information Provided by:Provided Information 264 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

Rear window defroster Air recirculation mode Warning! G ̈ Activating: Switch on the ignition. Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent Any accumulation of snow and ice should be unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle ̈ Press button ¯ (୴ page 259). removed from the rear window before driv- from the outside (e.g. before driving The indicator lamp in the button comes ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the on. endangering you and others. intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment. ! The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep battery drain to a min- i If the rear window defroster switches off too imum, switch off the defroster as soon as the soon and the indicator lamp goes out, this indi- Warning! G rear window is clear. cates that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and the load on the ̈ Deactivating: Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger- Press button ¯ battery is reducing available voltage. The system ୴ ( page 259). responds automatically by deactivating the rear ing you and others. If the windows begin to fog on the inside, switching off the air The indicator lamp in the button goes window defroster. recirculation mode immediately should clear out. interior window fogging. If interior window i The rear window defroster is automatically fogging persists, make sure the air deactivated after some time of operation de- conditioning (୴ page 267) is activated, or pending on the outside temperature. press button y.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 265 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

̈ Activating: Press button , Residual engine heat and ventilation ̈ Deactivating: Press button T (୴ page 259). (୴ page 259) again. With the engine switched off, it is possible The indicator lamp in the button comes The indicator lamp in the button goes to continue to heat or ventilate the interior on. out. for approximately 30 minutes. This feature i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- makes use of the residual heat produced i The residual heat is automatically turned off: matically at high outside temperatures. by the engine. ț when the ignition is switched on The indicator lamp on button is not lit when , If you switch on the residual heat function ț after approximately 30 minutes the air recirculation mode is automatically i when outside temperatures are high, only the switched on. ț if the battery voltage drops ventilation will be switched on. A quantity of outside air is added after approxi- ț if the coolant temperature is too low mately 30 minutes. i Regardless of the selected air volume, the blower operates at low speed when heating. In ̈ Deactivating: Press button , case of ventilation the blower operates at higher (୴ page 259) again. speed. The indicator lamp in the button goes i How long the system will provide heating de- out. pends on i The air recirculation mode is deactivated au- ț the coolant temperature tomatically: ț the temperature set by the operator ț after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is ̈ Activating: Switch off the ignition. below approximately 7°C (45°F) ̈ ୴ ț after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is Press button T ( page 259). turned off The indicator lamp in the button comes ț after 30 minutes if the outside temperature on. is above approximately 5°C (41°F)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 266 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

Air conditioning It is possible to deactivate the air condi- ̈ Activating: Press button 2 tioning (cooling) function of the climate (୴ page 250) again. The cooling function, is only operational control system. The air in the vehicle will The indicator lamp in the button comes when the engine is running, cools the vehi- then no longer be cooled or dehumidified. on. cle interior down to the selected tempera- ̈ Deactivating: Press button 2 ture. The cooling function also The air conditioning uses the (୴ page 250). dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior, refrigerant R134a. This refrigerant is free thus preventing the windows from fogging The indicator lamp in the button goes of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone up. out. layer. i Condensation may drip out from underneath The cooling function switches off after ! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication a short delay. again, this indicates that the air conditioning is of a malfunction. losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it- Moist air can fog up the windows. You can self off. dehumidify the air with the air condition- Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest Warning! G ing. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 267 Controls in detail 3-zone automatic climate control* (Canada only)

̈ Rear climate control Item Increasing/decreasing: Press the respective temperature control 1 Decreasing/increasing air volume button 5. Warning! G for rear center air vents The 3-zone automatic climate control Right rear center air vent, adjustable 2 system will correspondingly adjust the Follow the recommended settings for heat- 3 Decreasing/increasing air volume temperature in the rear passenger ing and cooling as given in the instructions for rear center air vents compartment. for the front 3-zone automatic climate control (୴ page 259). Otherwise the windows 4 Display i If you have switched off the cooling function could fog up, impairing visibility for the driv- 5 Temperature control with the front 3-zone automatic climate control er and endangering you and others. panel, the cooling of the rear passenger com- 6 Left rear center air vent, adjustable partment is also switched off. Adjusting with the rear control panel is not possible. The rear climate control panel is located in i At low outside temperatures or if you have the rear center console. switched off the cooling function, you cannot Adjusting air volume cool the rear passenger compartment. Use button · or Q (୴ page 268) to adjust the air volume. Setting temperature ̈ Press button · to decrease, or Use temperature control 5 to adjust the button Q to increase air volume to air temperature in the rear passenger com- the desired level. partment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, The air volume is adjusted correspond- preferably starting at 22°C (72°F). The cli- ing to the set blower speed. mate control will adjust to the set temperature as fast as possible.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 268 Controls in detail Trunk ̄ Trunk Opening trunk from outside Opening trunk from inside Warning! G

Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine is running and while driving. Among other dangers, such as blocked visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior. These fumes are damaging to your health.

Opening trunk

You can open the trunk if the vehicle is sta- 1 Trunk lid handle 1 Remote trunk opening switch tionary. ̈ Press and hold button Š on the ̈ Press switch 1 until the trunk begins A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft SmartKey or SmartKey with to open. (1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid. KEYLESS-GO* until trunk unlocks and begins to open. ! The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient over- or head clearance. ̈ Pull on handle 1. i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked separately (୴ page 272). In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The vehicle must be unlocked.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 269 Controls in detail Trunk

Closing trunk Closing trunk from outside manually Warning! G i Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk. You may lock yourself out. To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk i If the vehicle was previously centrally lid opening when closing the trunk. Be espe- locked, the trunk will lock automatically after cially careful when small children are closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times and an acoustic signal sounds three times to around. confirm locking. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only): To SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the trunk (Canada only) from the starter switch, take will open automatically if a SmartKey with 1 Handles it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) is recognized leave children unattended in the vehicle, or inside the vehicle or in the trunk. ̈ Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s handles 1 or 2. The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals unsupervised access to a vehicle could re- flash three times and an acoustic signal sounds ̈ Close the trunk with hands placed flat sult in an accident and/or serious personal three times. If you are carrying a second on the trunk lid. injury. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) with you, you can still lock the vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 270 Controls in detail Trunk

Trunk emergency release ̈ Briefly press emergency release Illumination of the emergency release but- button 1. ton: With the emergency release button, the The trunk opens. ț The button will flash for 30 minutes af- trunk can be opened from inside the trunk. ter opening the trunk. i The emergency release button unlocks and opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still ț The button will flash for 60 minutes af- or in motion. ter closing the trunk. i The emergency release button does not open the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.

1 Emergency release button

Information Provided by:Provided Information 271 Controls in detail Trunk

Valet locking ̈ Close the trunk (୴ page 270). i You can only cancel the separate trunk lock- ̈ Remove the mechanical key from the ing mode by means of the mechanical key. i To deny any unauthorized person access to SmartKey (୴ page 424). ̈ Insert the mechanical key in the trunk the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle, lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave ̈ Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid lock. only the SmartKey or SmartKey with lid lock. ̈ Turn the mechanical key counterclock- KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) less its mechanical wise to neutral position 1 to unlock the key with the vehicle. ̈ Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 2 to lock the trunk. trunk. ̈ Remove the mechanical key from the You can now open the trunk ୴ trunk lid lock. ( page 269). The trunk remains locked even when the vehicle is centrally unlocked.

1 Neutral position 2 Locked

Information Provided by:Provided Information 272 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof ̄ Power tilt/sliding sunroof Opening and closing power tilt/sliding When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof with When leaving the vehicle, always remove the sunroof the obstruction sensor function deactivated, SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* make sure no one can become trapped, as from the starter switch, take it with you, and this could result in serious or fatal injuries. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- Warning! G The opening/closing procedure of the tended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac- When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt- cess to a vehicle could result in an accident sure there is no danger of anyone being ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch and/or serious personal injury. harmed by the closing procedure. was moved past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direc- If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked while tion. To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans- closing and reopens, it can be closed with ! port any objects with sharp edges which can greater force if you pull the switch to the re- The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass. stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof. sistance point in the direction indicated by In the event of an accident, the glass may Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is arrow within 2 seconds. shatter. This may result in an opening in the 3 snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in roof. If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again malfunctions. and reopens, you can close it with deactivat- In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing Please keep in mind that weather conditions ed obstruction sensor function by pulling their seat belts or not wearing them properly ! can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to the switch again to the resistance point in may be thrown out of the opening. Such an close the tilt/sliding sunroof when leaving the the direction indicated by arrow 3 within 2 opening also presents a potential for injury vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehi- seconds. for occupants wearing their seat belts cle electronics could be damaged which is not properly as entire body parts or portions of covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited them may protrude from the passenger Warranty. compartment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 273 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, resonance noises may result in addition to the usual wind noises. They are caused by minimal pressure changes in the passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate these noises, change the position of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly. i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (୴ page 123) and “Convenience closing feature” (୴ page 124). 1 Push up to raise sunroof at rear Screen i With the SmartKey in starter switch 2 Push back to slide sunroof open ̈ Switch on the ignition. position 0 or removed from the starter switch, 3 Pull down to close the sunroof the tilt/sliding sunroof can be operated ̈ To open, close, raise or lower, move the With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a switch to resistance point in the re- ț until you open the driver’s or passenger door screen can be slid into the roof opening to quired direction 1 to 3 until the ț for up to approximately 5 minutes help provide shade. When sliding the sun- tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the de- roof open, the screen will also retract. sired position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 274 Controls in detail Power tilt/sliding sunroof

̈ Express-operation: To open, close, Synchronizing ! Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof com- raise or lower, move the switch past pletely if it is not aligned. Otherwise you could the resistance point in the required The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchro- damage the tilt/sliding sunroof. nized direction 1 to 3 and release. ̈ Switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). ț after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes ̈ Press and hold the sunroof switch in closed manually completely. the direction of arrow 1 until the ̈ Stopping during Express-opening/ ț if the tilt/sliding sunroof can only be tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the closing: Move the switch in any direc- opened with a jerking motion rear. tion. ț after a malfunction ̈ Keep holding the sunroof switch in the i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is direction of arrow 1 for approximately blocked during the closing procedure, the sun- 1 second. roof will stop and reopen slightly. ̈ Check the Express-operation feature (୴ page 275). If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, the sunroof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above steps.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 275 Controls in detail Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*

Roller sunblinds Operating roller sunblinds ̈ Express-extending: Move the roof panel switch past the resistance point The roller sunblinds are designed to pro- in direction of arrow 1 or 2 and re- tect you from excessive sunlight streaming lease. in through the panorama roof with power The roller sunblinds extends tilt/sliding panel. completely. The front roller sunblind only operates with ̈ Stopping during Express-extending: the tilt/sliding panel closed. The front and Move the roof panel switch in any di- rear roller sunblind cannot be operated in- rection. dividually.

Roof panel switch Warning! G 1 Extend front roller sunblinds When extending/retracting the roller sun- 2 Extend front roller sunblinds blinds, make sure no one is in danger of be- 3 Retract front roller sunblinds ing injured by the closing procedure. The ̈ Extending or retracting: Move the extending/retracting of the roller sunblinds roof panel switch to the resistance can be immediately halted by releasing the point in the required direction of switch or, if the switch was pressed past the arrow 1, 2 or 3 until the roller sun- resistance point and released, by pressing blinds have reached their desired posi- the switch in any direction. tion.

̈ Switch on the ignition.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 276 Controls in detail Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*

Opening and closing panorama roof Such an opening also presents a potential ! Please keep in mind that weather conditions with power tilt/sliding panel can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to for injury for occupants wearing their seat close the tilt/sliding panel when leaving the ve- belts properly as entire body parts or por- hicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehicle tions of them may protrude from the pas- Warning! G electronics could be damaged which is not cov- senger compartment. ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. When opening or closing the tilt/sliding pan- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i When the panorama roof with power el, make sure there is no danger of anyone SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* tilt/sliding panel is open, resonance noises may being harmed by the opening or closing pro- from the starter switch, take it with you, and result in addition to the usual wind noises. They cedure. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children are caused by minimal pressure changes in the unattended in the vehicle, or with access to passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate The opening procedure of the tilt/sliding an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised these noises, change the position of the panora- panel can be immediately halted by releas- ma roof with power tilt/sliding panel or open a access to a vehicle could result in an acci- ing the switch or, if the switch was moved side window slightly. dent and/or serious personal injury. past the resistance point and released, by moving the switch in any direction. i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding panel using the SmartKey, see “Summer open- To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans- The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding ! ing feature” (୴ page 123) and “Convenience port any objects with sharp edges which can closing feature” (୴ page 124). panel can be immediately halted by releas- stick out of the tilt/sliding panel. ing the switch. Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is snow The tilt/sliding panel only operates with The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding or ice on the roof, as this could result in malfunc- the roller sunblinds extended. ୴୴ panel is made out of glass. In the event of an tions. accident, the glass may shatter. This may result in an opening in the roof. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening. Information Provided by:Provided Information 277 Controls in detail Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*

୴୴ i If the front roller sunblind is retracted while Synchronizing being raised, it will extend first. The tilt/sliding panel and front roller sun- ̈ Express-opening: Move the roof panel blinds must be synchronized switch past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1 and release. ț after the tilt/sliding panel has been closed manually The tilt/sliding panel opens completely. ț after a malfunction ̈ Express-raising: Move the roof panel ț if the panorama roof with power switch past the resistance point in di- tilt/sliding panel can only be opened Roof panel switch rection of arrow 3 and release. with a jerking motion 1 Push up to raise at the rear The tilt/sliding panel raises 2 Push back to open completely. 3 Pull down to close ̈ Stopping during Express-operation: ̈ Switch on the ignition. Move the roof panel switch in any di- ̈ To open, close, raise, or lower the rection. tilt/sliding panel, move the roof panel i You cannot automatically close and lower switch to resistance point in the re- the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. quired direction of arrows 1 to 3. Release the roof panel switch when the tilt/sliding panel has reached the desired position.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 278 Controls in detail Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*

Tilt/sliding panel and roller sunblind ̈ Move and hold the roof panel switch in ̈ Keep holding the roof panel switch in ̈ Switch on the ignition. direction of arrow 2 until the roller direction of arrow 3 for approximately sunblinds are fully extended. 1 second. ̈ Move and hold the roof panel switch in ̈ Check the Express-open feature of the direction of arrow 2 until the tilt/slid- tilt/sliding panel (୴ page 278). ing panel is opened approximately If the tilt/sliding panel opens com- 4 inch (10 cm). pletely, the roof is synchronized. Other- ̈ Move and hold the roof panel switch in wise repeat the above steps. direction of arrow 3 until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.

1 Push up to raise at the rear 2 Push back to open 3 Pull down to close ̈ Move and hold the roof panel switch in direction of arrow 3 until the roller sunblinds are fully retracted. ̈ Keep holding the roof panel switch in direction of arrow 3 for approximately 1 second.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 279 Controls in detail Loading and storing

Roof rack* ! Load the roof rack in such a way that the ve- ̈ Flip the covers 1 upward in direction hicle cannot be damaged while driving. of arrow. Make sure Vehicles with panorama roof with Warning! G ț you can fully raise tilt/sliding sunroof or the tilt/sliding panel*: Open the cover 1 panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel* carefully in the opposite direction to Only use roof racks approved by ț that indicated by the arrow. Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to you can fully open the trunk avoid damage to the vehicle. ̈ Only attach the roof-rack system to the Follow the manufacturer’s installation anchorage points under the covers. instructions. Otherwise, an improperly Observe manufacturer’s instructions attached roof rack system or its load could for installation. become detached from the vehicle. Do not exceed the maximum roof load of 220 lb (100 kg). Take into consideration that when the roof rack is loaded, the handling characteristics are different from those when operating the 1 Covers vehicles without the roof rack loaded.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 280 Controls in detail Loading and storing

Split rear bench seat* Folding the backrest forward The release handles 1 is located in the To expand the cargo area, you can fold trunk. down the left and right rear seat backrests. The two sections can be folded down separately.

Warning! G

When expanding the luggage compartment, 2 Rear seat backrests always fold the seat cushions fully forward. ̈ Fold rear seat backrests 2 forward. Unless you are transporting cargo, the backrests must remain properly locked in the up- 1 Release handle right position. ̈ In an accident, during hard braking or sud- Open the trunk. den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown ̈ Pull on left and/or right release around inside the vehicle, and cause injury handle 1. to vehicle occupants unless the items are ̈ Fully retract the head restraints securely fastened in the vehicle. (୴ page 89). ̈ If necessary, pull the driver's and/or front-passenger seat forward.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 281 Controls in detail Loading and storing

Setting up rear seat backrest Loading instructions Warning! G

Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied, or the extended trunk compartment is not in use. Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest. In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury 1 Rear seat backrests to vehicle occupants unless the items are The total load weight including vehicle securely fastened in the vehicle. ̈ Fold backrest 1 rearward until it en- occupants and luggage/cargo should not gages. To help avoid personal injury during a colli- exceed the load limit or vehicle capacity sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care weight as indicated on the corresponding ̈ Check for secure locking by pushing when transporting cargo. placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar and pulling on the backrest. (୴ page 334). Take care not to clamp the seat belt. ! i To prevent unauthorized persons from ac- The handling characteristics of a fully load- cess to the trunk, always lock backrest in its up- ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis- right position. tribution. It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 282 Controls in detail Loading and storing

Always place items being carried against Storage compartments To help avoid personal injury during a colli- front or rear seat backrests, and fasten sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care them as securely as possible. when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car- Warning! G The heaviest portion of the cargo should al- go in the trunk if possible. ways be kept as low as possible since it in- Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the To help avoid personal injury during a colli- fluences the handling characteristics of seat backs. Do not place anything on the sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care the vehicle. rear-window shelf. when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug- Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not Warning! G carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve- pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness backs. Always fasten items being carried as secure- and death. Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob- ly as possible using cargo tie-down hooks jects. and fastening materials appropriate for the weight and size of the load. i The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob- Keep compartment lids closed. This will help jects. to prevent stored objects from being thrown In an accident, during hard braking or sud- The enlarged cargo area should only be used for about and injuring vehicle occupants during den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown items which do not fit in the trunk alone. ț around inside the vehicle and can cause in- braking jury to vehicle occupants unless the items ț vehicle maneuvers or are securely fastened in the vehicle. ț an accident.

i An overview of the storage compartments can be found on (୴ page 22).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 283 Controls in detail Loading and storing

Storage compartments in the front pas- Storage compartments in the front senger compartment armrest

Glove box

1 Unlocking glove box 2 Locking glove box 1 Right button for storage compartments 2 Left button for large storage compart- 1 Glove box lid release ̈ Locking: Insert the mechanical key ments into the glove box lock and turn it The glove box can be unlocked and locked clockwise to position 2. with the mechanical key (୴ page 424). ̈ Unlocking: Insert the mechanical key ̈ Opening: Pull glove box lid release 1. into the glove box lock and turn it coun- ̈ Closing: Push the lid up until it terclockwise to position 1. engaged.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 284 Controls in detail Loading and storing

̈ Opening small and large storage Parcel net in front passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located compartment: Press button 1 or 2 in the front passenger footwell. It is for the armrests opens automatically to small and light items, such as road maps, Warning! G the left and right side. mail, etc. i There is a small and a large storage compart- The parcel net is intended for storing ment located underneath the left armrest. The light-weight items only. small storage compartment can be removed for Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or the purpose of emptying. fragile objects may not be transported in the ̈ Closing small or large storage com- parcel net. In an accident, during hard brak- partment: Swing the left or right arming, or sudden maneuvers, they could be in- rest backward until it engage. jury to vehicle occupants. The parcel net cannot protect transported goods in the event of an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 285 Controls in detail Loading and storing

Storage compartments in rear passen- Storage pockets ger compartment Warning! G

Armrest with integrated storage The storage pocket is intended for storing compartment light-weight items only. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or ! Before storing the armrest in the backrest, close the storage compartment cover. fragile objects may not be transported in the storage pocket. In an accident, during hard ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could against the armrest when it is folded down, as be thrown around inside the vehicle and you could otherwise damage it. cause injury to vehicle occupants. Storage pockets are located on the 1 The storage pocket cannot protect trans- back of the front seats. ported goods in the event of an accident.

1 Release catch ̈ Opening: Pull down the armrest. ̈ Pull release catch 1 and swing the cover upward in direction of arrow. Information Provided by:Provided Information 286 Controls in detail Loading and storing

Cup holders Cup holder in rear center armrest Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be Warning! G thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi- In order to help prevent spilling liquids on or may cause an accident and/or serious vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip- personal injury. ment, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the Cup holder in front center console contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an 1 Release button accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occu- 2 Cup holder pants may cause serious personal injury. ̈ Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may Opening: Pull down the armrest. cause damage not covered by the ̈ Pull the release catch and swing the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. armrest storage compartment cover When not in use, keep the cup holders upward. closed. An open cup holder may cause injury ̈ Press release button 1. to you or others when contacted during 1 Cup holder ̈ braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an Cup holder 2 swing out and open au- accident. tomaticaly. i You can now close the armrest storage compartment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 287 Controls in detail Loading and storing

̈ Closing: Open the armrest storage Trunk Parcel net in trunk compartment. There is a parcel net on the left trunk side ̈ Swing cup holder 2 backward until it Retaining hooks walls to secure loads. engaged. Two hooks are located on the upper edge The parcel net is intended for storing of the trunk and can be used to attach car- light-weight items only. The parcel net can- go items such as bags. not protect transported goods in the event of an accident.

Use the hooks to secure light weight items only. The maximum permissible weight per hook is 9 lb (4 kg). ! Do not use the retaining hooks to tie down cargo.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 288 Controls in detail Useful features ̄ Useful features Sun visors Glare from front Vanity mirror in sun visor ̈ Swing sun visor down when you ̈ To use the illuminated vanity mirror, lift experience glare. up vanity mirror cover 5. Warning! G Vanity mirror lamp 1 comes on. Glare from front and sides Do not use the vanity mirror while driving. i If you disengage the sun visor from Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors ! Close vanity mirror cover 5 (if open) before mounting 2 with vanity mirror cover 5 open, closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected you disengage sun visor from the mounting 2 vanity mirror lamp 1 will switch off. and pivot it to the side. glare can endanger you and others. Document holder You can use the plastic tab of document holder 3 to hold admission tickets, parking passes, or similar items in place.

̈ Disengage sun visor from the mounting . 1 Vanity mirror lamp 2 2 Mounting ̈ Pivot sun visor to the side. Document holder 3 The sun visors are extendable. 4 Vanity mirror 5 Vanity mirror cover ̈ Adjust the sun visor by pushing or pull-

ing in directionby:Provided Information of arrow. 289 Controls in detail Useful features

Rear window sunshade* ̈ Stopping the raising procedure: Press switch 1 again. Warning! G The switch is located in the center console. The sunshade stops. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ̈ Lowering: Press switch 1 briefly. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) from the starter switch, take The sunshade is lowered completely. it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not ̈ Stopping the lowering procedure: leave children unattended in the vehicle, or Press switch 1 again. with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu- The sunshade stops. pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury. Warning! G 1 Rear window sunshade switch When operating the rear window sunshade, ! Make sure the movement of the rear win- make sure there is no danger of anyone be- dow sunshade is not restricted by objects on the ing harmed by the raising or lowering rear window shelf. Otherwise, the sunshade or procedure. the objects could be damaged. The raising or lowering procedure can be ̈ Switch on the ignition. immediately halted by briefly pressing the Always raise the sunshade fully for its sup- switch 1. port against the window frame. Briefly press switch 1 again to raise or low- ̈ Raising: Press switch 1 briefly. er the rear window sunshade completely. The sunshade is raised completely.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 290 Controls in detail Useful features

Ashtrays ̈ Removing the insert: Grab the insert on the grooved side and pull it up and out in the direction indicated by the Center console ashtray arrow 2. ̈ Reinstalling ashtray insert: Install Warning! G the insert by pushing it back into the frame until it engages. Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Depress the parking brake to secure ̈ Closing: Tap the front of the cover vehicle from movement. plate 1. Move gear selector lever to position P (man- 1 Cover plate The cover will retract and the ashtray ual transmission: second gear). With the au- 2 Remove insert will close. tomatic transmission* set to P (manual 3 Ashtray transmission: second gear), turn off the ̈ Opening: Press cover plate 1 forward engine. until it engaged.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 291 Controls in detail Useful features

Rear seat ashtray Cigarette lighter

Warning! G

Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the knob only. Make sure any children traveling with you do not injure themselves or start a fire with the hot cigarette lighter. 1 Cover 1 Ashtray insert When leaving the vehicle, always remove the 2 Cigarette lighter 2 Cover SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ̈ Press cover plate 1 forward until it en- Button 3 (Canada only) from the starter switch, take gaged. ̈ Opening: Pull at top of cover . it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not 2 ̈ Push in cigarette lighter 2. leave children unattended in the vehicle, or ̈ Removing ashtray insert: Push with access to an unlocked vehicle. The cigarette lighter will pop out button to disengage ashtray 3 automatically when hot. insert 1 and remove it. A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious ̈ Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push the personal injury. ashtray insert 1 down into the retainer until it engages. ̈ Switch on the ignition. ̈ Push at top of cover 2 to close ashtray.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 292 Controls in detail Useful features

̈ Tap the front of the cover plate 1. Power outlet in the glove box Power outlet in the rear passenger compartment The cover will retract and the ashtray will close. ! The lighter socket can accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of 85 W) designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter socket (for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket. With the socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the 1 Power outlet lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not ̈ Switch on the ignition. 1 Power outlet hot enough. 2 Cover ̈ Open the glove box (୴ page 284). To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter ̈ Switch on the ignition. socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC elec- ̈ Flip cover from power outlet 1 to the ̈ Pull at top of cover . trical accessories designed for use with the stan- right and insert electrical plug (ciga- 2 dard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V rette lighter type). ̈ Flip cover from power outlet 1 to the power outlet (୴ page 293) in your vehicle whenever possible. left and insert electrical plug (cigarette i The power outlet 1 can be used to lighter type). accommodate electrical consumers (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum i The power outlet 1 can be used to of 180 W. accommodate electrical consumers (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 293 Controls in detail Useful features

Floormats* Removing ̈ Pull floormat off of retainer pins 2. Warning! G ̈ Remove the floormat.

Whenever you are using floormats, make Installing sure there is enough clearance and that the ̈ Lay down the floormat in the respective floormats are securely fastened. footwell. Floormats should always be securely fas- ̈ Press the floormat eyelets 1 onto re- tened using the eyelets and the retainer tainer pins 2. pins. 1 Eyelet Before driving off, check that the floormats 2 Retainer pin are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals. Do not place several floormats on top of each other as this may impair pedal movement. i To install or remove the floormat more easily, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible (୴ page 85).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 294 Controls in detail Useful features lTele Aid* The Tele Aid system is operational provid- ̈ To activate, press the SOS button, the ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, Roadside Assistance button* b or ! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system properly connected, not damaged and the Information button* }, depend- may only be performed by completing the sub- telephone phone and GPS coverage are ing on the type of response required. scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance available. call using the Information button* }. Failure i The SOS button, the Roadside Assistance to complete either of these steps will result in a i The Tele Aid system utilizes the telephone button* b, and the Information system that is not activated. network for communication and the GPS (Global button* } are located in the overhead control panel (୴ page 31). If you have any questions regarding activation, Positioning System) satellites for vehicle loca- please call the Response Center at tion. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid system may not function and if this oc- 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). curs, assistance must be summoned by other means. a user ID and password. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” The Tele Aid system The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can (USA only), you will have access to account be adjusted when using the volume control (Telematic Alarm Identification on De- information, remote door unlock and on the multifunction steering wheel. To mand) more. raise, press button æ and to lower, The Tele Aid system consists of three press button ç or use the audio system types of response: rotary control button (୴ page 189). ț automatic and manual emergency ț Roadside Assistance, and ț information

Information Provided by:Provided Information 295 Controls in detail Useful features

System self-check Emergency calls Warning! G Initially, after switching on the ignition, An emergency call is initiated malfunctions are detected and indicated. If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in automatically following an accident in If a malfunction is detected, the indicator which the emergency tensioning devices the Roadside Assistance button* b lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside As- (ETDs) or air bags deploy. and/or in the Information button* }do sistance button* and the Information b not come on during the system self-check, An emergency call can also be initiated button* stay on longer than } or if any of these indicators remain illuminat- manually by opening the cover next to the 10 seconds or do not come on. The mes- ed continuously in red and/or the message interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then sage Tele Aid not activated or Tele Aid Tele Aid not activated or Tele Aid briefly pressing the button located under inoperative appears in the multifunction inoperative is displayed in the multifunc- the cover. For instructions on initiating an display. tion display after the system self-check, a emergency call manually (୴ page 298). malfunction in the system has been detect- Once the emergency call is in progress, the ed. indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin If a malfunction is indicated as outlined to flash. The message: above, the system may not operate as ex- ț Connecting call appears in the multi- pected. Have the system checked at the function display nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. and the audio system is muted. When the connection is established, the message: ț Call connected appears in the multifunction display

Information Provided by:Provided Information 296 Controls in detail Useful features

All information relevant to the emergency, The Tele Aid system is available if Warning! G such as the location of the vehicle (deter- ț it has been activated and is operation- mined by the GPS satellite location sys- al. Activation requires a subscription If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is tem), vehicle model, identification number for monitoring services, connection, and color are generated. flashing continuously and there was no and cellular air time voice connection to the Response Center i During the emergency call message Emer- ț the relevant cellular phone network established, then the Tele Aid system could gency Call Activated is displayed, opera- and GPS signals are available and pass not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele- tion from audio system or COMAND* is not vant telephone network is not available). possible. The automatic climate control can be the information on to the Response still adjusted using the switches on the climate Center The message Call failed appears in the control panel. ț there is sufficient voltage in the vehicle multifunction display for approximately A voice connection between the Response batteries 10 seconds. Center and the occupants of the vehicle i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos- Should this occur, assistance must be sum- will be established automatically soon af- sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from moned by other means. ter the emergency call has been initiated. the GPS satellite network and pass the informa- The Response Center will attempt to deter- tion on to the Response Center. During the emergency call the telephone is mine more precisely the nature of the acci- i switched off automatically and must be switched dent provided they can speak to an back on to make a call. occupant of the vehicle. i The “911” emergency call system is a public i If no vehicle occupant responds, an ambu- service. Using it without due cause is a criminal lance will be sent to the vehicle immediately. offense.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 297 Controls in detail Useful features

Initiating an emergency call manually ̈ Briefly press button on cover 1 to open. Warning! G

Cover 1 will open. If you feel in any way in jeopardy when in the ̈ Press SOS button 2 (for longer than vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, ve- 2 seconds). hicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 pressed the emergency button. Carefully will flash until the emergency call is leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca- concluded. tion. The Response Center will automatically ̈ Wait for a voice connection to the contact local emergency officials with the Response Center. vehicle’s approximate location if they ̈ Close cover 1 after the emergency receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot call is concluded. make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

1 Cover 2 SOS button

Information Provided by:Provided Information 298 Controls in detail Useful features

Roadside Assistance button* b When the connection is established, the ț Sign and Drive services: Services such message: as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or The Roadside Assistance button b is the replacement of a flat tire with the located in the overhead control panel. ț Call connected appears in the multifunction display vehicle spare tire are obtainable. The Tele Aid system will transmit data gen- i The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assis- erating the vehicle identification number, tance button b remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system model, color and location (subject to avail- self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth- ability of cellular and GPS signals). er with the SOS button and the Information A voice connection between the Roadside button* }). Assistance dispatcher and the occupants See system self-check (୴ page 296) if the indi- of the vehicle will be established. cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately 10 seconds. ̈ Describe the nature of the need for as- If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance 1 Roadside Assistance button b sistance. button b is flashing continuously and no ̈ Press and hold Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance voice connection to the Response Center was button b (for longer than dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified established, the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant 2 seconds). Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to telephone network is not available). The mes- A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As- tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized sage: Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such sistance dispatcher will be initiated. ț Call failed appears in the multifunction The button will flash while the call is in as labor and/or towing, charges may ap- display for approximately 10 seconds progress. The message: ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man- ual for more information. Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us- ț Connecting call appears in the ing the t button on the multifunction steer- multifunction display These programs are only available in the ing wheel or the respective button for ending a USA: telephone call on the audio system or the and the audio system is muted. COMAND* head unit. Information Provided by:Provided Information 299 Controls in detail Useful features

Information button* } When the connection is established, the i The indicator lamp on the Information message: The Information button } is located in button } remains illuminated in red for approximately 10 seconds during the system ț the overhead control panel. Call connected appears in the multi- self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth- function display er with the SOS button and the Roadside Assis- The Tele Aid system will transmit data gen- tance button* b). erating the vehicle identification number, See system self-check (୴ page 296) if the indi- model, color and location (subject to avail- cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on ability of cellular and GPS signals). longer than approximately 10 seconds. If the indicator lamp in the Information A voice connection between the Customer button } is flashing continuously and no Assistance Center representative and the voice connection to the Response Center was occupants of the vehicle will be estab- established, then the Tele Aid system could not lished. Information regarding the operation initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant telephone network is not available). The message: 1 Information button } of your vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz ț Call failed appears in the multifunction ̈ Press and hold Information button USA products and services is available to display for approximately 10 seconds (for longer than 2 seconds). } you. Information calls can be terminated using the t A call to the Customer Assistance Cen- For more details concerning the Tele Aid button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone ter will be initiated. The button will system, please visit www.mbusa.com and flash while the call is in progress. The call on the audio system or the COMAND* head use your ID and password (sent to you sep- unit. message: arately) to learn more (USA only). ț Connecting call appears in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 300 Controls in detail Useful features

! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing ! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or You will be asked to provide your pass- after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu- the system does not terminate the call at all, word which you provided when you minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system contact the Response Center at completed the subscriber agreement. has detected a fault or the service is not current- 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or ly activated, and may not initiate a call. Contact 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes ̈ Contact the Tele Aid web page via In- the system checked or contact the Response (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Ser- ternet using the ID and password sent Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or vice at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada. 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possi- to you shortly after the completion of ble. i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the your acquaintance call. audio system is muted. The optional cellular ̈ Then return to your vehicle and pull the Call priority phone (if installed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Unplug trunk lid handle for a minimum of If other service calls such as a Roadside the telephone, switch it on and place the call. 20 seconds until the SOS button is Assistance call or Information call are ac- The COMAND* navigation system (if engaged) flashing. tive, an emergency call is still possible. In will continue to run. The multifunction display in the instrument cluster is available for use, but The message: Call connecting ap- this case, the emergency call will take pri- spoken commands are not available. pears in the multifunction display. ority and override all other active calls. The Response Center will then unlock i The indicator lamp in the respective button Remote door unlock your vehicle with the remote door un- flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only In case you have locked your vehicle unin- locking feature. be terminated by a Response Center or Custom- tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), er Assistance Center representative except i The remote door unlock feature is available Roadside Assistance and Information calls, and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: if the relevant telephone network is available and which can also be terminated by using the t ̈ Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response data connection is possible. button on the multifunction steering wheel or the Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) The SOS button will flash and the message: Call respective button for ending a telephone call on or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). connecting appears in the multifunction dis- the audio system or the COMAND* head unit. play to indicate receipt of the door unlock com- mand. ୴୴ Information Provided by:Provided Information 301 Controls in detail Useful features

୴୴Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center When you are inside your vehicle the next i The Automatic Maintenance Call feature is specialist might attempt to establish voice con- time and switch on the ignition, the mes- available if the relevant telephone network is tact with the vehicle occupants. sage Tele Aid Doors locked by remote available and data connection is possible. If the trunk lid handle was pulled for more than control will appear on the multifunction 20 seconds before door unlock authorization display. Stolen Vehicle Recovery services was received by the Response Center, you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk lid han- i The remote door lock feature is available if In the event your vehicle was stolen: dle again. the relevant telephone network is available and ̈ Report the incident to the police. data connection is possible. Remote door lock The police will issue a numbered incident report. If you have forgotten to lock your vehicle Automatic Maintenance Call and are no longer near it, you can have it The C-Class is equipped with a feature that ̈ Pass this number on to the locked remotely through the Response considerably enhances vehicle care. Just Mercedes-Benz Response Center along Center. prior to reaching a vehicle maintenance with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service. The vehicle can be remotely locked within milestone, Tele Aid transmits important ve- 4 days after the ignition has been switched hicle maintenance information that alerts The Response Center will then attempt off. your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center of to covertly contact the vehicle’s required service. This is automatic and Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is ̈ Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response does not require driver intervention. This located, the Response Center will Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) feature allows your preferred contact the local law enforcement and or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). Mercedes-Benz Center to significantly im- you. The vehicle’s location will only be You will be asked to provide your pass- prove the process of arranging your ser- provided to law enforcement. word which you provided when you vice appointment and ensures that your completed the subscriber agreement. vehicle receives the best possible care. i When the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically to the Response Cen- ter, see “Anti-theft alarm system” (୴ page 66). Information Provided by:Provided Information 302 Controls in detail Useful features

Garage door opener* Warning! G The integrated remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled Before programming the integrated remote devices. It provides a convenient way to re- control to a garage door opener or gate place up to three hand-held remote con- operator, make sure people and objects are trols used to operate devices such as out of the way of the device to prevent po- garage door openers, gate openers, or oth- tential harm or damage. When programming er devices compatible with HomeLink® or a garage door opener, the door moves up or some other systems. down. When programming a gate operator, Interior rear view mirror with integrated the gate opens or closes. Before the integrated remote control can remote control be used, it must be programmed to the ga- Do not use the integrated remote control Indicator lamp rage door opener, gate operator or other 1 with any garage door opener that lacks device you wish to operate. See the follow- 2 3 4 Signal transmitter button safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this ing instructions for programming informa- Needed for programming (not part of vehi- includes any garage door opener model tion. cle equipment): manufactured before April 1, 1982). 5 Hand-held remote control of ga- A garage door that cannot detect an object rage door opener, gate operator – signaling the door to stop and reverse – or other device does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. 6 Hand-held remote control button When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. ୴୴

Information Provided by:Provided Information 303 Controls in detail Useful features

୴୴ longer than 30 seconds). This proce- Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly Do not run the engine while programming dure erases any previous settings for and then rapidly. the integrated remote control. Inhalation of all three channels and initializes the exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. memory. i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the All exhaust gas contains carbon first time the signal transmitter button is pro- monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause If you later wish to program a second grammed. If this button has already been pro- unconsciousness and possible death. and/or third hand-held transmitter to grammed, the indicator lamp will only start the remaining two signal transmitter flashing after 20 seconds. Programming integrated remote con- buttons, do not repeat this step and be- Step 5: gin directly with step 3. trol ̈ After indicator lamp 1 changes from a Step 1: Step 3: slow to a rapidly flashing light, release the hand-held remote control button ̈ Switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). ̈ Hold the end of hand-held remote control 5 of the device you wish to and the signal transmitter button. Step 2: train approximately 2 to 5 in Step 6: ̈ If you have previously programmed a (5 to12 cm) away from the signal trans- ̈ Press and hold the just-trained signal signal transmitter button and wish to mitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be pro- transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and retain its programming, proceed to grammed, while keeping indicator observe indicator lamp 1. step 3. lamp 1 in view. If indicator lamp 1 stays on If you are programming the integrated Step 4: constantly, programming is complete remote control for the first time, press ̈ Using both hands, simultaneously and your device should activate when and hold the two outer signal transmit- press hand-held remote control the respective signal transmitter ter buttons 2 and 4 and release button 6 and the desired signal trans- button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re- them only when indicator lamp 1 be- mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not leased. gins to flash after approximately release the buttons until step 5 is com- 20 seconds (do not hold the button for pleted. Information Provided by:Provided Information 304 Controls in detail Useful features i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about “training” button may also be referred i Some garage door openers (or other rolling 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there code equipped devices) may require you to continue with programming steps 8 through 12 is difficulty locating the transmitting press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same as your garage door opener may be equipped button, refer to the garage door opener signal transmitter button a third time to com- with the “rolling code” feature. operator’s manual. plete the training process. Step 7: Step 9: Step 12: ̈ ̈ To program the remaining two signal ̈ Press the “training” button on the ga- Confirm the garage door operation by transmitter buttons, repeat the steps rage door opener motor head unit. pressing the programmed signal trans- above starting with step 3. mitter button (2, 3 or 4). The “training light” is activated. Step 13: Rolling code programming You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow- ̈ To program the remaining two signal To train a garage door opener (or other ing two steps. transmitter buttons, repeat the steps rolling code devices) with the rolling code Step 10: above starting with step 3. feature, follow these instructions after ̈ completing the “Programming” portion Return to the vehicle and firmly press, Gate operator/Canadian programming (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second hold for 2 seconds and release the pro- person may make the following training grammed signal transmitter button Canadian radio-frequency laws require procedures quicker and easier.) (2, 3 or 4). transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) Step 11: after several seconds of transmission Step 8: which may not be long enough for the ̈ ̈ Locate “training” button on the garage Press, hold for 2 seconds and release integrated signal transmitter to pick up the door opener motor head unit. same signal transmitter button a sec- signal during programming. Similar to this ond time to complete the training pro- Exact location and color of the button Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators cess. are designed to “time-out” in the same may vary by garage door opener brand. manner. Depending on manufacturer, the Information Provided by:Provided Information 305 Controls in detail Useful features

If you live in Canada or if you are having i Upon completion of programming the inte- Operation of integrated remote control difficulties programming a gate operator grated remote control, make sure you retain the ̈ Switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). (regardless of where you live) by using the hand-held remote control that came with the ga- programming procedures, replace step 4 rage door opener, gate operator or other device. ̈ Select and press the appropriate inte- with the following: You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu- grated signal transmitter button (2, ture programming of an integrated remote con- 3 or 4) to activate the remote con- Step 4: trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held trolled device. remote control to operate the respective device ̈ Press and hold the signal transmitter in other situations. The integrated remote control trans- button ( , or ). Do not release 2 3 4 mitter continues to send the signal as this button until it has been successful- Reprogramming a single signal trans- long as the button is pressed – up to ly trained. mitter button 20 seconds. ̈ While still holding down the signal To program a device using a signal trans- transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), mitter button previously trained, follow Erasing integrated remote control “cycle” your hand-held remote control these steps: memory button 6 as follows: Press and hold ̈ Switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). button 6 for 2 seconds, then release ̈ Switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). it for 2 seconds, and again press and ̈ Press and hold the desired signal ̈ Simultaneously press and hold outer hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se- transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4, quence on the hand-held remote con- Do not release the button. for approximately 20 seconds, until trol until the frequency signal has been indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do ̈ Indicator lamp will begin to flash af- learned. Upon successful training, indi- 1 not hold for longer than 30 seconds. ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the cator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then signal transmitter button, proceed with The codes of all three channels are rapidly after several seconds. programming starting with step 3. erased. ̈ Proceed with programming step 5 and i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all step 6 to complete. three channels. Information Provided by:Provided Information 306 Controls in detail Useful features

Programming tips ț If another hand-held remote control is i USA only: If you are having difficulty programming available for the same device, try the This device complies with Part 15 of the programming steps again using that FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following the integrated remote control, here are two conditions: some helpful tips: other hand-held remote control. Make sure new batteries are in the hand-held (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ț Check the frequency of hand-held re- remote control before beginning the ence, and mote control 5 (typically located on procedure. (2) this device must accept any interference re- the reverse side of the remote). The in- ceived, including interference that may ț Straighten the antenna wire from the tegrated remote control is compatible cause undesired operation. garage door opener assembly. This with radio-frequency devices operating may help improve transmitting and/or Any unauthorized modification to this device between 280-390 MHz. could void the user’s authority to operate the receiving signals. equipment. ț Put a new battery in hand-held remote control 5. This will increase the likeli- i Certain types of garage door openers are in- i Canada only: hood of the hand-held remote control compatible with the integrated remote control. If This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry you should experience further difficulties with sending a faster and more accurate sig- Canada. Operation is subject to the following programming the integrated remote control, two conditions: nal to the integrated remote control. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or (1) This device may not cause interference, and ț While performing step 3, hold call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- ter (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or hand-held remote control 5 at differ- (2) this device must accept any interference re- Customer Service (in Canada) at ent lengths and angles from the signal ceived, including interference that may 1-800-387-0100. cause undesired operation of the device. transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you are programming. Attempt varying an- Any unauthorized modification to this device gles at the distance of 2 to 5 in could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at varying distances.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 307 Information Provided by:Provided Information 308 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Driving instructions At the gas station Engine compartment Tires and wheels Winter driving Maintenance Vehicle care

Information Provided by:Provided Information 309 Operation The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

In the “Operation” section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad- tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis- ually increase vehicle and engine speeds ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later to the permissible maximum. on. All of the above instructions, as may apply ț Drive your vehicle during the first to your vehicle type, also apply when driv- 1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after moderate vehicle and engine speeds. the engine or the rear differential has been replaced. ț During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle driving) and excessive en- i Always obey applicable speed limits. 2 gine speeds (no more than /3 of maximum rpm in each gear). ț Avoid accelerating by kick-down. ț Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever. ț Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving). ț Select C as the preferred shift program (୴ page 144) for the first 1000 miles (1500 km).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 310 Operation Driving instructions ̄ Driving instructions Drive sensibly – save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating Warning! G Warning! G conditions. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Make sure absolutely no objects are ob- To save fuel you should: and driving are very dangerous combina- structing the pedals’ range of movement. ț Keep tires at the recommended tire tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- inflation pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in ț Remove unnecessary loads. and judgment. the footwell, make sure the pedals still have ț Remove roof rack when not in use. The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac- sufficient clearance. Otherwise this could cident are greatly increased when you drink lead to accidents or injury. ț Allow engine to warm up under low or take drugs and drive. load use. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow Power assistance ț Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- anyone to drive who has been drinking or eration. taking drugs. G ț Have all maintenance work performed Warning! at the intervals specified in the Mainte- With the engine not running, there is no nance Booklet and as required by the power assistance for the brake and steering Maintenance System. Contact an au- systems. In this case, it is important to keep thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. in mind that a considerably higher degree of Fuel consumption is also increased by driv- effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, hicle. on short trips, and in hilly area.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 311 Operation Driving instructions

Brakes ! Vehicles without 4MATIC: brakes by applying above-normal braking Because the ESP® operates automatically, the pressure at higher speeds. This will also engine and ignition must be shut off (SmartKey enhance the grip of the brake pads. Warning! G in starter switch position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO (Canada only) start/stop button* in position 0 G After driving in heavy rain for some time or 1) when Warning! without applying the brakes or through wa- ț the parking brake is being tested on a brake Make sure not to endanger any other road ter deep enough to wet brake components, test dynamometer users when carrying out these braking ma- the first braking action may be somewhat ț the vehicle is being towed with the front axle neuvers. reduced and increased pedal pressure may raised be necessary to obtain expected braking Active braking action through the ESP® may oth- effect. Maintain a safe distance from erwise seriously damage the brake system. Refer to the description of the Brake Assist ୴ vehicles in front. For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see System (BAS) ( page 60). Resting your foot on the brake pedal will “Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC) Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may with the ESP®” (୴ page 65). cause excessive and premature wear of the be the reason for low brake fluid level in brake pads. To help prevent brake disk corrosion after the reservoir. It can also result in the brakes overheating, driving on wet road surfaces (particularly The brake fluid level in the reservoir may thereby significantly reducing their effec- salted roads), it is advisable to brake the be too low if the red brake warning lamp in tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle with considerable force prior to the instrument cluster comes on while the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an parking. The heat generated serves to dry engine is running and an acoustic warning accident. the brakes. sounds (୴ page 376). Observe additional If your brake system is normally only sub- messages in the multifunction display that jected to moderate loads, you should occa- may appear (୴ page 387). sionally test the effectiveness of the

Information Provided by:Provided Information 312 Operation Driving instructions

Have the brake system inspected ! When driving down long and steep grades, This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain immediately. Contact an authorized relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- Mercedes-Benz Center. lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. ited Warranty. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and After hard braking, it is advisable to drive All checks and service work on the brake reduces brake pad wear. on for some time, rather than immediately system should be carried out by qualified When using the engine’s braking power, a drive park, so that the air stream can cool down technicians only. Contact an authorized wheel may not spin for an extended period of the brakes faster. Mercedes-Benz Center. time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

Warning! G

If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 313 Operation Driving instructions

Driving off Parking ț Slowly release brake pedal. Apply the brakes to test them briefly after ț When parked on an incline, turn front driving off. Perform this procedure only Warning! G wheels towards the road curb. when the road is clear of other traffic. ț Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey Do not park this vehicle in areas where with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) to Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not combustible materials such as grass, hay or starter switch position 0 and remove, or place full load on the engine until the oper- leaves can come into contact with the hot press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop but- ating temperature has been reached. exhaust system, as these materials could be ton. ! When driving off on a slippery surface, do ignited and cause a vehicle fire. ț Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock the To reduce the risk of personal injury, or period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may vehicle when leaving. cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is damage to the vehicle or the vehicle not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War- drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement, ranty. always do the following before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle: ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine ț Keep right foot on brake pedal. performance and causes premature brake and ț Manual transmission: Move the gear drivetrain wear. shift lever to neutral position (no gear selected). ț Firmly depress the parking brake. ț Manual transmission: Move the gear shift lever into first or reverse gear. ț Automatic transmission*: Move the gear selector lever to position P.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 314 Operation Driving instructions

Tires The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. Warning! G Warning! G G Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects Warning! the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You If you feel a sudden significant vibration or may lose control of the vehicle. Continued Although the applicable federal motor vehi- ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- driving with a flat tire or driving at high cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, speed with a flat tire will cause excessive when the treadwear indicators (TWI) be- you should turn on the hazard warning flash- heat build-up and possibly a fire. come visible at approximately 1/ in ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau- 16 (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not al- tion to an area which is a safe distance from low your tires to wear down to that level. As For more information, see “Tires and the road. 1 wheels” (୴ page 331). tread depth approaches /8 in (3 mm), the Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody adhesion properties on a wet road are for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires sharply reduced. Hydroplaning appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to Depending upon the weather and/or road the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire Depending on the depth of the water layer surface (conditions), the tire traction varies dealer for repairs. on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even widely. at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by Specified tire inflation pressures must be road and apply brakes cautiously in the law. These indicators are located in six maintained. This applies particularly if the rain. places on the tread circumference and be- tires are subject to extreme operating con- come visible at a tread depth of approxi- ditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high mately 1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the 16 ambient temperatures). tire is considered worn and should be replaced.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 315 Operation Driving instructions

Tire traction Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires Tire speed rating (୴ page 360) with a minimum tread depth 1 The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or of approximately /6 in (4 mm) on all four Regardless of the tire speed rating, local icy road is always lower than on a dry road. wheels for the winter season to ensure speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru- You should pay particular attention to the normal balanced handling characteristics. dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail- condition of the road whenever the outside On packed snow, they can reduce your ing conditions. temperatures are close to the freezing stopping distance compared to summer point. tires. Warning! G Stopping distance, however, is still consid- Even when permitted by law, never operate Warning! G erably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appro- a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires. If ice has formed on the road, tire traction priate caution. Exceeding the maximum speed for which will be substantially reduced. Under such ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may weather conditions, drive, steer and brake cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail- with extreme caution. not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos- Warranty. sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury and possible death, for you and for others.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 316 Operation Driving instructions

An electronic speed limiter prevents your Winter driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal mph (210 km/h). The most important rule for slippery or icy force may become necessary to produce roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid The factory equipped tires on your vehicle the normal braking effect. abrupt acceleration, braking and steering may have a tire speed rating above the Depressing the brake pedal periodically maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control maximum speed permitted by the elec- when traveling at length on salt-strewn system under such conditions. tronic speed limiter. roads can bring road-salt impaired braking When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, efficiency back to normal. Make sure your tires have the required tire move gear selector lever to position N. Try speed rating as specified for your vehicle in If the vehicle is parked after being driven to keep the vehicle under control by cor- the “Technical data” section (୴ page 467), on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien- rective steering action. for example when purchasing new tires. cy should be tested as soon as possible af- For information on how to identify the tire i For information on driving with snow chains, ter driving is resumed. see “Snow chains” (୴ page 361). speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire size designation, load and speed rating” Warning! G (୴ page 348). Warning! G Make sure not to endanger any other road If you are uncertain about the correct read- On slippery road surfaces, never downshift users when carrying out these braking ma- ing of the information given on a tire’s side- in order to obtain braking action. This could neuvers. wall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi- Center will be glad to assist you. cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre- i For information on speed ratings for winter vent this type of control loss. tires, see (୴ page 351) and (୴ page 360).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 317 Operation Driving instructions

Standing water Passenger compartment Warning! G ! Do not drive through flooded areas or water If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make of unknown depth. Before driving through water, Warning! G sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust determine its depth. Never accelerate before pipe and from around the vehicle while the driving into water. The bow wave could force wa- Always fasten items being carried as secure- engine is running. Otherwise, deadly carbon ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus ly as possible. monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in- damaging them. In an accident, during hard braking or sud- terior resulting in unconsciousness and If you must drive through standing water, drive den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown death. slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compart- around inside the vehicle, and cause injury To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, ment. Water in these areas could cause damage to vehicle occupants unless the items are open a window slightly on the side of the ve- to electrical components or wiring of the engine securely fastened in the vehicle. hicle not facing the wind. or transmission, or could result in water being in- gested by the engine through the air intake caus- The trunk is the preferred place to carry ing severe internal engine damage. Any such objects. damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Warning! G Limited Warranty. Driving abroad The outside temperature indicator is not de- Abroad, there is an extensive signed to serve as an ice-warning device and Mercedes-Benz service network at your is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In- disposal. If you plan to drive into areas dicated temperatures just above the freez- which are not listed in the index of your ing point do not guarantee that the road Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you surface is free of ice. should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For more information on winter driving, see ୴ “Winter driving” ( page 360). by:Provided Information 318 Operation Driving instructions

Control and operation of radio Telephones and two-way radios Catalytic converter transmitters Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with Warning! G monolithic-type catalytic converters, an COMAND*, radio, and telephone* important element in conjunction with the Never operate radio transmitters equipped oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con- with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- Warning! G trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis- out being connected to an external antenna) sions. Keep your vehicle in proper from inside the vehicle while the engine is Please do not forget that your primary re- operating condition by following our rec- running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. ommended maintenance instructions as tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man- outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. sibly resulting in an accident and/or agement and Data System), radio, or tele- personal injury. To prevent damage to the catalytic convert- phone1 if road, weather and traffic ! ers, only use premium unleaded gasoline in this conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not vehicle. be able to observe traffic conditions and Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation could endanger yourself and others. phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con- should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, exces- Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic connected to an antenna that is installed on (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is verter, causing it to overheat and potentially the outside of the vehicle. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- start a fire. ly 14 m) every second. Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-

1 structions regarding use of an external an- Observe all legal requirements. tenna.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 319 Operation Driving instructions

Emission control Warning! G Warning! G Certain systems of the engine and the As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- emission control system serve to keep the Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- toxic components of the exhaust gases your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves within permissible limits required by law. monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un- can come into contact with the hot exhaust consciousness and possible death. These systems will function properly only system, as these materials could be ignited when maintained strictly according to fac- Do not run the engine in confined areas and cause a vehicle fire. tory specifications. Any adjustments on (such as a garage) which are not properly the engine should, therefore, be carried ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz Cen- fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, ter authorized technicians. have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these Engine adjustments should not be altered conditions, drive only with at least one win- in any way. The specified service proce- dow fully open at all times. dures must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details please refer to the Maintenance Booklet.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 320 Operation Driving instructions

Coolant temperature Warning! G During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem- ț Driving when your engine is badly over- perature may rise to approximately 248°F heated can cause some fluids, which (120°C). may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be se- The engine should not be operated with riously burned. the coolant temperature over 248°F ț Steam from an overheated engine can (120°C). Doing so may cause serious en- cause serious burns and can occur just gine damage which is not covered by the by opening the hood. Stay away from Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 321 Operation At the gas station

Refueling i In case that the central locking system does Warning! G not release the fuel filler flap, or the opening mechanism is clamping, notify Roadside Assis- Warning! G C 300/C 300 4MATIC/C 300 4MATIC Sport tance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. and 300 Sport (with automatic transmis- Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. sion*): It burns violently and can cause serious per- Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a label sonal injury. reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on fuel filler flap): Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- Ethanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highly rials near gasoline! flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Etha- Turn off the engine before refueling. nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in- or if you come into contact with it or inhale haling fumes and any skin or clothing con- fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of ethanol tact. Extinguish all smoking materials. fumes and skin contact with ethanol. Extin- 1 To open fuel filler flap guish all open flames before refueling. Never Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha- 2 To insert fuel filler cap smoke or create sparks close to ethanol. lation of fuel vapors can damage your 3 Holder health. The fuel filler flap is located on the i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a right-hand side of the vehicle towards the minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline rear. Locking and unlocking the vehicle quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) automatically C 300/C 300 4MATIC/C 300 4MATIC Sport and 300 Sport (with automatic transmission*): locks and unlocks the fuel filler flap. Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on the fuel filler flap. Information Provided by:Provided Information 322 Operation At the gas station

For more information on gasoline or E85, see The fuel filler flap springs open. ̈ Replace the fuel cap by turning it clock- “Premium unleaded gasoline” (୴ page 481) or ̈ wise until it audibly engages. the Factory Approved Service Products Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle literature hold on to it until possible pressure is i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before portfolio, or contact an authorized released. locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin pre- Mercedes-Benz Center. vents closing after you have locked the vehicle. ̈ Take off the fuel filler cap and set it in ̈ Turn off the engine. the direction of arrow 2 and place it ̈ Close the fuel filler flap. ̈ Vehicles with automatic transmission*: into holder 4 located on the inside of You should hear the latch close shut. Move the gear selector lever to the fuel filler flap. position P (୴ page 140). i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap To prevent fuel vapors from escaping open can cause the yellow engine malfunction ̈ Remove the SmartKey from the starter into open air, fully insert filler nozzle indicator lamp ± to illuminate. unit. switch. For more information, see the “Practical hints” Vehicles with SmartKey with ̈ Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle section (୴ page 378). KEYLESS-GO*: unit cuts out – do not top off or overfill. ̈ Turn off the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO* button once. Warning! G ̈ Open the driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in position 0, Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres- same as with the SmartKey re- sure in the system which could cause a gas moved from the starter switch). The discharge. This could cause the gas to spray driver’s door then can be closed back out when removing the fuel pump noz- again. zle, which could cause personal injury. ̈ Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at the point indicated by arrow 1. Information Provided by:Provided Information 323 Operation At the gas station

Check regularly and before a long trip Windshield washer system and head- Engine oil level lamp cleaning system* For more information on engine oil, see For more information on refilling the wash- “Engine oil” (୴ page 327). er reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” Vehicle lighting (୴ page 330). Check function and cleanliness. For more information on replacing light bulbs, see Coolant “Replacing bulbs” (୴ page 430). For more information on coolant, see For more information, see “Lighting” ୴ page 329) and see “Fu- “Coolant level” ( (୴ page 108). els, coolants, lubricants, etc.” 1 Coolant level (୴ page 476). 2 Brake fluid Tire inflation pressure 3 Windshield washer and headlamp Brake fluid For information on tire inflation pressure, cleaning system* see “Checking tire inflation pressure” ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake (୴ page 341). i Opening the hood (୴ page 325). fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem. For more information, see “Practical hints” (୴ page 376) and (୴ page 400). For information on brake fluid, see “Brake fluid” (୴ page 480).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 324 Operation Engine compartment ̄ Engine compartment Hood Warning! G Warning! G

Warning! G You could be injured when the hood is open The engine is equipped with a transistorized – even when the engine is turned off. ignition system. Because of the high voltage Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- Parts of the engine can become very hot. To it is dangerous to touch any components (ig- cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could prevent burns, let the engine cool off com- nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic be forced open by passing air flow. pletely before touching any components on socket) of the ignition system This could cause the hood to come loose the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety ț with the engine running and injure you and/or others. precautions. ț while starting the engine ț if ignition is “on” and the engine is Opening cranked manually Warning! G G Warning! To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine is running. engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is The radiator fan may continue to run for ap- overheated, do not open the hood. Move proximately 30 seconds or even restart af- away from vehicle and do not open the hood ter the engine has been turned off. Stay until the engine has cooled down. If neces- clear of fan blades. sary, call the fire department.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 325 Operation Engine compartment

The hood lock release lever is located to Closing the left of the steering wheel under the dashboard. Warning! G

When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone. Make sure the hood is securely engaged be- 2 Lever for opening the hood fore driving off. Do not continue driving if the hood can no longer engage after an acci- ̈ Push lever 2 under the hood upwards. dent, for example. The hood could otherwise 1 Release lever ̈ Pull up on the hood and then release it. come loose while the vehicle is in motion and endanger you and/or others. ̈ Pull release lever 1 downwards. The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas-filled The hood is unlocked. struts. ̈ Let the hood drop from a height of ap- ! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or proximately 1 ft (30 cm). hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are The hood will lock audibly. folded forward away from the windshield. ̈ Check to make sure the hood is fully closed. If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it

Information Provided by:Provided Information drop with somewhat greater force. 326 Operation Engine compartment

Engine oil Notes about checking engine oil level Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick When checking the oil level The amount of oil your engine needs will To check the engine oil level with the oil depend on a number of factors, including ț the vehicle must be parked on level dipstick, do the following: driving style. Higher oil consumption can ground ̈ ୴ occur when ț with the engine at operating tempera- Open the hood ( page 325). ț the vehicle is new ture, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 5 minutes with ț the vehicle is driven frequently at the engine turned off higher engine speeds ț with the engine not at operating tem- Engine oil consumption checks should only perature yet, the vehicle must have be made after the vehicle break-in period. been stationary for at least 30 minutes ! Do not use any special lubricant additives, with the engine turned off as these may damage the drive assemblies. Us- ing special additives not approved by Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 1 Oil dipstick 2 Upper mark More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes-Benz Center. 3 Lower mark ̈ Pull out oil dipstick 1. ̈ Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean. ̈ Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube. ୴୴

Information Provided by:Provided Information 327 Operation Engine compartment

୴୴̈ Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after ap- Adding engine oil ̈ Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. proximately 5 seconds to obtain accu- Only use approved engine oils and oil filters ̈ Add engine oil as required. Be careful rate reading. ! required for vehicles with Maintenance System. not to overfill with oil. The oil level is correct when it is between For a listing of approved engine oils and oil fil- Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. lower mark (min.) and upper mark ters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Prod- 3 2 Avoid environmental damage caused by oil (max.) of the oil dipstick. ucts pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized entering the ground or water. The filling quantity between the upper and Mercedes-Benz Center. i Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately ! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification It will cause damage to the engine and emission 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). other than those expressly required for the Main- control system not covered by the ̈ If necessary, add engine oil. tenance System, or changing of oil and oil filter Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. at change intervals longer than those called for For adding engine oil (୴ page 328). by the Maintenance System will result in engine ̈ Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck. or emission control system damage not covered For more information on engine oil, see the For more information on engine oil, see the by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. “Technical data” section (୴ page 476) and “Technical data” section (୴ page 476) and (୴ page 480). (୴ page 480). For more information on messages in the Transmission fluid level multifunction display concerning engine oil, see the “Practical hints” section The transmission fluid level does not need ୴ ( page 387). to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the transmission.

1 Filler cap Information Provided by:Provided Information 328 Operation Engine compartment

Coolant level ̈ Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly approx- ț Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately a half-turn to relieve excess imately a half-turn counterclockwise to The engine coolant is a mixture of water pressure. If opened immediately, scald- release any excess pressure. and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check ing hot fluid and steam will be blown out ̈ Continue turning the cap 1 counter- the coolant level, the vehicle must be under pressure. clockwise and remove it. parked on level ground and the engine ț Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine The coolant level is correct if the level must be cool. parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into con- ț for cold coolant: reaches the white Warning! G tact with hot engine parts. marking (plastic bridge) 3 inside the coolant expansion tank 2 In order to avoid potentially serious burns: The coolant expansion tank is located on ț for warm coolant: is approximately ț Use extreme caution when opening the the passenger side of the engine compart- 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher hood if there are any signs of steam or ment. ̈ coolant leaking from the cooling system, Add coolant as required. or if the coolant temperature gauge indi- ̈ Replace and tighten cap 1. cates that the coolant is overheated. For more information on coolant, see the ț Do not remove pressure cap on coolant “Technical data” section (୴ page 484). reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure.

1 Cap 2 Coolant expansion tank 3 Fluid level bridge Information Provided by:Provided Information 329 Operation Engine compartment

Windshield washer system and During all seasons, add MB Windshield ̈ To close washer fluid reservoir: headlamp cleaning system* Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to Press cap 1 onto filler hole until it en- water. Premix the windshield washer fluid gages. The washer fluid reservoir is located on the in a suitable container. left-hand side of the engine compartment ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can dam- when looking in the direction of travel. It Warning! G age the plastic lenses of the headlamps. supplies the windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system with wash- For more information, see “Windshield Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma- er fluid. washer system and headlamp cleaning ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze system*” (୴ page 486). on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

̈ To open washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab of cap 1 upward. ̈ Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water (or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, de- 1 Cap pending on ambient temperatures). Fluid for the windshield washer system and ! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze the headlamp cleaning system is supplied where temperatures may fall below freezing from the windshield washer reservoir. It point. Failure to do so could result in damage to has a capacity of approximately 6.34 US qt the washer system/reservoir. (6.0 l).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 330 Operation Tires and wheels ̄ Tires and wheels Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Important guidelines Center for information on tested and Warning! G recommended rims and tires for summer ț Only use sets of tires and rims of the and winter operation. They can also offer Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make. tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have advice concerning tire service and ț Tires must be of the correct size for the sustained damage, replace them. purchase. rim. When replacing rims, only use genuine ț Break in new tires for approximately Warning! G Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds. Replace rims or tires with the same designa- result in the bolts loosening and possibly an tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the accident. ț Regularly check the tires and rims for original part. Contact an authorized Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- damage. Dented or bent rims can Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous cause tire inflation pressure loss and tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are damage cannot always be recognized on re- damage to the tire beads. mounted: treads. The operating safety of the vehicle ț If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire ț The wheel brakes or suspension cannot be assured when such tires are used. inflation pressure and correct as components can be damaged. required. ț The operating clearance of the wheels ț Do not allow your tires to wear down and the tires may no longer be correct. too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread 1 depths of less than /8 in (3 mm). ț When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all around). Information Provided by:Provided Information 331 Operation Tires and wheels

Tire care and maintenance Tire inspection Life of tire Every time you check the tire inflation The service life of a tire is dependent upon pressure, you should also inspect your varying factors including but not limited to: Warning! G tires for the following: ț Driving style ț ୴ Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam- excessive treadwear ( page 333) ț Tire inflation pressure aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure ț cord or fabric showing through the ț Distance driven loss. As a result, you could lose control of tire’s rubber your vehicle. ț bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the Warning! G the tread or side of the tire tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them. Replace the tire if you find any of the above Tires and spare tire should be replaced after conditions. 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread. Regularly check your tire inflation pressure Make sure you also inspect the spare tire at least once a month. For more informa- periodically for condition and inflation. tion on checking tire inflation pressure, Spare tires will age and degrade over time see “Recommended tire inflation pres- even if never used, and thus should be in- sure” (୴ page 339). spected and replaced when necessary.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 332 Operation Tires and wheels

Tread depth Storing tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth 1 Do not allow your tires to wear down too approaches /8 in (3 mm), the adhesion ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are properties on a wet road are sharply re- with as little exposure to light as possible. Pro- sharply reduced at tread depths of less duced. tect tires from contact with oil, grease and gaso- 1 line. than /8 in (3 mm). Depending upon the weather and/or road Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by surface (conditions), the tire traction varies Cleaning tires law. These indicators are located in six widely. places on the tread circumference and ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash become visible at a tread depth of approx- tires. The intense jet of water can result in dam- 1 age to the tire. imately /16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be re- Always replace a damaged tire. placed. Recommended minimum tire tread depth: ț 1 Summer tires /8 in (3 mm) ț 1 Winter tires /6 in (4 mm)

Warning! G 1 TWI (TreadWear Indicator) Although the applicable federal motor safety The treadwear indicator appears as a solid laws consider a tire to be worn when the band across the tread. treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at 1 approximately /16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires

Information Provided by:Provided Information 333 Operation Tires and wheels

Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle carried by a single axle (front or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for Unidirectional tires offer added advan- Two labels on your vehicle show how much either the front axle or rear axle. tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor- weight it may properly carry. mance. To benefit, however, you must 1) The Tire and Loading Information make sure the tires rotate in the direction placard can be found on the driver’s specified. door B-pillar. This placard tells you im- An arrow on the sidewall indicates the portant information about the number intended direction of rotation (spinning) of of people that can be in the vehicle and the tire. the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information i Spare wheels may be mounted against the on the proper size and recommended direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the reg- tire inflation pressures for the original ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. equipment tires on your vehicle. 1 Driver’s door B-pillar Always observe and follow applicable temporary 2) The certification label, also found on Following is a discussion on how to work use restrictions and speed limitations indicated the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about with the information contained on the Tire on the spare wheel. the gross weight capacity of your vehi- and Loading Information placard with re- cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight gards to loading your vehicle. Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be

Information Provided by:Provided Information 334 Operation Tires and wheels

Tire and Loading Information Seating capacity The seating capacity gives you important Warning! G information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle. Observe front Do not overload the tires by exceeding the and rear seating capacity. The Tire and specified load limit or total load limit as indi- Loading Information placard showing the cated on the Tire and Loading Information seating capacity is located on the driver’s placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Over- door B-pillar (୴ page 334). loading the tires can overheat them, possi- Data shown on Tire and Loading Information bly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires i Load limit information on the Tire and placard example are for illustration purposes can also result in handling or steering prob- 1 Loading Information placard only. Seating capacity data are specific to each lems, or brake failure. vehicle and may vary from data shown in the il- The Tire and Loading Information placard lustration below. Refer to Tire and Loading Infor- Tire and Loading Information placard showing the load limit information is locat- mation placard on vehicle for actual data specific ed on the driver’s door B-pillar to your vehicle. i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information (୴ page 334). placard example are for illustration purposes only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle ̈ Locate the statement “The combined and may vary from data shown in the illustration weight of occupants and cargo should below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Informa- vehicle. tion placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement. Information Provided by:Provided Information 335 Operation Tires and wheels

Step 2 Step 6 (if applicable) ̈ Determine the combined weight of the ̈ If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, driver and passengers that will be load from your trailer will be trans- riding in your vehicle. ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces Step 3 the available cargo and luggage load ̈ Subtract the combined weight of the capacity of your vehicle (୴ page 338). driver and passengers from XXX kilo- The following table shows examples on grams or XXX lbs. how to calculate total and cargo load 1 Seating capacity information on the Step 4 capacities with varying seating configura- Tire and Loading Information placard ̈ The resulting figure equals the avail- tions and number and size of occupants. able amount of cargo and luggage load The following examples use a load limit Steps for determining correct load limit capacity. For example, if the “XXX” of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using The following steps have been developed amount equals 1400 lbs and there will the actual load limit for your vehicle stated as required of all manufacturers under be five 150 lbs passengers in your on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informa- Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, vehicle, the amount of available cargo tion placard (୴ page 335). Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”. (1400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) Step 1 Step 5 ̈ Locate the statement “The combined ̈ Determine the combined weight of weight of occupants and cargo should luggage and cargo being loaded on the never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on vehicle. That weight may not safely your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Infor- exceed the available cargo and luggage mation placard. load capacity calculated in step 4. Information Provided by:Provided Information 336 Operation Tires and wheels

Example Combined weight Number of Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and limit of occupants occupants configura- weight of all trailer tongue weight (total and cargo from (driver and tion occupants load limit from Tire and Tire and Loading passengers) Loading Information placard Information minus combined weight of all placard occupants) 1 1500 lbs 5 front: 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs – 750 lbs = 750 lbs Occupant 2: 180 lbs rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs Occupant 4: 140 lbs Occupant 5: 120 lbs 2 1500 lbs 3 front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs 540 lbs 1500 lbs – 540 lbs = 960 lbs rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs Occupant 3: 150 lbs 3 1500 lbs 1 front: 1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs – 150 lbs = 1350 lbs

The higher the weight of all occupants, the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available. For more information, see “Trailer tongue load” (୴ page 338).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 337 Operation Tires and wheels

Certification label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The Trailer tongue load total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, Even after careful determination of the The tongue load of any trailer is an impor- all cargo, and the trailer tongue load combined weight of all occupants, cargo tant weight to measure because it affects (୴ page 338) must never exceed the and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a GVWR. (୴ page 338) as to not exceed the permis- trailer is towed, the tongue load must be sible load limit, you must make sure that Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to- added to the weight of all occupants riding your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi- tal allowable weight that can be carried by and any cargo you are carrying in the cle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross a single axle (front or rear). vehicle. The tongue load typically is Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the 10 percent of the trailer weight and every- To assure that your vehicle does not ex- front or rear axle. You can obtain the thing loaded in it. ceed the maximum permissible weight GVWR and GAWR from the certification la- limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed bel. The certification label can be found on axle), have the loaded vehicle (including primarily to carry passengers and their the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap- cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recom- data” (୴ page 462). plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a mend trailer towing with your vehicle. suitable commercial scale.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 338 Operation Tires and wheels

Recommended tire inflation pressure Keeping the tires properly inflated Do not overload the tires by exceeding the provides the best handling, tread life and specified load limit or total load limit as indi- riding comfort. cated on the Tire and Loading Information Warning! G placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Over- In addition to the tire Tire and Loading loading the tires can overheat them, possi- Information placard on the driver’s door Follow recommended tire inflation bly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation pressures. can also result in handling or steering prob- pressure label (if available) on the fuel filler Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires lems, or brake failure. flap (୴ page 322) for any additional infor- wear excessively and/or unevenly, mation pertaining to special driving situa- adversely affect handling and fuel economy, Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and tions. For more information, see and are more likely to fail from being over- Loading Information placard located on “Important notes on tire inflation heated. the driver’s door B-pillar (୴ page 334). pressure” (୴ page 340). Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires The tire inflation pressure should be Data shown on Tire and Loading Information can adversely affect handling and ride i checked regularly and should only be ad- placard example are for illustration purposes comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping justed on cold tires. The tires can be con- only. Tire data are specific to each vehicle and distance, and result in sudden deflation sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked may vary from data shown in the illustration be- (blowout) because they are more likely to low. Refer to Tire and Loading Information plac- for at least 3 hours or driven less than become punctured or damaged by road ard on vehicle for actual data specific to your 1 mile (1.6 km). debris, potholes etc. vehicle. Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard on the driver’s door B-pillar.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 339 Operation Tires and wheels

Important notes on tire inflation i Driving comfort may be reduced when the pressure tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation pressure label (if available) Warning! G located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

If the tire inflation pressure drops Make sure to readjust the tire inflation repeatedly: pressure for normal driving speeds. You should wait until the tires are cold before ț Check the tires for punctures from adjusting the tire inflation pressure. foreign objects. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire 1 Tire and Loading Information placard ț Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim. inflation pressure information for vehicle with recommended cold tire inflation loads less than the maximum loaded vehi- pressures cle condition (୴ page 348). If such infor- Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure The Tire and Loading Information placard mation is provided, it can be found on the are also increased while driving, depending lists the recommended cold tire inflation tire inflation pressure label located on the on the driving speed and the tire load. pressures for maximum loaded vehicle inside of the fuel filler flap (୴ page 322). weight. The tire inflation pressures listed If you will be driving your vehicle at high Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi- apply to the tires installed as original speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of equipment. where it is legal and conditions allow, air temperature change. Keep this in mind consult the tire inflation pressure label (if when checking tire inflation pressure available) on the inside of the fuel filler flap where the temperature is different from on how to adjust the cold tire inflation the outside temperature. pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 340 Operation Tires and wheels

Checking tire inflation pressure ̈ Remove the cap from the valve on one wear excessively and/or unevenly, tire. adversely affect handling and fuel economy, Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and are more likely to fail from being over- ̈ Firmly press a tire gauge onto the at least once a month. heated. valve. Check and adjust the tire inflation Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires ̈ Read tire inflation pressure on tire pressure when the tires are cold. The tires can adversely affect handling and ride gauge and check against the recom- can be considered cold if the vehicle has comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping mended tire inflation pressure on the been parked for at least 3 hours or driven distance, and result in sudden deflation Tire and Loading Information placard less than 1 mile (1.6 km). (blowout) because they are more likely to on the driver’s door B-pillar If you check the tire inflation pressure become punctured or damaged by road (୴ page 334) or, if available, the when the tires are warm (the vehicle has debris, potholes etc. supplemental tire inflation pressure been driven for several miles or sitting less Do not overload the tires by exceeding the information on the inside of the fuel ୴ than 3 hours), the reading will be specified load limit or total load limit as indi- filler flap ( page 322). If necessary, approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than cated on the Tire and Loading Information add air to achieve the recommended the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Over- tire inflation pressure. air out to match the specified cold tire in- loading the tires can overheat them, possi- flation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in- bly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the underinflated. can also result in handling or steering prob- valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the lems, or brake failure. tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge. G Warning! ̈ Install the valve cap. Checking tire inflation pressure ̈ Follow recommended tire inflation manually Repeat this procedure for each tire. pressures. Follow the steps below to achieve correct Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires tire inflation pressure:

Information Provided by:Provided Information 341 Operation Tires and wheels

Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) Warning! G Warning! G While the vehicle is being driven, the Run Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation When the multifunction display shows the The Run Flat Indicator does not indicate a pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota- message Check Tire Pressure Soon, warning for wrongly selected tire inflation tional speed. This allows the system to de- one or more of your tires is significantly un- pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres- tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. derinflated. You should stop and check your sure according to the Tire and Loading If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to Information placard on the driver’s door to falling tire inflation pressure, you will the proper tire inflation pressure as indicat- B-pillar (୴ page 334) or, if available, on the see a corresponding warning message in ed on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading tire inflation pressure label located on the the multifunction display. Information placard or, if available, on the inside of the fuel filler flap (୴ page 322). The Run Flat Indicator may function in a re- tire inflation pressure label. Driving on a sig- The Run Flat Indicator does not replace stricted manner or with a delay if: nificantly underinflated tire causes the tire regular checks of the tire inflation pressures to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un- ț snow chains are mounted to the since a gradual pressure loss in more than derinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and vehicle one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s Indicator. ț winter road conditions prevail handling and stopping ability. Each tire, in- The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a ț cluding the spare, should be checked you are driving on a loose surface (e.g. warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of sand or gravel) monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout ț you are driving in a very sporty manner on the Tire and Loading Information placard caused by a foreign object). In this case (involving rapid acceleration or high on the driver’s door B-pillar (୴ page 334) or, bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply- speeds in curves) if available, on the tire inflation pressure ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering label located on the inside of the fuel filler maneuvers. flap (୴ page 322).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 342 Operation Tires and wheels

Restart the Run Flat Indicator ̈ Press button #. Warning! G The tire inflation pressure monitor must be The following message will appear in restarted in the following situations: The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in the multifunction display: ț If you have changed the tire inflation a reliable manner if you have set the correct Restart pressure tire inflation pressures for each tire. Run Flat Indicator? Yes or No ț If you have replaced the wheels or tires If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was ̈ set, the system will monitor the pressure Press button $ or % to select ț If you have installed new wheels or according to the incorrect value. Yes. tires ̈ Press button # to confirm. ̈ Using the Tire and Loading Information ̈ Switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). The following message will appear in placard on the driver’s door B-pillar ̈ the multifunction display: (୴ page 334) or, if available, the Press button ( or & on the supplemental tire inflation pressure multifunction steering wheel to select Run Flat Indicator information on the inside of the fuel the menu Service (୴ page 164). Restarted filler flap (୴ page 322), make sure the ̈ Press button $ or % to select After a certain “learning phase”, the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is Run Flat Indicator. Run Flat Indicator checks the set pres- correct. sure values for all four tires. ୴୴ ̈ Press the button # to confirm. The following message appears in the multifunction display: Run Flat Indicator Active Menu: OK-Button

Information Provided by:Provided Information 343 Operation Tires and wheels

୴୴If you wish to cancel activation: ț If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and then stays illuminated, the TPMS system Warning! G ̈ Press button $ or % to select itself is not operating properly. No. i This device complies with Part 15 of the The TPMS does not indicate a warning for ̈ Press button # to confirm. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always The previous settings will not be two conditions: adjust tire inflation pressure according to changed (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the or ence, and supplemental tire pressure information on (2) this device must accept any interference ̈ Wait until the message received, including interference that may the inside of the fuel filler flap. Run Flat Indicator? cause undesired operation. The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due Restart Any unauthorized modification to this device to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. disappears. could void the user’s authority to operate the tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In equipment. this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care- Checking tire pressure electronically fully applying the brakes and avoiding with the Tire Pressure Monitoring The TPMS only functions on wheels that abrupt steering maneuvers. System (TPMS), (USA only) are equipped with the proper electronic sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres- i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System sure, as selected by the driver, in all four (TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the decrease in pressure in one or more of the ୴ instrument cluster ( page 26). Depending on tires. how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS system itself: ț If the telltale illuminates continuously, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS. Information Provided by:Provided Information 344 Operation Tires and wheels

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety Warning! G and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- of reasons, including the installation of Each tire, including the Minispare, should be cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please replacement or alternate tires or wheels on checked monthly when cold and inflated to note that the TPMS is not a substitute for the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from the inflation pressure recommended by the proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- functioning properly. Always check the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing Loading Information placard or, if available, pressure, even if underinflation has not one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle on the tire inflation pressure label. If your ve- reached the level to trigger illumination of to ensure that the replacement or alternate hicle has tires of a different size than the the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue size indicated on the Tire and Loading Your vehicle has also been equipped with a to function properly. Information placard or, if available, the tire TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate inflation pressure label, you should deter- when the system is not operating properly. i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc- mine the proper tire inflation pressure for The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- tion develops, it may take up to 10 minutes those tires. bined with the low tire pressure telltale. for the system to signal a malfunction using the TPMS telltale flashing and illumination As an added safety feature, your vehicle has When the system detects a malfunction, the sequence. been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire and then remain continuously illuminated. The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driving if the malfunction has been corrected. pressure telltale when one or more of your This sequence will continue upon subse- tires is significantly underinflated. Accord- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- i Operating radio transmission equipment ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- function exists. When the malfunction (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or minates, you should stop and check your indicator is illuminated, the system may not near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to be able to detect or signal low tire pressure malfunction. the proper pressure. Driving on a significant- as intended. ly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 345 Operation Tires and wheels

Tire inflation pressure warnings The TPMS must be restarted when you ̈ Switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to If the system detects a significant loss of ̈ Press button ( or & on the tire inflation pressure in one or more than a new level (e.g. because of different load multifunction steering wheel to select or driving conditions). The TPMS is then one tire, a message appears in the multi- the menu Service (୴ page 164). function display. recalibrated to the current tire inflation pressures. ̈ Press button $ or % to select Tire Pressure. ̈ Using the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar ̈ Press the button # to confirm. The (୴ page 334) or, if available, the following message appears in the mul- supplemental tire inflation pressure tifunction display: information on the inside of the fuel Tire Pressure filler flap (୴ page 322), make sure the Monitor Example illustration tire inflation pressure of all four tires is Active In addition, a warning signal sounds. correct.

Restarting the TPMS i Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the vehicle operating condition. Tire Warning! G pressure should only be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation pres- It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate sure on the Tire and Loading Information placard ̈ ୴ Press button #. the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- on the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 334). Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the The following message will appear in pressure information for driving at high speeds the multifunction display: ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You ୴ ( page 340) or for vehicle loads less than the Restart tire might loose control over the vehicle. maximum loaded vehicle condition pressure monitor? (୴ page 334). If such information is provided, it Yes or No can be found onby:Provided theInformation inside of the fuel filler flap. 346 Operation Tires and wheels

̈ Press button $ or % to select Potential problems associated with Overinflated tires Yes. underinflated and overinflated tires Overinflated tires can: ̈ Press button # to confirm. Underinflated tires ț adversely affect handling The following message will appear in characteristics Underinflated tires can: the multifunction display: ț cause uneven tire wear Tire Press. Monitor ț cause excessive and uneven tire wear ț be more prone to damage from road Reactivated ț adversely affect fuel economy hazards After driving a few minutes the current ț lead to tire failure from being ț adversely affect ride comfort tire inflation pressure values are overheated accepted as reference pressures and ț increase stopping distance then monitored. ț adversely affect handling characteristics If you wish to cancel activation: Warning! G ̈ Press button $ or % to select Warning! G No. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. ̈ Press button # to confirm. Follow recommended tire inflation The previous settings will not be pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride changed Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping wear excessively and/or unevenly, distance, and result in sudden deflation adversely affect handling and fuel economy, (blowout) because they are more likely to and are more likely to fail from being become punctured or damaged by road overheated. debris, potholes etc.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 347 Operation Tires and wheels

Tire labeling 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards Tire size designation, load and speed (୴ page 354) rating Besides tire name (sales designation) and 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) manufacturer name, a number of markings (୴ page 352) can be found on a tire. 3 Maximum tire load (୴ page 353) Following are some explanations for the 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure markings on your vehicle’s tires: (୴ page 354) 5 Manufacturer 6 Tire ply material (୴ page 356) 7 Tire size designation, load and speed rating (୴ page 348) 8 Load identification (୴ page 352) 9 Tire name 1 Tire width 2 Aspect ratio in % i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary 3 Radial tire code from data shown in above illustration. 4 Rim diameter Tire load rating For more information, see “Rims and tires” 5 (୴ page 467). 6 Tire speed rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 348 Operation Tires and wheels

General: Tire width Rim diameter Depending on the design standards used, The tire width 1 (୴ page 348) indicates The rim diameter 4 (୴ page 348) is the the tire size molded into the sidewall may the nominal tire width in mm. diameter of the bead seat, not the have no letter or a letter preceding the tire diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is size designation. Aspect ratio indicated in inches (in). No letter preceding the size designation The aspect ratio 2 (୴ page 348) is the Tire load rating (as illustrated above): Passenger car tire dimensional relationship between tire based on European design standards. section height and section width and is The tire load rating 5 (୴ page 348) is a expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio numerical code associated with the Letter “P” preceding the size designation: is arrived at by dividing section height by maximum load a tire can support. Passenger car tire based on U.S. design section width. standards. For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Tire code (615 kg) the tire is designed to support. Light Truck tire based on U.S. design The tire code (୴ page 348) indicates See also “Maximum tire load” standards. 3 the tire construction type. The “R” stands (୴ page 353) where the maximum load as- Letter “T” preceding the size designation: for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag- sociated with the load index is indicated in Temporary spare tires which are high onal or bias ply construction; letter “B” kilograms and lbs. pressure compact spares designed for means belted-bias ply construction. temporary emergency use only. At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For additional information, see “Tire speed rating” (୴ page 350).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 349 Operation Tires and wheels

For additional information on tire load i Tire load rating 5 (୴ page 348) and tire Warning! G rating, see “Load identification” speed rating 6 (୴ page 348) are also referred (୴ page 352). to as “service description”. The tire load rating must always be at least Summer tires half of the GAWR (୴ page 357) of your vehi- i Tire load rating 5 (୴ page 348) and tire speed rating (୴ page 348) are also referred cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result 6 Index Speed rating to as “service description”. which may cause an accident and/or seri- Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) ous personal injury to you or others. Tire speed rating R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) Always replace rims and tires with the same ୴ designation, manufacturer and type as The tire speed rating 6 ( page 348) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) indicates the approved maximum speed shown on the original part. T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) for the tire. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

Warning! G Warning! G V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Even when permitted by law, never operate Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) specified load limit or total load limit as indi- a vehicle at speeds greater than the cated on the Tire and Loading Information maximum speed rating of the tires. (Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h) placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar Exceeding the maximum speed for which ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h) (୴ page 334). Overloading the tires can tires are rated can lead to sudden tire overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. failure, causing loss of vehicle control and ț At the tire manufacturer’s option, any Overloading the tires can also result in han- possibly resulting in an accident and/or tire with a speed capability above dling or steering problems, or brake failure. personal injury and possible death, for you 149 mph (240 km/h) can include a and for others. “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, Information Provided by:Provided Information 350 Operation Tires and wheels the service description for the tire must ț Any tire with a speed capability above i Not all M+S rated tires provide special win- be referred to. The service description 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a ter performance. Make sure the tires you use is comprised of the tire load rating 5 “ZR” in the size designation AND the show M+S and the mountain/snow- (୴ page 348) and the tire speed service description must be placed in flake.marking on the tire sidewall. These rating 6 (୴ page 348). parenthesis. tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers As- Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). If your tire includes “ZR” in the size sociation (RMA) and the Rubber Association of designation and no service The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifi- designates the maximum speed capa- description 5 and 6 (୴ page 348) is cally for use in snow conditions. given, the tire manufacturer must be bility of the tire as being above consulted for the maximum speed ca- 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire pability. manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire. If a service description 5 and 6 All-season and winter tires (୴ page 348) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in Index Speed rating the service description. QM+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y. 1 In this example, “97Y” is the service TM+S up to 118 mph (190 km/h) description. The letter “Y” designates HM+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) the speed rating and the speed capabil- VM+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). 1 or M+S.for winter tires

Information Provided by:Provided Information 351 Operation Tires and wheels

Load identification Light Load: designates a light load tire. C, D, E: designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

U.S. tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. 1 DOT 2 Manufacturer’s identification mark 1 Load identification The TIN is a unique identifier which facili- 3 Tire size tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify i For illustration purposes only. Actual data 4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary purchasers in recall situations or other manufacturer) safety matters concerning tires and gives from data shown in above illustration. 5 Date of manufacture purchasers the means to easily identify In addition to tire load rating, special load such tires. i For illustration purposes only. Actual data identification 1 may be molded into the on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary tire sidewall following the letter designat- The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s from data shown in above illustration. ing the tire speed rating 6 (୴ page 348). identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”. No specification given: absence of any text DOT (Department of Transportation) (like in above example) indicates a A tire branding symbol 1 (୴ page 352) standard load (SL) tire. which denotes the tire meets require- XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor- (or reinforced) tire. tation. Information Provided by:Provided Information 352 Operation Tires and wheels

Manufacturer’s identification mark The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full Warning! G The manufacturer’s identification mark 2 (୴ page 352) denotes the tire week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the manufacturer. specified load limit or total load limit as indi- For example, “3202” represents the 32nd New tires have a mark with two symbols. cated on the Tire and Loading Information week of 2002. placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym- (୴ page 334). Overloading the tires can bols. For more information on retreaded Maximum tire load overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. tires (୴ page 331). Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure. Tire size The code (୴ page 352) indicates the 3 For more information on tire load rating tire size. (୴ page 349). Tire type code For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities (୴ page 336). The code 4 (୴ page 352) may, at the option of the manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire. 1 Maximum tire load rating i For illustration purposes only. Actual data Date of manufacture on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary The date of manufacture 5 (୴ page 352) from data shown in above illustration. identifies the week and year of manufac- The maximum tire load is the maximum ture. weight the tires are designed to support.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 353 Operation Tires and wheels

Maximum tire inflation pressure Warning! G

Never exceed the max. tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires 1 Treadwear 2 Traction 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation can adversely affect handling and ride com- 3 Temperature resistance pressure fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation For illustration purposes only. Actual data For illustration purposes only. Actual data i i (blowout) because they are more likely to on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary become punctured or damaged by road from data shown in above illustration. from data shown in above illustration. debris, potholes etc. Quality grades can be found, where appli- This is the maximum permissible tire cable, on the tire sidewall between tread inflation pressure for the tire. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards shoulder and maximum section width. For Always follow the recommended tire (U.S. vehicles) example: inflation pressure (୴ page 339) for proper tire inflation. Tire manufacturers are required to grade Treadwear Traction Temperature tires based on three performance 200 AA A factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 354 Operation Tires and wheels

All passenger car tires must conform to surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard federal safety requirements in addition to marked C may have poor traction perfor- No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher these grades. mance. levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by Treadwear law. Warning! G The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when The traction grade assigned to this tire is Warning! G tested under controlled conditions on a based on straight-ahead braking traction specified government test course. For ex- tests, and does not include acceleration, The temperature grade for this tire is estab- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction lished for a tire that is properly inflated and 1 and one-half (1 /2) times as well on the characteristics. not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin- government course as a tire graded 100. flation, or excessive loading, either sepa- The relative performance of tires depends Temperature rately or in combination, can cause upon the actual conditions of their use, excessive heat build-up and possible tire however, and may depart significantly The temperature grades are A (the high- failure. from the norm due to variations in driving est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- habits, service practices and differences in tance to the generation of heat and its road characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor Traction laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire The traction grades, from highest to low- to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep- cessive temperature can lead to sudden resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet tire failure. The grade C corresponds to the pavement as measured under controlled minimum level of performance which all conditions on specified government test passenger car tires must meet under the Information Provided by:Provided Information 355 Operation Tires and wheels

Tire ply material Tire and loading terminology Bar Another metric unit for air pressure. There Accessory weight are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) The combined weight (in excess of those to 1 bar. standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, Bead power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped these items are available as by steel cords that hold the tire onto the factory-installed equipment (whether rim. installed or not). 1 Plies in sidewall Cold tire inflation pressure 2 Plies under tread Air pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle i For illustration purposes only. Actual data The amount of air inside the tire pressing has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driv- on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary outward on each square inch of the tire. en no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). from data shown in above illustration. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per This marking tells you about the type of square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or Curb weight cord and number of plies in the sidewall bars. The weight of a motor vehicle with stan- and under the tread. dard equipment including the maximum Aspect ratio capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so Dimensional relationship between tire equipped, air conditioning and additional section height and section width optional equipment, but without passen- expressed in percentage. gers and cargo.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 356 Operation Tires and wheels

DOT (Department of Transportation) GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) Maximum tire inflation pressure A tire branding symbol which denotes the This is the maximum permissible vehicle This number is the greatest amount of air tire meets requirements of the weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of pressure that should ever be put in the tire U.S. Department of Transportation. the vehicle including all options, passen- under normal driving conditions. gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certi- Normal occupant weight fication label located on the driver’s door The GAWR is the maximum permissible The number of occupants the vehicle is B-pillar. axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on designed to seat, multiplied by each axle must never exceed the GAWR for 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Kilopascal (kPa) the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s The metric unit for air pressure. There are Occupant distribution door B-pillar. 6.9 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 psi; another The distribution of occupants in a vehicle metric unit for air pressure is bars. There at their designated seating positions. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. The GVW comprises the weight of the Production options weight Maximum load rating vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, The combined weight of those installed installed accessories, passengers and The maximum load in kilograms and regular production options weighing over cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue pounds that can be carried by the tire. 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those load. The GVW must never exceed the standard items which they replace, not GVWR indicated on the certification label Maximum loaded vehicle weight previously considered in curb weight or located on the driver’s door B-pillar. The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, accessory weight, including heavy duty total load limit, and production options brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty weight. battery, and special trim.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 357 Operation Tires and wheels

PSI (Pounds per square inch) TIN (Tire Identification Number) Tire speed rating A standard unit of measure for air pressure Unique identifier which facilitates efforts Part of tire designation; indicates the -> bar, kilopascal (kPa). by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers speed range for which a tire is approved. in recall situations or other safety matters Recommended tire inflation pressure concerning tires and gives purchases the Total load limit means to easily identify such tires. The TIN The recommended tire inflation pressure is Rated cargo and luggage load plus is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica- listed on Tire and Loading Information 68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” placard located on driver’s door B-pillar for designated seating capacity. and “Date of manufacture”. normal driving conditions and provides best handling, tread life and riding com- Traction Tire load rating fort. If so equipped, supplemental informa- Force exerted by the vehicle on the road tion pertaining to special driving situations Numerical code associated with the via the tires. The amount of grip provided. can be found on the tire inflation pressure maximum load a tire can support. label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Tread Tire ply composition and material used Rim The portion of a tire that comes into This indicates the number of plies or the contact with the road. A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in assembly upon which the tire beads are the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac- Treadwear indicators seated. turers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which include Narrow bands, sometimes called Sidewall steel, nylon, polyester, and others. “wear bars” that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread The portion of a tire between the tread and 16 remains. the bead.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 358 Operation Tires and wheels

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles Rotate tires before the characteristic tire A tire information system that provides with tires of the same dimension all wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, around. If your vehicle is equipped with wear on front tires and tread center wear temperature and treadwear. Ratings are tires of the same dimension all around, on rear tires). determined by tire manufacturers using tires can be rotated, observing a Thoroughly clean the mounting face of government testing procedures. The front-to-rear rotation pattern that will wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side ratings are molded into the sidewall of the maintain the intended rotation (spinning) of the wheels/tires, during each rotation. ୴ page 334). tire. direction of the tire ( Check for and ensure proper tire inflation In some cases, such as when your vehicle pressure. Vehicle maximum load on the tire is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation Load on an individual tire that is Warning! G is not possible. determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configu- Have the tightening torque checked after weight and dividing it by two. ration, tires can be rotated according to changing a wheel. Wheels could become the tire manufacturer’s recommended in- loose if not tightened with a torque of Rotating tires tervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). pamphlet located in your vehicle literature Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel portfolio. If none is available, tires should bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims. Warning! G be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces- For information on wheel change, see the Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires sary, according to the degree of tire wear. “Practical hints” section (୴ page 440). are of the same dimension. The same rotation (spinning) direction If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size must be maintained (୴ page 334). tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible. Information Provided by:Provided Information 359 Operation Winter driving

Before the onset of winter, have your Winter tires vehicle winterized at an authorized Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Center. This service Always use winter tires at temperatures includes: below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry Winter tires with a tread depth of less than 1 road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated /6 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no ț Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze tires provide special winter performance. longer suitable for winter operation. concentration. Make sure the tires you use show the ț Addition of cleaning concentrate to the mountain/snowflake.marking on the Always observe the speed rating of the water of the windshield and headlamp tire sidewall. These tires meet specific winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the cleaning* system. Add MB Windshield snow traction performance requirements maximum speed for which your tires are Washer Concentrate “MB Summerfit” of the Rubber Manufacturers Association rated is below the speed rating of your to a premixed windshield washer sol- (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Can- vehicle, you must place a notice to this vent/antifreeze which is formulated for ada (RAC) and have been designed specif- effect where it will be seen by the driver. below freezing temperatures ically for use in snow conditions. Use of Such notices are available at your tire (୴ page 485). winter tires is the only way to achieve the dealer or any authorized Mercedes-Benz ț Battery test. Battery capacity drops maximum effectiveness of the ABS, EBP, Center. ® with decreasing ambient temperature. ESP and 4MATIC in winter operation. A well charged battery helps to make For safe handling, make sure all mounted sure the engine can be started, even at winter tires are of the same make and have low ambient temperatures. the same tread design. ț Tire change.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 360 Operation Winter driving

Snow chains ț Only use snow chains that are Warning! G approved by Mercedes-Benz. Any ! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clear- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will If you use your spare tire when winter tires ance for snow chains. To help avoid serious dam- be glad to advise you on this subject. are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that age to your vehicle or tires, make sure that the ț the difference in tire characteristics may use of snow chains is permissible as specified in Use of snow chains may be prohibited very well impair turning stability and that the Technical data section of this Operator’s depending on location. Always check ୴ overall driving stability may be reduced. Manual, see “Rims and tires” ( page 467). local and state laws before installing snow chains. Adapt your driving style accordingly. Snow chains should only be driven on ț Have the spare tire replaced with a winter snow-covered roads at speeds not to Do not use snow chains on the spare ୴ tire at the nearest authorized exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains wheel ( page 467). as soon as possible when driving on roads Mercedes-Benz Center. When driving with snow chains, you may without snow. i wish to deactivate the ESP® (୴ page 63) before Please observe the following guidelines setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve when using snow chains: the vehicle’s traction. ț Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations (୴ page 467). ț Use snow chains in pairs and on rear wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions. ! If snow chains are mounted to the front wheels, they may scrape against the body or axle components. The tires or the vehicle could be damaged as a result. Information Provided by:Provided Information 361 Operation Maintenance

We strongly recommend that you have Next Service A Due in XXXX miles (km) i The Maintenance System in your vehicle your vehicle serviced at an authorized Next Service A Due in XXX days tracks distance driven and the time elapsed Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with Service A Due since the last maintenance service and calcu- the Maintenance Booklet at the times lates other maintenance service work required. called for by the maintenance service i The maintenance service indicator message indicator. is automatically cleared ! Failure to have the vehicle maintained in ț after approximately 10 seconds when you accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and switch on the ignition or when reaching the maintenance service indicator at the designated maintenance service threshold while driving times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not The type of maintenance service due is ț after approximately 30 seconds, once the covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited indicated in the message that appears in suggested maintenance service term has Warranty. the multifunction display: passed You can also clear it yourself. Maintenance service indicator A Basic service ̈ To clear the maintenance service message (approximately 1 hour) indicator message: Press The maintenance service indicator B Extended service button L or button # on the message will notify you when the next (approximately 8 hours) multifunction steering wheel maintenance service is due. (୴ page 152). An additional number or a further letter in Starting approximately 1 month before the combination with the maintenance type The maintenance service indicator next maintenance service is due, one of can be indicated. This indicates that message is cleared and the standard the following messages will appear in the further auxiliary maintenance work is display appears in the multifunction ୴ multifunction display while you are driving required. Contact an authorized display ( page 151). or when you switch on the ignition Mercedes-Benz Center for more (example service A): information.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 362 Operation Maintenance

Maintenance service term exceeded ̈ Switch on the ignition. Resetting the maintenance service indicator If you have exceeded the suggested main- The standard display of the control sys- tenance service term, you will see the fol- tem appears (୴ page 156). In the event that the maintenance service lowing message in the multifunction ̈ Press ( or & on multifunction on your vehicle is not carried out at an display: steering wheel to select Service menu. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can Service A Exceeded by XXXX miles (km) ̈ Press % or $ to select the main- have the maintenance service indicator Service A Exceeded by XXX days tenance service indicator display. reset. The automotive maintenance facility In addition, a signal sounds when the mes- carrying out the maintenance service will ̈ Press #. sage appears. find the information for resetting the The service deadline appears in the maintenance service indicator in the Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will multifunction display. maintenance-relevant information for your reset the maintenance service indicator vehicle. Such information is available from following a completed maintenance i If the battery is disconnected, the days of either your authorized Mercedes-Benz service. disconnection will not be included in the count Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz. shown by the maintenance service indicator. Calling up the maintenance service To arrive at the true maintenance service i If the maintenance service indicator was deadline, you will need to subtract these days indicator display inadvertently reset, have an authorized from the days shown in the maintenance service Mercedes-Benz Center correct it. indicator message or maintenance service i The menu overview can be found on indicator display. Only reset if the proper maintenance service has (୴ page 154). been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper service as called for by You can call up the maintenance service in- the maintenance service indicator will result in dicator display at any time to check when engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not the next maintenance service is due. covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 363 Operation Vehicle care

Cleaning and care of vehicle Such damage is caused not only by More frequent washings are necessary to extreme and varying climatic conditions, deal with unfavorable conditions: Regular and proper care will help to main- but also by: ț near the ocean tain the value of your vehicle. The best way ț Air pollution to protect your vehicle from harmful envi- ț in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust ronmental influences is to wash it and use ț Road salt emissions) protective treatments regularly. ț Tar ț during winter operation G ț Gravel and stone chipping You should check your vehicle from time to Warning! time for stone chipping or other damage. To avoid paint damage, you should imme- Any damage should be repaired as soon as diately remove: Many cleaning products can be hazardous. possible to prevent corrosion. Some are poisonous, others are flammable. ț Grease and oil Always follow the instructions on the partic- In doing so, do not neglect the underbody ț ular container. Always open your vehicle’s Fuel of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a doors or windows when cleaning the inside. ț Coolant thorough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- ț Brake fluid inspection. Damaged areas need to be signed for cleaning your vehicle. ț Bird droppings re-undercoated. Always lock away cleaning products and ț Your vehicle has been treated at the facto- keep them out of reach of children. Insects ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body ț Tree resins, etc. cavities which will last for the lifetime of While in operation, even while parked, your Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi- the vehicle. Post-production treatment is vehicle is subjected to varying external in- nates the aggressiveness and potency of neither necessary nor recommended by fluences which, if gone unchecked, can the above adverse influences. Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle underbody and cause lasting damage. Information Provided by:Provided Information 364 Operation Vehicle care of incompatibility between materials used Power washer Paintwork, painted body components in the production process and others ap- Follow the instructions provided by the pow- Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or plied later. ! ! er washer manufacturer on maintaining a dis- similar materials to painted body components We have selected car-care products and tance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the may damage the paintwork. power washer. compiled recommendations which are Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care specially matched to our vehicles and Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. should be applied when water drops on the The intense jet of water can result in damage to which always reflect the latest technology. paint surface do not “bead up”. This should the tire. You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved normally be done every 3 to 5 months, de- car-care products at an authorized Always replace a damaged tire. pending on the climate and washing deter- Mercedes-Benz Center. Always keep the jet of water moving across the gent used. Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner damage due to negligent or incorrect care parts. should be applied if the paint surface cannot always be removed or repaired with shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of the car-care products recommended here. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: gloss). In such cases it is best to seek aid at an au- If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close prox- Do not apply any of these products or wax imity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi- if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the The following topics deal with the cleaning mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently hood is still hot. and care of your vehicle and give important locked or unlocked. “how-to” information as well as references ̈ Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care Tar stains Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from products. Quickly remove tar stains before they dry stones, vehicle doors, etc.). and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 365 Operation Vehicle care

Engine cleaning Vehicle washing Hand-wash Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle make sure to protect electrical compo- of road salt as soon as possible. in direct sunlight. nents and connectors from contact with When washing the vehicle underbody, do ̈ Only use a mild car wash detergent, water and cleaning agents. not forget to clean the inner sides of the such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Corrosion protection, such as wheels. Shampoo. MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied ̈ Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif- to the engine compartment after every i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only): If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and fused jet of water. engine cleaning. Before applying, all a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close prox- control linkage bushings and joints should imity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi- Direct only a very weak spray towards be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pul- mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently the ventilation intake. leys should be protected from any wax. locked or unlocked. ̈ Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently. ̈ Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish. ! Do not use scouring agents on these parts. Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle. Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cloth or sponge. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 366 Operation Vehicle care

Automatic car wash i After running the vehicle through an auto- Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers, turn signal lenses You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield (୴ page 368). This will prevent smears ̈ matic car wash from the start. Automatic and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by Use a mild car wash detergent, such as car washes without brushes are prefera- residual wax on the windshield. Mercedes-Benz approved Car ble. Shampoo, with plenty of water. When leaving the car wash, make sure the mir- ̈ To protect the filter system, switch the rors are folded out. Otherwise they may vibrate. ! Only use window cleaning solutions that are automatic climate control to air recir- suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window clean- culation mode (୴ page 265). Ornamental moldings ing solutions which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. There- ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic For regular cleaning and care of ornamen- fore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners touchless car wash which uses caustic spray. tal moldings, use a damp cloth. that contain solvents. Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the Never apply strong force and only use a soft, paint or ornamental moldings. ! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental moldings. Although ornamental moldings may non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses. If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it be- have chrome appearance, they could be made of Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry fore running it through the automatic car anodized aluminum that will be damaged when cloth or sponge. wash. cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings. surface. ! Make sure the windshield wiper switch is For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you ୴ set to 0 ( page 117). Otherwise, e.g. the rain are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome clean- sensor* could activate and cause the wipers to er. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle chrome-plated, contact an authorized damage. Mercedes-Benz Center. Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 367 Operation Vehicle care

Cleaning the windows and the wiper Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* Cleaning blades (Canada only): ! The windshield wipers must be in a vertical ̈ Make sure the vehicle’s on-board elec- Warning! G position before folding them away from the wind- tronics have status 1 (୴ page 84). shield. They could otherwise damage the hood. For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- ̈ Turn combination switch to wiper move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi- Never open the hood when the wiper arms are setting u (୴ page 117). folded forward. cles with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only): ̈ Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electron- ̈ Make sure the hood is fully closed. repeatedly until windshield wipers ics have status 0) before cleaning the wind- start. shield and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, Placing wiper arms in vertical position ̈ Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and Vehicles with SmartKey: when the wiper arms are in a vertical cause injury. ̈ Turn SmartKey in starter switch position. position 1. ̈ Fold the wiper arms forward until they ̈ Turn combination switch to wiper snap into place. setting u (୴ page 117). ! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They ̈ With wiper arm in vertical position, turn could tear. the SmartKey in starter switch to ̈ Clean the wiper blade inserts with a position 0. clean cloth and detergent solution. ̈ Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window cleaning solution on all outside and inside glass surfaces. An automotive glass cleaner is recommended. Information Provided by:Provided Information 368 Operation Vehicle care

! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto Cleaning the panorama roof with Chrome-plated exhaust tip* tilt/sliding panel* the windshield before turning the SmartKey in Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plat- the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a ed exhaust tips will help to maintain their (Canada only)). protective layer on the inside. shine and the classy appearance. Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm ̈ Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild ̈ Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome back. If released, the force of the impact from window cleaning solution. Polishing Paste each time the vehicle the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. An automotive glass cleaner is recom- has been washed, especially during the ! To clean the window interior, do not use a mended. winter. dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners con- Do not use alkaline cleaners such as wheel Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents ! taining solvents. Do not touch the inside of the ! cleaners as they could cause corrosion. front, rear or side windows with hard objects or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may the protective layer with hard objects such as an damage the windows. ice scraper or ring. Never apply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the rear part of the tilt/sliding panel. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the protective layer.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 369 Operation Vehicle care

Light alloy wheels Plastic and rubber parts ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on If possible, clean wheels once a week. ̈ Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or these parts. mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Never apply strong force and only use a soft, ̈ Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel washing solution. non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry spray of water for cleaning the light al- ̈ Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke- cloth or sponge. loy wheels. warm solution. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the surface. ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid The surface may temporarily change may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat. color. If this is the case, wait for it to dry. Hard plastic trim items The vehicle should not be parked for an ! ̈ extended period of time immediately after it has Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims Warning! G Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner. with light pressure. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads. ! Never apply strong force and only use a soft, containing solvents to clean the cockpit or Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. the wheel paint if the car is not driven after the steering wheel. Cleaners containing sol- Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry cleaning. vents will make the surface porous and vehi- cloth or sponge. cle occupants could suffer serious injuries Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system should al- Otherwise you may scratch or damage the sur- ways be warmed-up before it is parked after from plastic parts coming loose in the event face. cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle for of air bag deployment. several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care products, take care not to spray them on the brake disks.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 370 Operation Vehicle care

Audio display Steering wheel Headliner and shelf below rear window ! You must switch off the audio display and al- ̈ Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor- ̈ Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham- low it to cool prior to cleaning. oughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt. approved Leather Care. ̈ If you need to clean the audio display Seat belts screen, use a standard microfiber cloth Carpets and cleaning agent for TFT/LCD dis- ̈ Only use clear, lukewarm water and plays. After cleaning, dry and polish the ̈ Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet soap. screen with a dry microfiber cloth. and Fabric Care for cleaning the car- The webbing must not be treated with pets. ! ! Do not use thinners containing alcohol, chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the web- petrol or abrasive cleaning agents. These can bing at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in damage or even destroy the audio display direct sunlight. screen. Warning! G

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 371 Operation Vehicle care

Upholstery Leather upholstery Wood trims Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing ̈ Wipe leather upholstery with a damp ̈ Dampen cloth using water and use clothing that have the tendency to give off cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with damp cloth to clean wood trims in your coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause Mercedes-Benz approved Leather vehicle. the upholstery to become permanently dis- Care. Do not use solvents like tar remover or colored. By lining the seats with a proper ! Exercise particular care when cleaning per- wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these intermediate cover, contact-discoloration forated leather as its underside should not may be abrasive. will be prevented. become wet.

Warning! G

Only use seat or head restraint covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat or head restraint covers may interfere with or prevent the activation of the active head restraints. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 372 Practical hints What to do if …? Where will I find ...? Unlocking/locking in an emergency Resetting activated head restraints Replacing SmartKey batteries Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Battery Jump starting Towing the vehicle Fuses

Information Provided by:Provided Information 373 Practical hints What to do if …?

Lamps in instrument cluster

General information: If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary.

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution - The yellow Antilock The ABS has detected a malfunction and ̈ Continue driving with added caution. Brake System (ABS) has switched off. The BAS, ESP® and EBP Wheels will lock during hard braking, re- indicator lamp comes on are also switched off (see messages in mul- ducing steering capability. while the engine is tifunction display). ̈ Read and observe messages in the mul- running. The brake system is still functioning nor- tifunction display (୴ page 387). mally but without the systems specified ̈ Have the system checked at an autho- above. rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, possible. other systems such as navigation system* Failure to follow these instructions or the automatic transmission* may also be increases the risk of an accident. malfunctioning.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 374 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution - The yellow Antilock The charging voltage has fallen below ̈ Switch off electrical consumers that are Brake System (ABS) 10 volts. The ABS has switched off. The currently not needed, e.g. seat heat- indicator lamp comes on BAS, ESP® and EBP are also switched off ing*. while the engine is (see messages in the multifunction display) ̈ If necessary, have the generator and running. The battery may not be charged sufficiently. battery checked. When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out. - The yellow ABS indicator The ABS is temporarily not available. The ̈ Drive a short distance with added lamp comes on while the ESP®, BAS and EBP are also unavailable. caution at a vehicle speed of above engine is running. The system’s self-diagnosis may not be 12 mph (20 km/h). completed yet. When the ABS indicator lamp goes out, the ABS, ESP®, BAS and EBP are avail- The brake system is still functioning nor- able again. mally but without the systems specified If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: above. ̈ Continue driving with added caution. ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 375 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution - The yellow ABS malfunc- ABS and ESP® are switched off due to a ̈ Continue driving with added caution. v tion indicator lamp and malfunction. Wheels may lock during hard braking, the yellow ESP® warning reducing steering capability. The BAS and EBP are also switched off. lamp come on while the ̈ Read and observe messages in the mul- engine is running and an The brake system is still functioning nor- tifunction display (୴ page 387). acoustic warning sounds. mally but without the ABS available. ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. ; The red brake warning A malfunction in the Electronic Brake Pro- ̈ Continue driving with added caution. (USA only) lamp comes on while the portioning (EBP) was detected. The ABS, Wheels may lock during hard braking, ® 3 engine is running. In addi- BAS and ESP are also switched off (see reducing steering capability. (Canada only) tion, the yellow ABS mal- messages in multifunction display). ̈ Read and observe messages in the mul- function indicator lamp, The brake system continues to function tifunction display (୴ page 387). - ® and the yellow ESP normally, but without electronic support. v warning lamp come on ̈ Have the system checked at an autho- and an acoustic warning rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as sounds. possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 376 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution ; The red brake warning You are driving with the parking brake set. ̈ Release the parking brake (USA only) lamp comes on while the (୴ page 130). 3 engine is running and an acoustic warning sounds. (Canada only) The red brake warning There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- Risk of accident! lamp comes on while the voir. ̈ Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe loca- engine is running. tion or as soon as it is safe to do so. ̈ Depress the parking brake (୴ page 134). ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ̈ Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

Do not add brake fluid before checking the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake Warning! G fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or brake system. below, have the brake system checked for brake Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi- Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can re- pad thickness and leaks. nated can result in an accident. Have your sult in spilling brake fluid on hot engine brake system checked immediately if the parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You brake warning lamp stays on. can be seriously burned.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 377 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution ± The yellow engine malfunc- There is a malfunction in: ̈ Have the vehicle checked as soon as tion indicator lamp comes possible at an authorized ț The fuel management system on while driving. Mercedes-Benz Center. ț The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is ț The emission control system used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. ț Systems which affect emissions It allows the accurate identification of Such malfunctions may result in excessive system malfunctions through the read- emissions values and may switch the en- out of diagnostic trouble codes. It is lo- gine to its limp-home (emergency opera- cated in the front left area of the tion) mode. footwell next to the parking brake pedal. i In some states you may be required by law to have the vehicle serviced as soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local requirements.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 378 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution ± The yellow engine malfunc- A loss of pressure has been detected in the ̈ Check the fuel cap. tion indicator lamp comes fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed If it is not closed properly: on while driving. properly or the fuel system may be leaky. ̈ Close the fuel cap. If it is closed properly: ̈ Have the fuel system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. v The yellow ESP® warning The ESP® has been switched off with the ̈ Switch the ESP® back on (୴ page 64). lamp comes on while the ESP® switch or has been switched off due Exceptions: (୴ page 63). engine is running. to a malfunction. ̈ If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt Risk of accident! your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions. When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the system recogniz- If the ESP® cannot be switched on: es that the vehicle starts to skid or that a ̈ Continue driving with added caution. wheel is spinning. ̈ Observer additional messages that may The cruise control is deactivated and can- appear in the multifunction display not be switched on. (୴ page 389). ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 379 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution v The yellow ESP® warning The ESP® or traction system has come ̈ When driving off, apply as little throttle as pos- lamp flashes while driving. into operation because of detected trac- sible. tion loss in at least one tire. ̈ While driving, ease up on the accelerator. The cruise control is deactivated. ̈ Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions. ̈ Do not deactivate the ESP®. Exceptions: (୴ page 63). Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident. 4 The yellow fuel tank re- The fuel level has gone below the reserve ̈ Refuel at the next gas station (୴ page 322). serve warning lamp in the mark. fuel gauge comes on while driving. < The red seat belt telltale The seat belt telltale reminds you and your ̈ Fasten your seat belts. comes on for a maximum passengers to fasten your seat belts be- Regardless of whether the seat belts are fas- of 6 seconds after starting fore driving off. tened or not, the seat belt telltale always the engine. comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after starting the engine.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 380 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution < You hear a warning chime for You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt. ̈ Fasten your seat belt. a maximum of 6 seconds af- The warning chime stops sounding. ter starting the engine. < The red seat belt telltale You and/or your front passenger have forgot- ̈ Fasten your seat belts. comes on while the vehicle is ten to fasten your seat belts. The seat belt telltale goes out. standing still and the engine is running or during driving. There are items placed on the front passenger ̈ Remove the items from the front pas- seat and therefore the system senses the front senger seat and put them in a safe passenger seat as being occupied. place. The seat belt telltale goes out. < During driving the red seat The vehicle’s speed has exceeded 15 mph ̈ Fasten your seat belts. belt telltale flashes and you (25 km/h) and you and/or your front passen- The seat belt telltale goes out and the additionally hear an intermit- ger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts. warning chime stops sounding. tent warning chime with increasing intensity. There are items placed on the front passenger ̈ Remove the items from the front pas- seat and therefore the system senses the front senger seat and put them in a safe passenger seat as being occupied. place. The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding. i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the or the vehicle is standing still and a front door is belt the warning chime stops sounding and the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are fas- opened. seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. tened, Information Provided by:Provided Information 381 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution = The red SRS indicator lamp There is a malfunction in the supplemental ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest comes on while driving. restraint systems. The air bags or Emergen- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. cy Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.

Warning! G

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be deployed when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 382 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution H Combination low tire The TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, pressure/TPMS malfunction least one tire. avoiding abrupt steering and braking telltale for the TPMS illuminates maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation continuously. around you. ̈ Read and observe messages in the multifunction display. If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes driving. H Combination low tire There is a malfunction in the TPMS. ̈ Read and observe messages in the pressure/TPMS malfunction multifunction display. telltale for the TPMS flashes ̈ Have the TPMS checked at an autho- 60 seconds and then stays rized Mercedes-Benz Center. illuminated. After the malfunction has been remedied the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after few minutes driving.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 383 Practical hints What to do if …?

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has Your vehicle has also been equipped with a Warning! G been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate Each tire, including the spare (if provided), ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire when the system is not operating properly. should be checked monthly when cold and pressure telltale when one or more of your The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- inflated to the inflation pressure recom- tires is significantly underinflated. Accord- bined with the low tire pressure telltale. mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- When the system detects a malfunction, the Tire and Loading Information placard on the minates, you should stop and check your telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute driver’s door B-pillar (୴ page 334) or, if tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to and then remain continuously illuminated. available, the tire inflation pressure label on the proper pressure. Driving on a significant- This sequence will continue upon subse- the inside of the fuel filler flap (୴ page 322). ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- If your vehicle has tires of a different size heat and can lead to tire failure. function exists. When the malfunction than the size indicated on the Tire and Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency indicator is illuminated, the system may not Loading Information placard or the tire and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- be able to detect or signal low tire pressure inflation pressure label, you should deter- cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please as intended. mine the proper tire inflation pressure for note that the TPMS is not a substitute for TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety those tires. proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- of reasons, including the installation of er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire replacement or alternate tires or wheels on pressure, even if underinflation has not the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from reached the level to trigger illumination of functioning properly. Always check the the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 384 Practical hints What to do if …?

Air bag off indicator lamp

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution 5/ The front passenger front air bag off in- The system is malfunctioning. ̈ Have the system checked as soon as dicator lamp illuminates and remains il- possible at an authorized luminated with the weight of a typical Mercedes-Benz Center. adult or someone larger than a small in- ̈ Also read and observe any messages in dividual on the front passenger seat. the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (୴ page 387).

Warning! G

If the 5/ and remains illuminated with the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual on the front passenger seat, do not have any passenger use the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 385 Practical hints What to do if …?

Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution 5/ The front passenger front air The system is malfunctioning. ̈ Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion bag off indicator lamp does and child seat and check installation of the child not illuminate and/or does seat. not remain illuminated with ̈ Make sure no objects applying supplemental the weight of a typical weight onto the seat are present. 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less on ̈ If the front passenger front air bag off indicator the front passenger seat. lamp remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired. ̈ Also read and observe any messages in the multifunction display and follow corrective steps (୴ page 387).

child restraint or less on the front passenger Warning! G seat, do not transport a child on the front If the 5/ indicator lamp does not il- passenger seat until the system has been luminate or remains out with the weight of a repaired. typical 12-month-old child in a standard

Information Provided by:Provided Information 386 Practical hints What to do if …?

Vehicle status messages in the multi- Certain messages of high priority cannot function display be cleared from the multifunction display Warning! G using # or L on the multifunction Warning and malfunction messages ap- steering wheel (୴ page 152). No messages will be displayed if either the pear in the multifunction display located in instrument cluster or the multifunction dis- Other messages of high priority and mes- the instrument cluster. play is inoperative. sages of less immediate priority can be Certain warning and malfunction messag- cleared from the multifunction display As a result, you will not be able to see infor- es are accompanied by an audible signal. using # or L. They are then stored mation about your driving conditions, such in the vehicle status message memory as speed or outside temperature, warn- High-priority messages are shown in red ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning on the multifunction display. Messages of (୴ page 164). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message dis- messages or the failure of any systems. lower priority are also shown in yellow or Driving characteristics may be impaired. white. appear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the If you must continue to drive, please do so Address these messages accordingly and message to appear. with added caution. Contact an authorized follow the additional instructions given in Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. this Operator’s Manual.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 387 Practical hints What to do if …?

On the pages that follow, you will find a Warning! G compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may ap- All categories of messages contain impor- pear in the malfunction display. tant information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, ad- For your convenience the messages are di- dressed as soon as possible at an autho- vided into two sections: rized Mercedes-Benz Center. ț Text messages (୴ page 389) Failure to repair condition noted may cause ț Symbol messages (୴ page 397) damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury. i Switching on the ignition causes all instrument cluster lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 388 Practical hints What to do if …?

Text messages

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution ABS and ESP ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. ̈ Drive a short distance with gentle turns above a Currently Unavailable BAS and the hill start assist are also switched off. It speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). See Operator’s Manual is possible that the self-diagnostics have not yet The message disappears when ABS and ESP® been completed. are again available. The brake system still functions normally. The ABS and ESP® were deactivated because of in- When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS sufficient power supply. The charging voltage has and ESP® are operational again and the message in fallen below 10 volts. BAS and the hill start assist are the multifunction display should disappear. also deactivated. If the message in the multifunction display does not The brake system still functions normally but without disappear: the ABS and ESP® available. ̈ Have the generator (alternator) and the battery checked. ABS and ESP ABS and ESP® are switched off due to a malfunction. ̈ Continue driving with added caution. Wheels Inoperative BAS and the hill start assist are also switched off. may lock during hard braking, reducing steering See Operator’s Manual capability. The brake system still functions normally but without the ABS and ESP® available. ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 389 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Cruise control You have tried to switch on cruise control ̈ If traffic conditions allow, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) - - - mph below a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). and save the speed. (USA only) Cruise control The automatic transmission* is in position ̈ Move the gear selector lever to position D (୴ page 140). - - - km/h P, R or N. (Canada only) ESP® is switched off. ̈ Switch on ESP® (୴ page 64). The system is overheated. ̈ Wait until the system cools down. Cruise Control and Cruise control is malfunctioning. In addition ̈ Have the cruise control checked at an authorized Speedtronic a warning chime sounds. Mercedes-Benz Center. Inoperative Check, There was a warning message about a loss ̈ Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each Tire Pressure in tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat In- tire (୴ page 339). Then Restart dicator has not been restarted yet. ̈ Then restart the Run Flat Indicator (୴ page 343). Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) Run Flat Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning. ̈ Have the Run Flat Indicator checked at an authorized Indicator Mercedes-Benz Center. Inoperative (Canada only)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 390 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Check The Run Flat Indicator indicates that the ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering Tire Pressure Soon pressure is too low in one or more tires. and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around (Canada only) you. ̈ Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure as required (୴ page 339). ̈ If necessary, change the wheel (୴ page 440). ̈ Restart the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (୴ page 343).

Warning! G

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 391 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Shift You have turned off the engine with the ̈ Place the gear selector lever in position P. to P KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (Canada only) in gear selector lever position N and opened the driver’s door. or You have attempted to switch off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (Canada only) while the gear selector lever was in position R or D. Shift to P or N You have attempted to start the engine while the au- ̈ Move the gear selector lever to position P or N To Start Engine tomatic transmission* was set to position R or D. (୴ page 140). Tire Press. Monitor The TPMS is malfunctioning. ̈ Have the TPMS checked at an authorized Inoperative Mercedes-Benz Center. (USA only) Wheel Sensors Error There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors ̈ Have the TPMS checked at an authorized Tire Pressure Monitor mounted (e.g. winter tires). Mercedes-Benz Center. Inoperative ̈ Have the wheel sensors installed at an autho- (USA only) rized Mercedes-Benz Center. Tire Press. Monitor The TPMS is unable to monitor the tire pressure due ̈ As soon as the causes of the malfunction have Currently Unavailable to a nearby radio interference source. been removed, the TPMS automatically be- (USA only) comes active again after a few minutes driving.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 392 Practical hints What to do if …?

Information Provided by:Provided Information 393 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Front Passenger With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on (୴ page 82), Airbag Disabled ț the 5/ indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster should il- See Operator’s Manu- luminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (୴ page 41) al has deactivated the air bag. ț the message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator’s Man- ual or the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera- tor’s Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display. If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (୴ page 41), the 5/ indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out. If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warning! G front passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any If the 5/ indicator lamp remains passenger use the front passenger seat until illuminated with an adult occupant on the the system has been repaired. Information Provided by:Provided Information 394 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Front Passenger Front passenger front air bag is Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front Airbag Enabled activated while driving even passenger seat for the following: See Operator’s Manu- though a child, small individual, ̈ Switch off the ignition (୴ page 82). al or object below the system’s weight threshold is on the front ̈ Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly passenger seat, or the front pas- secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary. senger seat is empty. Objects ̈ Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. on the seat or forces acting on objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the the seat may make the system seat, head restraints pushing against roof, etc.). The system may recog- sense supplemental weight. nize such forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present. ̈ Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on the ignition (୴ page 82). Monitor the 5/ indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster (୴ page 45) and the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (୴ page 151) for the following: (Continued on next page)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 395 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Front Passenger With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on (୴ page 82), Airbag Enabled ț the 5/ indicator lamp right of the instrument cluster should il- See Operator’s Manu- luminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (୴ page 41) al has deactivated the air bag. ț the message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator’s Man- ual or the message Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera- tor’s Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display. If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (୴ page 41), the 5/ indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out. If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Symbol messages

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution - ABS and ESP ABS and ESP® are not available due to a ̈ Drive a short distance with gentle turns Currently Unavailable malfunction. BAS and the hill start assist above a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). See Operator’s Manual are also switched off. It is possible that the The message disappears when ABS and self-diagnostics have not yet been complet- ESP® are again available. ed. The brake system still functions normally. The ABS and ESP® were deactivated be- When the voltage is above this value again, cause of insufficient power supply. The the ABS and ESP® are operational again and charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts. the message in the multifunction display BAS and the hill start assist are also deacti- should disappear. vated. If the message in the multifunction display The brake system still functions normally does not disappear: but without the ABS and ESP® available. ̈ Have the generator (alternator) and the battery checked.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 397 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution - ABS and ESP ABS and ESP® are switched off due to a ̈ Continue driving with added caution. Inoperative malfunction. BAS and the hill start assist Wheels may lock during hard braking, re- See Operator’s Manual are also switched off. ducing steering capability. The brake system is still functioning nor- ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized mally but without the ABS available. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 398 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution # The battery is no longer charging. ̈ Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe loca- Possible causes: tion and check the poly-V-belt. ț alternator malfunctioning If it is broken: ț broken poly-V-belt ̈ Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. ̈ Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is intact: ̈ Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. There is a malfunction in the electronic sys- ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized tem. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. 2 Check The brake pads have reached their wear ̈ Have the brake pads replaced as soon as Brake Pad Wear limit. possible.

! Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 399 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution ; Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- Risk of accident! Brake Fluid Level voir. (USA only) ̈ Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe location or 3 as soon as it is safe to do so. (Canada only) ̈ Depress the parking brake (୴ page 134). ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter. ̈ Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake Warning! G fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake Driving with the message Check Brake pad thickness and leaks. Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 400 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution ; Release You are driving with the parking brake set. ̈ Release the parking brake (୴ page 130). (USA only) Parking Brake ! (Canada only) ; EBR, ABS, and ESP EBP, ABS and ESP® are switched off due to ̈ Continue driving with added caution. (USA only) Inoperative a malfunction. BAS and the hill start assist Wheels may lock during hard braking, re- 3 See Operator’s Manu- are also switched off. ducing steering capability. al The brake system still functions normally ̈ Have the system checked at an authorized (Canada only) but without the ABS and ESP® available. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible. Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 401 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution • Coolant Low The coolant is too hot. ̈ Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon Stop Vehicle! as it is safe to do so and immediately turn off Turn Engine Off the engine. ̈ Only start the engine again after the message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine. ̈ Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster (୴ page 26).

Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from ! The engine should not be operated with the Warning! G coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Do- other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of ing so may cause serious engine damage which ț Driving when your engine is overheated the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited can cause some fluids which may have until the engine has cooled down. Warranty. leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously During severe operating conditions, burned. e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem- ț Steam from an overheated engine can perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C). cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 402 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution • Coolant Low The poly-V-belt could be broken. ̈ Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon Stop Vehicle! as it is safe to do so and immediately turn off Turn Engine Off the engine. ̈ Check the poly-V-belt. If it is broken: ̈ Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. ̈ Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If it is intact: ̈ Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. ̈ Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster (୴ page 26). (Continued on next page)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 403 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution • Coolant Low ̈ Restart the engine. Stop Vehicle! If this message disappears from the multi- Turn Engine Off function display: ̈ Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If this message does not disappear from the multifunction display: ̈ Call Roadside Assistance. • The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunc- ̈ Observe the coolant temperature gauge in tioning. the instrument cluster (୴ page 26). ̈ Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 404 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution B Check The coolant level is too low. ̈ Add coolant (୴ page 329). Coolant Level ̈ If you have to add coolant frequently, have See Operator’s Manu- the cooling system checked at an autho- al rized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level Warning! G warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which ited Warranty. may burn if it comes into contact with hot Do not drive without a sufficient amount of cool- engine parts. You could be seriously burned. ant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 405 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution $ You are driving with one or more doors ̈ Close the doors. open. The display symbol shows you which doors are open. 4 Gas Cap Loose A loss of pressure has been detected in the ̈ Check the fuel cap (୴ page 322). fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed If it is not closed properly: properly or the fuel system may be leaky. ̈ Close the fuel cap. If it is closed properly: ̈ Have the fuel system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Reserve Fuel The fuel level has gone below the reserve Refuel at the next gas station (୴ page 322). Level mark. Y You are driving with the hood open. ̈ Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. ̈ Close the hood (୴ page 326). There is otherwise danger of an accident.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 406 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution I Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada ̈ Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon Detected only) is not recognized while the engine is as it is safe to do. running because the SmartKey with ̈ Search for the SmartKey. KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) is not in the vehicle. Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can the engine be started again after the engine is stopped. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada ̈ Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon only) is not recognized while the engine is as it is safe to do. running because there is strong radio-fre- ̈ Remove KEYLESS-GO* button (Canada only) quency interference. from the starter switch (୴ page 83). ̈ Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch. I Key The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada ̈ Change the position of the SmartKey in the Not Detected only) is momentarily not recognized. vehicle. ̈ If necessary, operate vehicle using SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) in starter switch under KEYLESS-GO* button (Canada only) (୴ page 83).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 407 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution I Replace The batteries in the SmartKey with ̈ Replace the batteries (୴ page 428). Key Battery KEYLESS-GO* are discharged. Key Detected A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada ̈ Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* out of In Vehicle only) left in the vehicle was recognized the vehicle. while locking the vehicle from the outside. Obtain The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- A New Key only) must be replaced. ter as soon as possible. Remove "Start" The KEYLESS-GO* system (Canada only) is ̈ Remove KEYLESS-GO* button (Canada only) Button malfunctioning. from the starter switch (୴ page 83). And Insert Key ̈ Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch. I Close Doors You wanted to lock the vehicle but not all ̈ Close doors and lock vehicle again. To Lock Vehicle doors were closed. Key Does Not You have insert an incorrect key in the start- ̈ Remove key and insert the correct key. Belong to Vehicle er switch. Don’t Forget This display appears (for a maximum of ̈ Take the SmartKey or SmartKey with Your Key 60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) with you when with the engine turned off and no SmartKey leaving the vehicle. in the starter switch. This message is only a reminder.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 408 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution I Take Your Key You have forgotten to remove the ̈ Remove the SmartKey from the starter From Ignition SmartKey. switch. . AUTO Lamp Function The light sensor is malfunctioning. Daytime ̈ In the instrument cluster control system, set Inoperative driving lamps are switched on. lamp operation to manual mode. ̈ Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter as soon as possible. Check The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Center Brake Lamp tioning. This message will only appear if all ter as soon as possible. light emitting diodes have stopped working. Check The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible Left Brake Lamp (୴ page 436). Check The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible Right Brake Lamp (୴ page 436).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 409 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Check Left The left-hand corner-illuminating lamp is ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cornering Light malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible. Check Right The right-hand corner-illuminating lamp is ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cornering Light malfunctioning. Center as soon as possible. Check The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Left Fog Lamp ter as soon as possible. Check The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Right Fog Lamp ter as soon as possible. Check The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Rear Left ter as soon as possible. Fog Lamp Check The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible Left High Beam (୴ page 433). Check The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Replace the bulb as soon as possible Right High Beam (୴ page 433).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 410 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Check Left The left license plate lamp is malfunction- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- License Plate Lamp ing. ter as soon as possible. Check Right The right license plate lamp is malfunction- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- License Plate Lamp ing. ter as soon as possible. Check The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Left Low Beam ter as soon as possible. Check The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Right Low Beam ter as soon as possible. Check The left front parking lamp is malfunction- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Front Left ing. ter as soon as possible. Parking Lamp Check The right front parking lamp is malfunction- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Front Right ing. ter as soon as possible. Parking Lamp Check The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Left Reverse Lamp ter as soon as possible. Check The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Right Reverse Lamp ter as soon as possible.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 411 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Check The front left side marker lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Front Left tioning. ter as soon as possible. Side Marker Lamp Check The front right side marker lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Front Right tioning. ter as soon as possible. Side Marker Lamp Check The rear left side marker lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Rear Left tioning. ter as soon as possible. Side Marker Lamp Check The rear right side marker lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Rear Right tioning. ter as soon as possible. Side Marker Lamp Check Left The left tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Tail and Brake tioning. ter as soon as possible. Lamps Check Right The right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Tail and Brake tioning. ter as soon as possible. Lamps

Information Provided by:Provided Information 412 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Check Left The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Tail Lamp ter as soon as possible. Check Right The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Tail Lamp ter as soon as possible. Check The left front turn signal lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Front Left tioning. ter as soon as possible. Turn Signal Check The right front turn signal lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Front Right tioning. ter as soon as possible. Turn Signal Check The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunction- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Rear Left ing. ter as soon as possible. Turn Signal Check The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc- ̈ Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- Rear Right tioning. ter as soon as possible. Turn Signal

Information Provided by:Provided Information 413 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution . Check The turn signal in the left exterior rear view ̈ Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible. Left Mirror mirror is malfunctioning. This message will Turn Signal only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. Check The turn signal in the right exterior rear view ̈ Have the LEDs replaced as soon as possible. Right Mirror mirror is malfunctioning. This message will Turn Signal only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working. Switch Off Lights You are getting out of the vehicle and the ̈ Switch off the headlamps (୴ page 108). lights are still switched on. Turn Lights Off The exterior lamp switch is set to * and ̈ Switch off the headlamps (୴ page 108). Or you have forgotten to take out the or Remove Key SmartKey. The parking lamps remain switched on. ̈ Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 414 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution ù Check The engine oil level has dropped to approx- ̈ Check the engine oil level (୴ page 327) and Engine Oil imately the minimum level. add engine oil as required (୴ page 328). At Next Refueling ̈ If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for possible leaks.

When the message Check Engine Oil At ! The engine oil level warnings should not be Next Refueling appears while the engine ignored. Extended driving with the symbol dis- is running and at operating temperature, played could result in serious engine damage the engine oil level has dropped to approx- that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limit- imately the minimum level. ed Warranty. When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further. Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Facto- ry Approved Service Products pamphlet. For information on approved engine oils, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Information Provided by:Provided Information 415 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution = SRS Malfunction There is a malfunction in the supplemental ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest Service Required restraint systems. The air bags or emergen- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. cy tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident. Front Left SRS Components of the driver’s supplemental ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest au- Malfunction restraint system may not work properly. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Service Required Front Right SRS Components of the front passenger’s sup- ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest au- Malfunction plemental restraint system may not work thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Service Required properly. Rear Left SRS Components of the left rear passenger’s ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest au- Malfunction supplemental restraint system may not thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Service Required work properly.

immediately to have the system checked; Warning! G otherwise the SRS may not be deployed In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is when needed in an accident, which could re- indicated as outlined above, the SRS may sult in serious or fatal injury, or it might de- not be operational. For your safety, we ploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which strongly recommend that you contact an could result in an accident and/or injury to authorized Mercedes-Benz Center you or to others.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 416 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution = Rear Center SRS Components of the center rear passenger’s ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest au- Malfunction supplemental restraint system may not thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Service Required work properly. Rear Right SRS Components of the right rear passenger’s ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest au- Malfunction supplemental restraint system may not thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Service Required work properly. Left Side Curtain The left side window curtain air bag may not ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest au- Airbag Malfunction work properly. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Service Required Right Side Curtain The right side window curtain air bag may ̈ Drive with added caution to the nearest au- Airbag Malfunction not work properly. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Service Required

Information Provided by:Provided Information 417 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution L Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid* ̈ Have the Tele Aid* system checked at an au- Inoperative system are malfunctioning. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. H Correct The tire pressure is too low in one or more ̈ Check and correct tire inflation pressure as Tire Pressure tires. required (୴ page 339). (USA only) Tire Press. Warning One or more tires are deflating. ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding Caution abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Tire Malfunction ̈ If necessary, change the wheel (୴ page 440). (USA only) Check The tire pressure in one or more tires is al- ̈ Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding Tire Pressure ready below the minimum value. abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. (USA only) ̈ Check and adjust tire pressure as required (୴ page 339). ̈ If necessary, change the wheel (୴ page 440).

may lose control of the vehicle. Continued Warning! G driving with a flat tire will cause excessive Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects heat build-up and possibly a fire. the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You

Information Provided by:Provided Information 418 Practical hints What to do if …?

Display Possible cause/consequence Possible solution Ê You are driving with the trunk open. ̈ Close the trunk (୴ page 270). W Check The water level has dropped to approx. ̈ Add washer fluid (୴ page 330). Washer Fluid 1.1 US qts (1.0 l).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 419 Practical hints Where will I find ...?

First aid kit Vehicle jack, vehicle tool kit, luggage bowl, Minispare wheel i Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace The vehicle jack, Minispare wheel, vehicle missing/expired items. tool kit, and the luggage bowl are stored in Depending on the equipment configura- the compartment underneath the trunk tion, the first-aid kit will be located either in floor. the open storage department in the trunk or behind the cover panel on the left-hand Vehicle tool kit side of the trunk. The vehicle tool kit includes: 1 Rotary handle 2 Cover ț One towing eye bolt ̈ Opening: Turn the handle 1 counter- ț One wheel wrench clockwise. ț Collapsible wheel chock ̈ Fold the cover 2 downward. ț One pair of gloves ̈ Remove the first aid kit.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 420 Practical hints Where will I find ...?

̈ Opening: Pull tab 5 in direction of Vehicle jack arrow 4 and open the vehicle tool kit cover. Warning! G You can now remove the tools and accessories from vehicle tool kit 3. The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets ̈ Closing: Store the tools and built into both sides of the vehicle. To help accessories in vehicle tool kit 3. avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift ̈ Press the vehicle tool kit cover down the vehicle during a wheel change. Never until it engage. get beneath the vehicle while it is supported 1 Tab ̈ Installing: Slide the vehicle tool kit 3 by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from 2 Removing into the recess in luggage bowl 6. the area under the lifted vehicle. Always 3 Vehicle tool kit, jack and collapsible firmly depress the parking brake and block ̈ wheel chock Press vehicle tool kit 3 down until wheels before raising vehicle with jack. 4 Opening tab 1 engage in luggage bowl 6. Do not release the parking brake while the 5 Tab ̈ Disengage trunk floor handle from up- vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is 6 Luggage bowl per edge of trunk and lower trunk floor. always vertical (plumb line) when in use, ̈ Removing: Lift up trunk floor cover To prevent damage, always disengage trunk especially on hills. Always try to use the jack and engage trunk floor handle in upper ! floor handle from trunk lid and lower trunk floor on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is edge of trunk. before closing the trunk. fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. ̈ Pull tab 1 in direction of arrow 2 and Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient lift up vehicle tool kit 3. capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle. ୴୴ You can now remove the vehicle tool kit 3 from luggage bowl 6.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 421 Practical hints Where will I find ...?

୴୴ Minispare wheel The Minispare wheel is stored in the compartment underneath the trunk floor.

Storage position Operational position ̈ Remove vehicle jack from its ̈ Turn crank handle clockwise. compartment. Before storing the vehicle jack in its ̈ Turn crank handle in direction of arrow compartment: 1 Vehicle tool kit, jack and collapsible wheel chock as far as it will go. ț It should be fully collapsed. 2 Luggage bowl ț The handle must be folded in (storage 3 Minispare wheel position).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 422 Practical hints Where will I find ...?

Removing the Minispare wheel Setting up the collapsible wheel chock ̈ Tilt both plates upward 1. ̈ Remove vehicle tool kit 1 The collapsible wheel chock serves to ̈ Fold the lower plate outward 2. (୴ page 421). additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while ̈ Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the changing the wheel. ̈ Turn luggage bowl 2 counterclock- way into the openings of the base wise and remove it. plate 3. ̈ Remove Minispare wheel 3. For information on where to place wheel chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lift- ing the vehicle” (୴ page 441).

1 Tilt the plates upward 2 Fold the lower plate outward 3 Insert the plate

Information Provided by:Provided Information 423 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door

If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only), unlock the driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key. i Unlocking the vehicle with the mechanical key and opening the driver’s door or the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system (୴ page 66). To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) in 1 Mechanical key locking tab 1 Unlocking the starter switch. 2 Mechanical key 2 Mechanical key ̈ Move locking tab 1 in the direction of arrow. ̈ Insert mechanical key 2 into the driv- ̈ Slide mechanical key 2 out of the er’s door lock until it stops. housing. ̈ Turn mechanical key 2 counterclockwise to position 1. The locking knob moves up, the driver’s door is unlocked. ̈ Pull the door handle to open the driver’s door.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 424 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Unlocking the trunk ̈ Turn the mechanical key 2 back and remove it from the trunk lid lock. A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft (1.90 m) is required to open the trunk lid. Locking the vehicle

If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only), do the following: ̈ Close the front passenger door, the rear doors and the trunk. ̈ Open the driver’s door. 1 Locking Mechanical key ̈ Press the central locking switch on the 2 driver’s door (୴ page 81). 1 Unlocking in an emergency ̈ Use the mechanical key 2 to lock the The locking knobs of the front passen- 2 Mechanical key vehicle from the outside via the driver's ger door and the rear doors move door. Turn the mechanical key 2 to down. position 1. ̈ Insert the mechanical key 2 into the trunk lid lock until it stops. If the vehicle battery is disconnected or ̈ The locking knob of the driver’s door drained: moves down. The vehicle is locked. ̈ Turn mechanical key 2 all the way counterclockwise to position 2. ̈ Press down the locking knobs of ̈ Check whether the doors and the trunk the front passenger door and the are locked. The trunk opens. rear doors manually. ̈ If necessary, lock the trunk with the The trunk lid swings open upwards automat- ̈ ! Exit the vehicle. mechanical key 2 (୴ page 272). ୴୴ ically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. ̈ Close the driver’s door. Information Provided by:Provided Information 425 Practical hints Unlocking/locking in an emergency

୴୴i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft Manually unlocking the transmission The selector lever can now move freely alarm system nor does it lock the fuel filler flap. gear selector lever until reset to position P.

The gear selector lever is locked again when Fuel filler flap In case of power failure, the transmission i moving it to position P. gear selector lever can be manually un- ̈ Open the fuse box in the trunk locked, e.g. to tow the vehicle. (୴ page 458).

1 Selector lever cover 1 Release cable 2 Unlocking mechanism ̈ Pull on the release cable 1. ̈ Apply the parking brake firmly. ̈ Open the fuel filler flap. ̈ Push the selector lever cover 1 to the left and pull it up and off. ̈ Push the unlocking mechanism 2 down and move the selector lever out of position P at the same time.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 426 Practical hints Resetting activated head restraints ̄ Resetting activated head restraints If the active head restraints (front seats) ̈ Push the head restraint cushion by the have been triggered in an accident, the ac- Warning! G bottom, back as far as it will go 2. tive head restraints must be reset. Other- ̈ Push the head restraint cushion down wise, the active head restraints cannot When pushing back the head restraint cush- into the guide as far as it will go 3. offer any additional protection in the event ion, take care that your fingers do not be- of another rear-end collision. come caught between the head restraint ̈ Fold the head restraint cushion by the cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may top, back firmly until it engages 1. You can tell that the head restraints have lead to injury. been triggered when they have been i For your convenience, we recommend that moved forward and cannot be adjusted. you have this work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warning! G ̈ Repeat this procedure on the active head restraints for second head re- For safety reasons, have the active head straint. restraints checked at an authorized For information on active head restraints, Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end see “Active head restraints” (୴ page 50). collision. For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Adjusting rear head restraints” (୴ page 89). 1 Fold back 2 Push back 3 Push down

Information Provided by:Provided Information 427 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries

If the batteries in the SmartKey/SmartKey Batteries contain materials that can harm with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the ve- the environment if disposed of improperly. hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked. Recycling of batteries is the preferred It is recommended to have the batteries re- method of disposal. Many states require placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz sellers of batteries to accept old batteries Center. for recycling. i When replacing batteries, make sure they Warning! G are clean and free of lint.

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive i When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries. The required replacement batter- substances. Therefore keep the batteries 1 Mechanical key ies are available at any authorized 2 Battery compartment out of reach of children. Mercedes-Benz Center. ̈ Insert mechanical key 1 into opening. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help Replacement batteries: Lithium, type immediately. CR 2025 or equivalent. ̈ Press mechanical key 1 in direction of arrow. ̈ Remove the mechanical key from the ୴ The battery compartment is unlatched. Warning! G SmartKey ( page 424). ̈ Pull battery compartment 2 out of the SmartKey batteries contain Perchlorate housing. material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Check with your local government’s disposal guidelines. California residents, see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste /Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 428 Practical hints Replacing SmartKey batteries

̈ Using a line-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under contact springs 4 with the positive terminal (+) side facing up. ̈ Return battery compartment 2 into housing until it locks into place. ̈ Slide the mechanical key back into the SmartKey. ̈ Check the operation of the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. 3 Batteries 4 Contact springs ̈ Pull out batteries 3.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 429 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Safe vehicle operation depends on proper Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are exterior lighting and signaling. It is there- important. Have headlamps checked and fogged up on the inside as a result of high fore essential that all bulbs and lamp readjusted at regular intervals and when a humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the assemblies are in good working order at all bulb has been replaced. See an authorized lights on should clear up the fogging. times. Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp i Backup bulbs will be brought into use when adjustment. lamps malfunction. Read and observe the messages in the multifunction display (୴ page 413).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 430 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Bulbs Front lamps Rear lamps

Lamp Type Lamp Type 1 Additional turn signal LED 8 High mounted brake LED lamp lamp 2 Turn signal lamp PY 21 W 9 Side marker W 5 W 3 Halogen headlamp: a Turn signal lamp PY 21 W Low beam H7 (55 W) b Brake lamp, parking 2 x P 21 W Bi-Xenon* headlamp: and standing lamp, tail Low and high beam1 D1S-35 W lamp 4 Halogen headlamp: c Backup lamp P 21 W High beam/high beam H7 (55 W) d License plate lamps W 5 W flasher e Rear fog lamp P 21 W Bi-Xenon* headlamp: (driver’s side only), High beam flasher H7 (55 W) Side marker W 5 W 5 Front fog lamp H11 (55 W) Corner-illuminating front fog lamp* H11 (55 W) 6 Side marker lamp W 5 W 7 Parking and standing 2 x lamp W5W-BV 1 Regarding vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps*, do not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Information Provided by:Provided Information 431 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Notes on bulb replacement Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following Warning! G ț Only use 12 volt bulbs of the same type lamps replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Keep bulbs out of reach of children. and with the specified watt rating. ț Additional turn signal lamps in the exte- ț Switch lights off before changing a bulb Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al- rior rear view mirrors low the lamp to cool down before changing to prevent short circuits. ț High mounted brake lamp a bulb. ț Always use a clean lint-free cloth when Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A handling bulbs. ț Bi-Xenon* lamps bulb can explode if you: ț Your hands should be dry and free of oil ț Front fog lamps ț and grease. touch or move it when hot ț Front side marker lamps ț drop the bulb ț If the newly installed bulb does not ț License plate lamps ț scratch the bulb come on, visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could Wear eye and hand protection. ! otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced at an au- dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified Replacing bulbs for front lamps technician. Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp, do the following first: ̈ Turn the exterior lamp switch to position M (୴ page 108). ̈ Open the hood (୴ page 325).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 432 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Front lamps halogen-type ̈ Insert the new bulb so that its socket locates in the recess of bulb holder 8 and is level to it. ̈ Fold wire clip back and press it down on bulb holder 8 to engage it in the ar- restor hook. ̈ Connect electric plug on the bulb. ̈ Align housing cover 5 and turn it clockwise. 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb lamp bulb High beam bulb 2 Housing cover for parking and standing 7 Bulb holder of high beam bulb ̈ Turn housing cover counterclock- lamp 8 Bulb holder of low beam bulb 4 wise and remove it. 3 Housing cover for parking and standing lamp Low beam bulb ̈ Turn bulb holder 7 with the bulb coun- 4 Housing cover for high beam headlamp ̈ Turn housing cover 5 counterclock- terclockwise and remove it. 5 Housing cover for low beam headlamp wise and remove it. ̈ Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb ̈ Pull electric plug off the bulb. holder 7. ̈ Remove wire clip from bulb holder 8 ̈ Insert the new bulb so that its socket by pushing down and release from ar- locates in the recess of bulb holder 7 restor hook. and is level to it. ̈ Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb ̈ Reinsert bulb holder 7 with the bulb in holder 8. the lamp and turn clockwise. ୴୴

Information Provided by:Provided Information 433 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

୴୴̈ Align housing cover 4 and turn it ̈ Place bulb socket 3 back into the Front lamps Bi-Xenon*-type clockwise. lamp. Handle 2 must be in a horizontal line and mark 1 is on the upper Warning! G Front turn signal lamp bulb part. ̈ Turn bulb socket 3 clockwise until it Do not remove the cover 5 for the Bi-Xe- engage. non* headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the Parking and standing lamp bulb bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work ̈ Turn housing cover 2 or 3 counter- done by a qualified technician. clockwise and remove it. ̈ Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb. ̈ Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 6. 1 Mark ̈ Press the new bulb into bulb socket 6. Handle 2 ̈ Press bulb socket 6 back into the 3 Bulb socket lamp. ̈ Turn bulb socket with handle 3 2 ̈ Align housing cover 2 or 3 and turn counterclockwise and remove it. it clockwise. ̈ Press gently onto the bulb and turn counterclockwise out of bulb socket 3. ̈ Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket 3 and turn clockwise until it engages. Information Provided by:Provided Information 434 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

High beam bulb for high beam flasher ̈ Turn housing cover 4 counterclockwise and remove it. ̈ Pull electric plug off the bulb. ̈ Pull out bulb holder 7 with the bulb. ̈ Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb holder 7. ̈ Insert the new bulb so that its socket 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb 6 Bulb socket for parking and standing locates in the recess of bulb holder 7 2 Housing cover for parking and standing lamp bulb and is level to it. lamp 7 Bulb holder for high beam flasher bulb ̈ Reinsert bulb holder 7 with the bulb in 3 Housing cover for parking and standing the lamp. lamp 4 Housing cover for high beam flasher ̈ Connect electric plug on the bulb. Housing cover for Bi-Xenon headlamp 5 ̈ Align housing cover 4 and turn it clockwise.

7 Bulb holder for high beam bulb

Information Provided by:Provided Information 435 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Front turn signal lamp bulb ̈ Place bulb socket 3 back into the Additional turn signal lamps lamp. Handle must be in a horizon- 2 The additional turn signal lamps in the ex- tal line and mark is on the upper 1 terior rear view mirrors have LEDs. part. If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func- ̈ Turn bulb socket clockwise until it 3 tion, the entire turn signal unit must be re- engage. placed. Have the additional turn signal unit replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Parking and standing lamp bulb Center. ̈ Turn housing cover 2 or 3 counterclockwise and remove it. Front side marker lamp 1 Mark ̈ Pull out bulb socket 6 with the bulb. Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs 2 Handle is a technically highly demanding process, ̈ Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 6. 3 Bulb socket we recommend you have the side marker ̈ Press the new bulb into bulb socket 6. ̈ Turn bulb socket 3 with handle 2 lamp bulbs replaced at an authorized counterclockwise and remove it. ̈ Press bulb socket 6 back into the Mercedes-Benz Center. lamp. ̈ Press gently onto the bulb and turn Replacing bulbs for rear lamps counterclockwise out of bulb ̈ Align housing cover 2 or 3 and turn socket 3. it clockwise. Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear ̈ Press the new bulb gently into bulb lamp, do the following first: socket 3 and turn clockwise until it ̈ Turn the exterior lamp switch to engages. position M (୴ page 108).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 436 Practical hints Replacing bulbs

Tail lamp unit ̈ Press the new bulb gently into its bulb ̈ Open trunk lid. socket and turn clockwise until it engages. ̈ For driver side: Lift up the bottom and Side marker lamp : Turn the new pull out the trim panel covering the 1 bulb with socket on backside of tail driver side rear light. lamp unit clockwise until it engages. ̈ For passenger side: Open the fuse box ̈ Reinstall the bulb carrier. in the trunk (୴ page 458). Let tabs 1 (୴ page 437) engage. ̈ Connect the electrical connector 2 1 Side marker lamp (୴ page 437) until it engage. 2 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side)/Side marker lamp ̈ Reinstall trim panel. 3 Backup lamp 4 Brake lamp/tail lamp License plate lamp 5 Parking and standing lamp, brake Since replacing the license plate lamp lamp/tail lamp bulbs is a technically highly demanding 6 Turn signal lamp process, we recommend you have the li- 1 Tabs ̈ Press gently onto the respective bulb cense plate lamp bulbs replaced at an au- 2 Connector and turn counterclockwise out of its thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ̈ Disconnect electrical connector 2. bulb socket. ̈ Pull tabs 1 in direction of arrows. Side marker lamp 1: Turn the bulb socket on backside of tail lamp unit ̈ Remove the bulb carrier. counterclockwise and removes side marker lamp 1 with bulb socket Information Provided by:Provided Information 437 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades

! To avoid damage to the hood, never open Warning! G Warning! G the hood when the wiper arm is folded forward.

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re- Wiper blades are components that are sub- ! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi- ject to wear and tear. Change the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the wind- cles with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only): blades twice a year, preferably in the spring shield. Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electron- and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be ics have status 0) before replacing a wiper properly wiped. As a result, you may not be Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted. blade. Otherwise, the wiper motor could able to observe surrounding traffic condi- suddenly turn on and cause injury. tions and could cause an accident. For your convenience, we recommend that you have this work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 438 Practical hints Replacing wiper blades

Removing wiper blades Installing wiper blades

! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They ̈ Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm could tear. until it locks in place. ̈ Make sure the vehicle’s on-board elec- ̈ Rotate the wiper blade into position tronic have status 0 (୴ page 82). parallel to wiper arm. ̈ Fold the wiper arm forward until it ̈ Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on snaps into place. the windshield. Make sure you hold onto the wiper when folding the wiper 1 Right angle arm back. 2 Removing ! Make certain that the wiper blades are prop- ̈ Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to erly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades wiper arm (arrow 1). may cause windshield damage. ̈ Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the retainer in the direction of arrow 2.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 439 Practical hints Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle ̈ Remove the SmartKey from the starter Warning! G switch. ̈ Park the vehicle in a safe distance from Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are moving traffic on a hard, flat surface different from those of the road wheels. As when possible. ̈ Turn off the engine by pressing the a result, the vehicle handling characteristics KEYLESS-GO* button once ̈ Turn on the hazard warning flashers. change when driving with a Minispare wheel (୴ page 135). mounted. Adapt your driving style ̈ Turn the steering wheel so that the ̈ Open the driver’s door (this puts accordingly. front wheels are in a straight-ahead the starter switch in position 0, position. The Minispare wheel is for temporary use same as with the SmartKey re- only. When driving with Minispare wheel ̈ Set the parking brake. moved from the starter switch). The mounted, ensure proper tire inflation ̈ Vehicles with automatic transmission*: driver’s door then can be closed pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed Move the gear selector lever to again. of 50 mph (80 km/h). position P (୴ page 138). i Open the door only when conditions are safe Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center ̈ Turn off the engine (୴ page 134). to do so. as soon as possible to have the Minispare ̈ wheel replaced with a regular road wheel. Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway. Never operate the vehicle with more than one Minispare wheel mounted. Do not switch off the ESP® with a Minispare wheel mounted.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 440 Practical hints Flat tire

Mounting the Minispare wheel Lifting the vehicle Always firmly set the parking brake and block wheels with wheel chocks or other Preparing the vehicle Warning! G sizeable objects before raising vehicle with jack. Do not release the parking brake while ̈ Prepare the vehicle as described When jacking up the vehicle, only use the the vehicle is raised. (୴ page 440). jack which has been specifically approved Make sure that the ground on which the ̈ Take vehicle tool kit tray and vehicle by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. vehicle is standing and where you place the jack out of trunk (୴ page 420). The jack is designed exclusively for jacking jack is solid, level and not slippery. If neces- ̈ Take the Minispare wheel from the up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets sary, use a large underlay. On slippery wheel well under the trunk floor built into both sides of the vehicle. Make surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should (୴ page 422). sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack use a non-slip underlay, for example a take-up bracket. rubber mat. The jack is intended only for lifting the Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may suited for performing maintenance work not be able to achieve its load-bearing under the vehicle. To help avoid personal capacity if it is not at its full height. injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle Be certain that the jack is always vertical during a wheel change. (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is sup- Always try to use the jack on level surface. ported by the jack. Keep hands and feet Never start the engine when the vehicle is away from the area under the lifted vehicle. raised. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under Also observe the notes on the jack. the vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 441 Practical hints Flat tire

̈ Prevent the vehicle from rolling away Changing wheel on a slight decline Changing wheel on a slight incline by blocking wheels with wheel chocks Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack or other sizeable objects. on a level surface. However, should on a level surface. However, should One wheel chock is included with the circumstances require you to do so on a circumstances require you to do so on a vehicle tool kit (୴ page 422). slight decline, place the wheel chock and slight incline, place the wheel chock and another sizeable object as follows: another sizeable object as follows: Changing wheel on a level surface

Changing wheel on passenger side Changing wheel on passenger side Changing rear wheel on passenger side (Example illustration) (Example illustration) (Example illustration) ̈ Place wheel chock (or another sizeable ̈ Place wheel chock (or another sizeable ̈ Place the wheel chock in front of and object) in front of both wheels on the object) behind both wheels on the side another sizeable object behind the side opposite to the side on which the opposite to the side on which the wheel wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel is to be changed. is to be changed. wheel being changed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 442 Practical hints Flat tire

Jacking up ! Do not position the jack on the body of the ̈ Take the wheel wrench out of the vehicle, as this may cause damage to the vehicle. vehicle tool kit tray.

The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings as indicated by the arrows. ̈ On wheel to be changed, loosen but do 1 Take-up bracket not yet remove the wheel bolts 2 Jack (approximately one full turn with wheel Warning! G 3 Crank wrench). ̈ Place jack 2 on firm ground. The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up ̈ Position jack 2 under take-up brackets. Make sure the jack arm is fully bracket 1 so that it is always vertical seated in the jack take-up bracket. (plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an If you do not position the jack correctly in incline. ୴୴ the jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can: ț fall off the jack ț seriously or fatally injure you or others Information Provided by:Provided Information 443 Practical hints Flat tire

୴୴ Removing the wheel Warning! G ̈ Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This Always replace wheel bolts that are could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub damaged or rusted. threads. Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. ̈ Remove the wheel. Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to Mounting the Minispare wheel drive under these circumstances! Contact ̈ Clean contact surfaces of wheel and an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call ̈ Turn crank 3 clockwise until jack 2 wheel hub. Roadside Assistance. is fully seated in take-up bracket 1 and the jack base evenly meets the ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight- ground. against hub and hold it there while installing first ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to wheel bolt. come off. This could cause an accident. ̈ Continue to turn crank 3 until the Make sure you are using the correct wheel wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) bolts. from the ground.

Warning! G

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose. Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack. Information Provided by:Provided Information 444 Practical hints Flat tire

̈ Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

Warning! G

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come ̈ Guide the Minispare wheel onto the 1 - 5 Wheel bolts loose if they are not tightened to a torque of wheel hub and push it on. 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). ̈ Insert wheel bolts and tighten them slightly. Before storing the jack, it should be fully collapsed, with handle folded in (storage Lowering the vehicle position). ̈ Lower vehicle by turning crank ̈ Store the jack and the other vehicle counterclockwise until vehicle is tools in the designated storage space resting fully on its own weight. underneath the trunk floor ̈ Remove the jack. (୴ page 420). 6 Wheel wrench i Vehicles with TPMS (USA only): Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor (୴ page 344) until a full size wheel/tire with functioning sensor has been placed back into service on the vehicle. Information Provided by:Provided Information 445 Practical hints Battery

Your vehicle’s battery is located in the engine compartment. Warning! G Wear eye protection. ! Do not tow-start the vehicle. Observe all safety instructions and precau- Rinse any acid spills immediate- The battery should always be sufficiently tions when handling automotive batteries. ly with clear water. Contact a charged in order to achieve its rated ser- physician if necessary. vice life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for Risk of explosion. battery maintenance intervals. Keep children away. If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have Fire, open flames and smoking the battery charge checked more are prohibited when handling Follow the instructions in this frequently. batteries. Avoid creating sparks. Operator’s Manual. When replacing the battery, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. Battery acid is caustic. Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly. If you do not intend to operate your vehicle with skin, eyes or clothing. Large 12-volt storage batteries contain for an extended period of time, consult an lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred Wear suitable protective cloth- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about method of disposal. Many states require ing, especially gloves, apron and steps you need to observe. sellers of batteries to accept old batteries faceguard. for recycling.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 446 Practical hints Battery

! Never loosen or detach battery terminal Warning! G clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the Failure to follow these instructions can re- alternator and other electronic components sult in severe injury or death. could be severely damaged. Observe all safety instructions and Have the battery checked regularly at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. precautions when handling automotive batteries (୴ page 446). Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Never lean over batteries while connecting, Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. you might get injured. 1 Filter box Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Warning! G 2 Clamps allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, ̈ Removing filter box: Release skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately Do not place metal objects on the battery as clamps 2. flush affected area with water and seek this could result in a short circuit. medical help if necessary. ̈ Remove filter box. Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, risk of acid burns in the event of an ̈ Installing filter box: Insert filter box which is flammable and explosive. Keep accident. properly. flames or sparks away from battery, avoid ̈ Secure it with clamps 2. improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc. ! Do not connect any consumers directly to the battery or it will be discharged.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 447 Practical hints Battery

Disconnecting the battery Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only): ̈ Press the start/stop button until Warning! G the engine shuts off. With a disconnected battery ̈ Open the driver’s door. ț you will no longer be able to turn the ̈ Open the hood (୴ page 325). SmartKey in the starter switch and ̈ ୴ pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop Remove the filter box ( page 447). button (Canada only) will have no effect ̈ Read and observe safety instructions Starter battery ț vehicles with automatic transmission*: and precautions (୴ page 446). 1 Battery the gear selector lever will remain ̈ Disconnect the battery negative lead locked in position P 2 Positive terminal from negative terminal 3. 3 Negative terminal ̈ Remove cover from the positive 4 Ventilation hose Always disconnect the starter battery in the ! terminal . order described below. You could otherwise 2 i If the battery is discharged, you must use damage the vehicle’s electronics. ̈ Disconnect the battery positive lead. the mechanical key to unlock (୴ page 424) or lock (୴ page 425) the vehicle. ̈ Apply the parking brake (୴ page 134). ̈ Make sure gear selector lever* is set to position P (manual transmission to Neutral). ̈ Turn off all electrical consumers. ̈ Remove SmartKey from starter switch.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 448 Practical hints Battery

Removing the battery Charging and reinstalling the battery ̈ Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger i For your convenience, have the starter bat- manufacturer. tery removed by a Mercedes-Benz Center. Warning! G ̈ Reinstall the charged battery. Follow ̈ Remove the screw securing the the previously described steps in Never charge a battery while still installed in battery. reverse order. the vehicle unless the accessory battery ̈ Remove the battery support and charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is ! The battery, its filler caps and the ventilation bracket. being used. Gases may escape during charg- hose 4 must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation. ̈ Pull out the battery ventilation hose 4 ing and cause explosions that may result in from the battery (depending on battery paint damage, corrosion or personal injury. arrangement in your vehicle model, the An accessory battery charge unit specially ventilation hose is located either on the adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and left or right side of the battery). tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is ̈ Take out the battery. available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information and availability. Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger.

! Only use charging devices with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 449 Practical hints Battery

Reconnecting the battery i The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power ! Always connect the starter battery in the or- (e.g. due to reconnecting): der described below. Otherwise, the vehicle’s ț Reset the automatic exterior mirror fold in electronics could be damaged. function (୴ page 99). ̈ Turn off all electrical consumers. ț Set the clock (୴ page 170). Vehicles with COMAND*: see COMAND op- ̈ Remove SmartKey from starter switch. erator’s manual. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only): ̈ Open the driver’s door. ! Never invert the terminal connections. ̈ Connect the battery positive lead and fasten its cover (୴ page 448). ̈ Connect the battery negative lead (୴ page 448). ̈ Make sure that the ventilation hose 4 is attached to the battery. ! Make sure the battery has a plug where the ventilation hose 4 is attached to it. ̈ Reinstall filter box (୴ page 447).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 450 Practical hints Jump starting ̄ Jump starting ! Vehicles with automatic transmission* ț Do not start the engine if the battery is Warning! G and/or 4MATIC: frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. Do not tow-start the vehicle. ț Failure to follow these directions will cause Only use a12-volt battery to jump start damage to the electronic components, and ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting your vehicle. Jump starting with a high- attempts. can lead to a battery explosion and severe er voltage battery could damage the ve- injury or death. Do not attempt to start the engine using a bat- hicle’s electrical system, which will not tery quick charge unit. be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Never lean over batteries while connecting If engine does not run after several unsuccessful Limited Warranty. or jump starting, you might get injured. starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest ț Only use jumper cables with sufficient authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not cross-section and insulated terminal allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated clamps. skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately failed starting attempts may damage the catalyt- flush affected area with water, and seek ic converter and may present a fire risk. ț Always make sure the jumper cables medical help if necessary. Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose are not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts that move when an engine is A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, or missing insulation. started or running. which is flammable and very explosive. Keep Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any flames or sparks away from battery, avoid other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery. improper connection of jumper cables, Warning! G smoking, etc. If the battery is discharged, the engine can Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Attempting to jump start a frozen battery be started with jumper cables and the Do not smoke. can result in it exploding, causing personal battery of another vehicle. Observe the injury. following: Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries Read all instructions before proceeding. ț Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic (୴ page 446). converter are cold. Information Provided by:Provided Information 451 Practical hints Jump starting

The battery is located in the engine com- ̈ Connect negative terminal 5 of the partment on the right hand side. For jump charged battery to jumper cables and starting, use the under hood terminals in attach other end to negative under front of the battery. hood terminal 4 on the vehicle. Clamp ̈ Make sure the two vehicles do not cable to charged battery 5 first touch. ̈ Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. ̈ Turn off all electrical consumers, except hazard warning flashers or work You can now turn on the electrical con- lights. sumers. Do not switch on the headlamps ̈ Apply the parking brake (୴ page 134). 1 Positive terminal of charged battery under any circumstances. 2 Positive under hood terminal cover ̈ ̈ Make sure gear selector lever* is set to Remove the jumper cables first from 3 Positive under hood terminal in front of the negative terminals 4 and 5 and position P (manual transmission to discharged battery Neutral). then from the positive terminals 3 4 Negative under hood terminal and 1. ̈ Open the hood (୴ page 326). 5 Negative terminal of charged battery You can now switch on the headlamps. ̈ Slide red cover 2 from positive under ! Never invert the terminal connections. ̈ Slide red cover 2 from positive under hood terminal 3 in direction of arrow. ̈ Connect positive terminal 1 of the hood terminal 3 back. charged battery with positive under ̈ Close the hood (୴ page 326). hood terminal 3 in front of the discharged battery with the jumper cable. ̈ Have the battery checked at the near- Clamp cable to charged battery 1 est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. first. ̈ Start the engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed. Information Provided by:Provided Information 452 Practical hints Towing the vehicle ̄ Towing the vehicle Mercedes-Benz recommends that the When circumstances do not permit the vehicle be transported with all wheels off recommended towing methods, the Warning! G the ground using flatbed or appropriate vehicle may be towed with all wheels on wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is the ground or front wheels raised (except If circumstances require towing the vehicle preferable to other types of towing. vehicles with 4MATIC) only so far as neces- with all wheels on the ground, always tow sary to have the vehicle moved to a safe with a tow bar if: Vehicles with automatic transmission* ! location where the recommended towing ț and/or 4MATIC: the engine will not run Do not tow-start the vehicle. methods can be employed. ț there is a malfunction in the brake When towing the vehicle with all wheels on system ! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* the ground or the front axle raised (not per- ț there is a malfunction in the power (Canada only) in starter switch turned to missible for vehicles with 4MATIC), the ve- supply or in the vehicle’s electrical position 0. hicle may be towed only for distances up to system Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to ex- This is necessary to adequately control the with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will ceed 30 mph (50 km/h). towed vehicle. damage radiator and supports. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on To prevent damage during transport, do not tie Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so could the ground, make sure the SmartKey or down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. damage the transfer case, which is not covered SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) ® Switch off the ESP (୴ page 63) and the auto- by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. is in starter switch position 2. matic central locking (୴ page 173). All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 453 Practical hints Towing the vehicle

! If the vehicle is towed with the front axle i To signal turns while being towed with the Warning! G raised (not permissible for vehicles with hazard warning flasher in use, turn SmartKey or 4MATIC), the gear selector lever must be in SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) in Without the engine running, there is no pow- position N (manual transmission: gear shift lever starter switch to position 2 and activate the er assistance for the brake and steering sys- in neutral position) and the engine must be shut combination switch for the left or right turn sig- tems. In this case, it is important to keep in off (SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* nal in the usual manner – only the selected turn (Canada only) in starter switch position 0 or 1). signal will operate. mind that a considerably higher degree of ® Active braking action through the ESP may Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard effort is necessary to brake and steer the otherwise seriously damage the brake system. vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly. warning flasher will operate again. While towing, the battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise: ! Make sure the parking brake is released. When towing the vehicle with all wheels on i ț you will not be able to switch on the ignition If the battery is disconnected or discharged the ground, please note the following: i ț you will not be able to engage the automatic ț the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEY- With the automatic central locking activated and transmission* in position N (୴ page 127) LESS-GO* (Canada only) will not turn in the the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* starter switch (Canada only) in starter switch position 2, the ve- When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the hicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as ground, the gear selector lever must be in ț Vehicles with automatic transmission*: the the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds position N (manual transmission: gear shift lever gear selector lever will remain locked in of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. in neutral position) and the SmartKey or position P (୴ page 127). SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, must be in starter switch position 2. For more information see “Battery” deactivate the automatic central locking (୴ page 446) and see “Jump starting” (୴ page 173). ! Towing of the vehicle should only be done (୴ page 451). using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 454 Practical hints Towing the vehicle

Installing towing eye bolt Removing cover Removing towing eye bolt ̈ Press mark on cover 1 in the direction ̈ Loosen towing eye bolt counterclock- of arrow. wise with wheel wrench. ̈ Lift cover off to reveal the threaded ̈ Unscrew towing eye bolt. hole for towing eye bolt. ̈ Store towing eye bolt and wheel wrench in the vehicle tool kit in the Installing towing eye bolt trunk. ̈ Take towing eye bolt and wheel wrench out of the vehicle tool kit in the trunk Installing cover (୴ page 420). ̈ Fit cover 1 and snap into place. 1 Cover on right side of front bumper ̈ Screw towing eye bolt clockwise into its stop and tighten with wheel wrench.

1 Cover on right side of rear bumper

Information Provided by:Provided Information 455 Practical hints Fuses

The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to ! Switch off the vehicle’s internal electrical Before replacing fuses: ୴ switch off malfunctioning power circuits. functions ( page 448) when you are working on ̈ Depress the parking brake the fuses. If a fuse is blown, the component(s) and (୴ page 134). systems secured by that fuse will stop op- If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have ̈ Make sure the manual transmission is erating. the cause determined and rectified at an in Neutral (୴ page 136), automatic authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. transmission* is set to P (୴ page 140). G A fuse chart explains the fuse allocation Warning! The gear position indicator in the ta- and fuse amperages. It is located in the chometer display should be on P. Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz main fuse box in the passenger compart- with the specified amperage for the system ment (୴ page 457). ̈ Turn off all electrical consumers. in question and do not attempt to repair or In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside ̈ Turn off the engine (୴ page 134). bridge a blown fuse. Using other than ap- i Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz ̈ Remove the SmartKey from the starter proved fuses or using repaired or bridged Center. fuses may cause an overload leading to a switch. The electrical fuses are located in different fire, and/or cause damage to electrical Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO* fuse boxes: components and/or systems. Have the (Canada only): cause determined and remedied at an au- ț Fuse box in passenger compartment ̈ Open the driver’s door. thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. (୴ page 457) ț Fuse box in engine compartment i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro- (୴ page 457) priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage ț Fuse box in trunk (୴ page 458) recommended in the fuse chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 456 Practical hints Fuses

Fuse box in passenger compartment Closing Opening ̈ Hook cover 1 into the opening at the ̈ With a dry cloth, remove any moisture ! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw front. from the fuse box. driver to open the fuse box cover in the dashboard, as this could damage it. ̈ Press cover 1 back on until it engag- ̈ Release wire 2 from fuse box cover. es. ̈ Release clamps 1. Fuse box in engine compartment ̈ Remove fuse box cover.

̈ Open the hood (୴ page 325). Closing ̈ Make sure the sealing rubber is properly positioned. ̈ Attach fuse box cover. ̈ Press fuse box cover down and secure with clamps . 1 Cover 1 2 Remove cover ̈ Fasten wire 2 on fuse box cover. 3 Release cover ! The cover must fit properly, as otherwise moisture or dirt may impair the functionality of Opening 1 Clamps the fuses. ̈ Open the driver’s door. 2 Wire ̈ Using your hands, pull cover 1 in the direction of arrow 3 and remove 2.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 457 Practical hints Fuses

Fuse box in the trunk

1 Release 2 Cover

Opening ̈ Open the trunk. ̈ Turn release 1 clockwise. ̈ Pull cover 2 downward in direction of arrow.

Closing ̈ Press cover 2 backward. ̈ Turn release 1 counterclockwise.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 458 Technical data Parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly-V-belt drive Engine Rims and tires Electrical system Main dimensions and weights Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 459 Technical data Parts service

The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers ! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of Genuine parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz Parts required for mainte- Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which nance and repair work. In addition, strate- is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited gically located parts distribution centers Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety. provide quick and reliable parts service. More than 300000 different parts for Mercedes-Benz models are available. Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be installed.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 460 Technical data Warranty coverage ̄ Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet Warranty Information booklet. Your Accessories warranties, copies of which authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will are available at any authorized Should you lose your Service and Warranty exchange or repair any defective parts Mercedes-Benz Center. Information booklet, have an authorized originally installed on the vehicle in Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re- accordance with the terms of the following placement. It will be mailed to you. warranties: ț New Vehicle Limited Warranty ț Emission System Warranty ț Emission Performance Warranty ț California, Maine, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty

Information Provided by:Provided Information 461 Technical data Identification labels

1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar) Example certification label (U.S. vehicles) Example certification label (Canada vehicles) The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 2 VIN VIN can be found in the following locations: 3 Paintwork code 2 3 Paintwork code ț on the certification label i Data shown on certification label are for ț embossed underneath the carpet in illustration purpose only. These data are specific front of the front passenger seat. to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustration. Refer to certification label on ț on the lower edge of the windshield vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 462 Technical data Identification labels

4 Carpet Example illustration from C 350 5 VIN 6 Emission control information label, ̈ Move the front passenger seat to the includes both federal and California rear as far as possible. certification exhaust emission standards ̈ Fold carpet 4 in direction of arrow. 7 Engine number (engraved on engine) VIN 5 is visible. 8 VIN (lower edge of windshield) i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 463 Technical data Layout of poly-V-belt drive

C 300/C 350

1 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 3 Automatic belt tensioner 4 Power steering pump 5 Air conditioning compressor 6 Crankshaft 7 Coolant pump 8 Generator (alternator)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 464 Technical data Engine ̄ Engine Model C 230 (204.052)1,2 C 300 (204.054)1 C 230 Sport (204.052)1 C 300 Sport (204.054)1 C 230 4MATIC (204.085)1,2 C 300 4MATIC (204.081)1 C 230 4MATIC Sport (204.085)1,2 C 300 4MATIC Sport (204.081)1 Engine 272 272 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 6 6 Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm) 3.46 in (88.00 mm) Stroke 2.69 in (68.40 mm) 3.23 in (82.10 mm) Total piston displacement 152.3 cu in (2496 cm3) 182.8 cu in (2996 cm3) Compression ratio 11.4:1 11.3:1 Output acc. to SAE J 13493 201 hp/6100 rpm 228 hp/6000 rpm (150 kW/6100 rpm) (170 kW/6000 rpm) Maximum torque 181 lb-ft/2900 - 5500 rpm 221 lb-ft/2500 - 5000 rpm acc. to SAE J 1349 (245 Nm/2900 - 5500 rpm) (300 Nm/2500 - 5000 rpm) Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 6500 rpm Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 1-4-3-6-2-5 Poly-V-belt 2404 mm 2404 mm 1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. 2 Canada only. 3 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 465 Technical data Engine

Model C 350 (204.056)1,2 C 350 Sport (204.056)1 C 350 4MATIC (204.087)1,2 C 350 4MATIC Sport (204.087)1,2 Engine 272 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection No. of cylinders 6 Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm) Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm) Total piston displacement 213.5 cu in (3498 cm3) Compression ratio 10.7:1 Output acc. to SAE J 13493 268 hp/6000 rpm (200 kW/6000 rpm) Maximum torque 258 lb-ft/2400 - 5000 rpm acc. to SAE J 1349 (350 Nm/2400 - 5000 rpm) Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 Poly-V-belt 2404 mm 1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment. 2 Canada only. 3 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating. Information Provided by:Provided Information 466 Technical data Rims and tires ̄ Rims and tires ! Only use tires which have been tested and ! Using tires other than those approved by The tire inflation pressure should be checked approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, regularly and should only be adjusted on cold Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed such as tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle. to provide best possible performance in conjunc- ț poor handling characteristics tion with the driving safety systems on your The following pages also list the approved ® ț increased noise i vehicle such as ABS or ESP . Tires specially wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your developed for your vehicle and tested and ț increased fuel consumption vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by Moreover, tires and rims not approved by available as standard or optional factory equip- finding the following on the tire’s sidewall: Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimen- ment, but can be purchased from an authorized ț MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment sional variations and different tire deformation Mercedes-Benz Center. tires characteristics that could cause them to come Depending on vehicle model and the standard or Using tires other than those approved by into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the configuration on your vehicle (Appearance covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited result. Package, Sport Package etc.), equipping your Warranty. vehicle with winter tires approved for your Further information on tires and rims is i vehicle model may also require the purchase of available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz two or four wheel rims of the recommended size Center. A placard with the recommended tire for use with these winter tires. Contact an autho- inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door rized Mercedes-Benz Center for more informa- B-pillar (୴ page 334). Some vehicles may have tion. supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (୴ page 340) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (୴ page 348). If such information is provided, it can be found on the tire inflation label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 467 Technical data Rims and tires

Same size tires

Model C 2301 C 300 C 3501 C 230 4MATIC1 C 300 4MATIC C 350 4MATIC1

Rims (light alloy) 7 J x16 H2 7.5 J x17 H2 7.5 J x17 H2 Wheel offset 1.85 in (47 mm) 1.85 in (47 mm) 1.85 in (47 mm) All-season tires2 205/55 R16 91H M+S 225/45 R17 91H M+S – Winter tires2,3 205/55 R16 91H M+S. 225/45 R17 91H M+S. 225/45 R17 91H M+S. 1 Canada only. 2 Radial-ply tires. 3 Not available as factory equipment.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 468 Technical data Rims and tires

Mixed size tires

Model C 230 Sport1 C 230 4MATIC Sport1 C 300 Sport C 300 4MATIC Sport C 3501 C 350 4MATIC1 Front axle: Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset 1.85 in (47 mm) All-season tires2 225/45 R17 91H M+S Rear axle: Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset 2.28 in (58 mm) All-season tires2 245/40 R17 91H M+S 1 Canada only. 2 Radial-ply tires.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 469 Technical data Rims and tires

Model C 350 Sport* C 300 Sport* C 350 4MATIC Sport*1 C 300 4MATIC Sport* C 350 Sport* C 350 4MATIC Sport*1 Front axle: AMG rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 8Jx18H2 Wheel offset 1.85 in (47 mm) 1.97 in (50 mm) Summer tires2 – 225/40 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load) All-season tires2 225/45 R17 91H M+S – Rear axle: AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 17 H2 8.5Jx18H2 Wheel offset 2.28 in (58 mm) 2.13 in (54 mm) Summer tires2,3 – 255/35 ZR18 94Y XL (Extra Load) All-season tires2 245/40 R17 91H M+S –

1 Canada only. 2 Radial-ply tires. 3 Must not be used with snow chains.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 470 Technical data Rims and tires

Minispare wheel

Model C 2301 C 3501 C 230 Sport1 C 350 Sport C 230 4MATIC1 C 350 4MATIC1 C 230 4MATIC Sport1 C 350 4MATIC Sport1 C 300 C 300 Sport C 300 4MATIC C 300 4MATIC Sport

Rim (steel) 3.5 B x 16 H2 3.5 B x 17 H2 Wheel offset 0.79 in (20 mm) 0.79 in (20 mm) Tire2 T 125/90 R16 98M T 125/80 R17 99M

1 Canada only. 2 Must not be used with snow chains.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 471 Technical data Rims and tires

! Please compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on the Minispare wheel rim. If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the Minispare wheel rim differs from the values given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the Minispare wheel tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure given on the yellow label on the Minispare wheel rim. i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the Minispare differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires. Make sure the Minispare tire is inflated to approximately 61 psi (4.2 bar).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 472 Technical data Electrical system ̄ Electrical system Model C 2301 C 300 C 3501 C 230 Sport1 C 300 Sport C 350 Sport C 230 4MATIC1 C 300 4MATIC C 350 4MATIC1 C 230 4MATIC Sport1 C 300 4MATIC Sport C 350 4MATIC Sport1 Generator (alternator) 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A 14 V/150 A Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW 12 V/1.4 kW 12 V/1.4 kW Battery 12 V/84 Ah 12 V/84 Ah 12 V/84 Ah Spark plugs NGK PLKR 6A NGK PLKR 6A NGK PLKR 6A Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP 33 Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP 33 Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP 33 Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.031 in (0.8 mm) Tightening torque 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 1 Canada only.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 473 Technical data Main dimensions and weights

Main dimensions

Model C 2301 C 230 Sport1 C 300 C 300 4MATIC C 350 4MATIC Sport1 Overall vehicle length 180.6 in (4586 mm) 180.6 in (4586 mm) 182.3 in (4630 mm) 182.3 in (4630 mm) Overall vehicle width (exterior 79.5 in (2020 mm) 79.5 in (2020 mm) 79.5 in (2020 mm) 79.5 in (2020 mm) rear view mirrors folded out) Overall vehicle width (exterior 69.7 in (1770 mm) 69.7 in (1770 mm) 69.7 in (1770 mm) 69.7 in (1770 mm) rear view mirrors folded in) Overall vehicle height 56.85 in (1444 mm) 56.3 in (1429 mm) 56.85 in (1444 mm) 56.9 in (1445 mm) Wheelbase 124.6 in (2760 mm) 124.6 in (2760 mm) 124.6 in (2760 mm) 124.6 in (2760 mm) Track, front 60.7 in (1541 mm) 60.4 in (1533 mm) 60.7 in (1541 mm) 60.7 in (1541 mm) Track, rear 60.8 in (1544 mm) 59.6 in (1514 mm) 60.8 in (1544 mm) 60.8 in (1544 mm)

1 Canada only.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 474 Technical data Main dimensions and weights

Model C 300 Sport C 3501 C 350 4MATIC1 C 230 4MATIC1 C 300 4MATIC Sport C 230 4MATIC Sport1 C 350 Sport Overall vehicle length 182.3 in (4630 mm) 182.3 in (4630 mm) 180.6 in (4586 mm) Overall vehicle width (exterior 79.5 in (2020 mm) 79.5 in (2020 mm) 79.5 in (2020 mm) rear view mirrors folded out) Overall vehicle width (exterior 69.7 in (1770 mm) 69.7 in (1770 mm) 69.7 in (1770 mm) rear view mirrors folded in) Overall vehicle height 56.3 in (1429 mm) 57.0 in (1448 mm) 57.1 in (1449 mm) Wheelbase 124.6 in (2760 mm) 124.6 in (2760 mm) 124.6 in (2760 mm) Track, front 60.4 in (1533 mm) 60.4 in (1533 mm) 60.4 in (1533 mm) Track, rear 59.6 in (1514 mm) 60.5 in (1536 mm) 60.5 in (1536 mm)

1 Canada only.

Weights

Max. roof load 220 lb (100 kg) Max. trunk load 220 lb (100 kg)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 475 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Capacities For health reasons, you should prevent Warning! G service fluids from coming into direct con- Vehicle components and their respective tact with your skin or clothing. lubricants must match. Therefore only use Comply with all valid regulations with re- products tested and approved by spect to handling, storing and disposing of If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a Mercedes-Benz. service fluids. Otherwise you could physician immediately. endanger persons or the environment. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or Keep service fluids out of the reach of inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz children. Center.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Engine with oil filter All models 8.5 US qt. (8.0 l) Approved engine oils Manual transmission C 2301 1.3 US qt. (1.2 l) MB Manual Transmission Oil C 230 Sport1 1.3 US qt. (1.2 l) C 300 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l) C 300 Sport 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l) 1 Canada only.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 476 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Automatic transmission C 230 (all models)1 9.51 US qt. (9.0 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid C 300 9.51 US qt. (9.0 l) C 300 Sport 9.51 US qt. (9.0 l) C 300 4MATIC 10.25 US qt. (9.7 l) C 300 4MATIC Sport 10.25 US qt. (9.7 l) C 3501 9.51 US qt. (9.0 l) C 350 Sport 9.51 US qt. (9.0 l) C 350 4MATIC1 10.25 US qt. (9.7 l) C 350 4MATIC Sport1 10.25 US qt. (9.7 l) Rear axle C 230 (all models)1 1.06 US qt. (1.0 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 C 300 (all models) 1.06 US qt. (1.0 l) C 350 (all models) 1.16 US qt. (1.1 l) Front axle C 230 4MATIC (all mod- 1.06 US qt. (1.0 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90 els)1 C 300 4MATIC (all models) 1.16 US qt. (1.1 l) C 350 4MATIC (all models) 1.16 US qt. (1.1 l) 1 Canada only.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 477 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Power steering All models 0.85 US qt. (0.8 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Chevron Texaco PSF 9109)1 Front wheel hubs All models approx. 3.6 oz. (95 g) each High-temperature roller bearing grease Brake system All models approx. 0.53 US qt. (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+) Cooling system All models 5.07 US qt. (4.8 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Fuel tank All models 17.43 US gal (66.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline: including a reserve of 2.11 US gal (8.0 l) Minimum Posted Octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON) C 300 and C 300 Sport (with automatic transmission*), USA only: Flexible Fuel Vehicle (identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on fuel filler flap). Alternative fuel: Ethanol fuel (E85) Air conditioning system All models R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)

1 For detailed information, please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 478 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. Windshield washer C 230 (all models)1 4.23 US qt (4.0 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate2 C 350 4MATIC1 4.23 US qt (4.0 l) C 350 4MATIC Sport1 4.23 US qt (4.0 l) C 300 (all models) 6.34 US qt (6.0 l) C 3501 6.34 US qt (6.0 l) C 350 Sport 6.34 US qt (6.0 l) 1 Canada only. 2 Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (୴ page 486).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 479 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine oils Engine oil additives Brake fluid

Engine oils are specifically tested for their Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. suitability in our engines and durability for They may damage the engine. Warning! G our service intervals. Therefore, only use Damage or malfunctions resulting from During vehicle operation, the boiling point of approved engine oils and oil filters blending oil additives are not covered by the brake fluid is continuously reduced required for vehicles with Maintenance the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. System. through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. For a listing of approved engine oils and oil Air conditioning refrigerant filters, refer to the Factory Approved Ser- Under extremely strenuous operating condi- vice Products pamphlet (USA only), or con- R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG tions, this moisture content can lead to the tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. lubricating oil are used in the air condition- formation of bubbles in the system, thus re- ing system. ducing the system’s efficiency. ! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced Maintenance System, or changing of oil and oil lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Mainte- filter at change intervals longer than those called system will occur. nance Booklet for replacement interval. for by the Maintenance System will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Only brake fluid approved by Warranty. Mercedes-Benz is recommended. An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will Please follow Maintenance System recommendations for scheduled oil changes. provide you with additional information. Failure to do so will result in engine or emission control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 480 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Premium unleaded gasoline ! To maintain the engine’s durability and per- Gasoline additives formance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail- A major concern among engine manufac- Warning! G able and low octane fuel is used, follow these turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso- precautions: line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. ț Have the fuel tank only partially filled with use of quality gasoline containing additives It burns violently and can cause serious unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with that prevent the build-up of carbon personal injury. premium unleaded gasoline as soon as deposits. possible. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- ț Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt After an extended period of using fuels rials near gasoline! acceleration. without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves Turn off the engine before refueling. ț Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm and in the combustion area, leading to Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in- if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such engine performance problems such as: haling fumes and skin or clothing contact, as two persons and no luggage. ț 2 ț extinguish all smoking materials. Do not exceed /3 of maximum accelerator Warm-up hesitation pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or ț Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha- operating in mountainous terrain. Unstable idle lation of fuel vapors can damage your ț Knocking/pinging health. ț Misfire ț Power loss

Information Provided by:Provided Information 481 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

In areas where carbon deposits may be Fuel requirements Flexible Fuel Vehicles (USA only) encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives, Only use premium unleaded fuel: C 300 and C 300 Sport (with automatic Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of ț The octane number (posted at the transmission*) are Flexible Fuel Vehicles. additives approved by us for use on pump) must be 91 min. It is an average Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a Mercedes-Benz vehicles. of both the Research Octane Number label reading Premium gasoline or E85 Refer to Factory Approved Service Prod- (RON) and the Motor Octane Number only! on fuel filler flap). (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also ucts pamphlet (USA only), or contact an These vehicles are designed to operate on known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for a premium unleaded gasoline or Ethanol fuel listing of approved product(s). Follow Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates (E85), or on any mixture of these two. directions on product label. such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be Ethanol fuel (E85) is a mixture of approxi- Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. used provided the ratio of any one of these mately 85% Ethanol and 15% unleaded This only results in unnecessary cost and oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed gasoline. may be harmful to the engine operation. 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. G ! Damage or malfunction resulting from poor The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not Warning! fuel quality or from blending additional fuel addi- exceed 3% plus additional co-solvents. Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highly tives other than those tested and approved by us Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles are not cov- flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Etha- not allowed. Gasohol, which contains ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, For a listing of approved products, refer to the or if you come into contact with it or inhale can be used. Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of Ethanol (USA only) or contact an authorized These blends must also meet all other fuel fumes and skin contact with Ethanol. Extin- Mercedes-Benz Center. requirements, such as resistance to spark guish all open flames before fueling. Never knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 482 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Switching fuels If in spite of these recommendations the Cold weather performance engine does not perform properly, adding For best performance and driveability it is It is possible that starting times will signif- more gasoline (at least 3 gallons recommended to use either one or the oth- icantly increase at temperatures below [12 liters]) to the fuel may improve the er fuel. A refueling pattern that alternates 32°F (0°C). At low temperatures the use engine behavior. between the two different fuels should be of a block heater is recommended (see an avoided if possible. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for fur- Cruising range ther information). Rough idling may also be When switching fuels, make sure: E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon experienced at such temperatures before ț Fuel level is below half full. than gasoline. To ensure that engine per- the engine is fully warmed up. ț formance with Ethanol fuel is similar to Fuel level is above reserve (reserve E85 fuel is unsuitable for use when ambient that when using gasoline, the engine must ! warning lamp is not lit). temperatures fall below 14°F (-10°C). burn more Ethanol fuel. As a result, it is to ț Amount of added fuel is more than be expected that the fuel consumption will Hot weather performance 5 gallons (20 liters). increase when using E85 compared to ț Ignition is off during refill. gasoline operation. At ambient temperatures above 95°F (35°C) start times may increase and be ț Immediately after refueling engine is i Use of E85 may reduce your driving range. accompanied by a rough idle following the started and operated for at least five start. minutes. Maintenance These precautions and recommendations Please inform your authorized are supposed to prevent any difficulties Mercedes-Benz Center if you use or have when starting and operating the engine used E85 fuel when your vehicle is deliv- which otherwise may be experienced ered for maintenance or repairs. before the engine has fully adapted to the different fuel.

Information Provided by:Provided Information 483 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Coolants The coolant solution must be used year If you use a solution that is more than 55% round to provide the necessary corrosion anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protec- The engine coolant is a mixture of water protection and increase boil-over protection to approximately –49°F [–45°C]), the and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro- tion. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for re- engine temperature will increase due to vides: placement interval. the lower heat transfer capability of the so- ț Corrosion protection Coolant system design and coolant used lution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/ antifreeze. ț Freeze protection determine the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the If the coolant level is low, water and ț Boiling protection (by increasing the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze boiling point) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solu- should be used to bring it up to the proper The cooling system was filled at the factory tion or other Mercedes-Benz approved level (have cooling system checked for with a coolant providing freeze protection products of equal specification are used to signs of leakage). renew the coolant concentration or bring it to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro- The water in the cooling system must meet back up to the proper level. sion protection. minimum requirements, which are usually ! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding For information on other Mercedes-Benz satisfied by normal drinking water. If you water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze approved products of equal specification, are not sure about the water quality, separately from each other, could cause engine refer to the Factory Approved Service consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim- Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact Center. ited Warranty. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the antifreeze mixture is effective to To provide important corrosion protection, -22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool- the solution must be at least 50% anticor- ant in the pressurized cooling system is rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). protection to approximately –35°F [–37°C]).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 484 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze parts. Failure to use such anticorrosion/ Before the start of the winter season (or Your vehicle contains a number of alumi- antifreeze coolant will result in a signifi- once a year in hot southern regions), you num parts. The use of aluminum compo- cantly shortened service life. should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze nents in motor vehicle engines Therefore, the following product is strongly concentration checked. The coolant is also necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze recommended for use in your vehicle: regularly checked each time you bring your coolant used in such engines be specifical- Mercedes-Benz 325.0 Anticorrosion/ vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz ly formulated to protect the aluminum Antifreeze agent. Center for service.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity

Model Approx. freeze protection – 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C) C 300 2.54 US qt. (2.4 l) 2.79 US qt. (2.64 l) C 350 2.54 US qt. (2.4 l) 2.79 US qt. (2.64 l)

Information Provided by:Provided Information 485 Technical data Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Windshield washer system and ̈ Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Windshield and headlamp washer fluid headlamp cleaning system* Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” mixing ratio and water (or concentrate and com- For temperatures above freezing point, use Both the windshield washer system and mercially available premixed wind- MB Windshield Washer Concentrate headlamp cleaning systems are supplied shield washer solvent/antifreeze, “MB SummerFit” and water: from the windshield washer fluid reservoir. depending on ambient temperatures). ț 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts The windshield washer reservoir has a ca- water pacity of approximately 6.34 US qt (6.0 l). Warning! G (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flam- 1 gal [4.0 l] water). mable. Do not spill washer For temperatures below freezing point, use solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, be- MB Windshield Washer Concentrate cause it may ignite and burn. You could be “MB SummerFit” and commercially avail- seriously burned. able premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze: ț 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal [4.0 l] solvent).

Information Provided by:Provided Information 486 Index

A Air vents 247 Audio system 176 ABS 27, 59 Center air vents 248 “911” emergency call 231 Indicator lamp 59, 374 Rear center console air vents 249 Audio and telephone, operation 176 Messages in display 389, 398 Air volume 254, 263, 268 Audio Aux mode 220 Accelerator position, automatic Alarm Audio control unit 177 transmission 142 Audible alarm and flashing exterior Audio display 180 Accessory weight 356 lamps (Panic alarm) 58 Bluetooth® operation 222 Accident 132 Alarm system see Anti-theft systems Call lists 236 Air bags 36 Antiglare CD changer* 208, 214 Children 51 Rear view mirrors 100 CD operation 208 Front 39 Anti-theft systems 66 CD player 160, 208 Front passenger front air bag off Alarm, visual and audible 66 CD, fast forward/rewind 219 indicator lamp 29, 45 Anti-theft alarm system 66 CD, pause function 218 OCS 41 Immobilizer 66 CD, submenu overview 208 Safety guidelines 38 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning Components 177 Side impact 40 Armrest 284, 286 Controller 182 Window curtain 40, 41 Ashtrays 291, 292 Example, how to use 187 Air conditioning system see Climate con- Aspect ratio 356 Functions during a single call 240 trol system Audio Aux mode 220 Making calls 237 Air conditioning, Cooling 258, 267 AUDIO menu (Control system) 158 On/Off 188 Air conditioning, Refrigerant 478, 480 Operating 185 Air distribution 254, 263 Operating and display elements 178 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Operating CD player 213 Air recirculation mode 257, 265 Operating safety 177 Operation 188 Overview 176 Information Provided by:Provided Information 487 Index

Phone cook 233 Automatic transmission B Radio operation 194 Accelerator position 142 Backrest 281 Satellite radio* operation 200 Emergency operation (limp-home Backup lamps Sound settings 189 mode) 146 Replacing bulbs 430, 431 Surround sound* (Canada only) 190 Fluid 476, 477 Bar 356 SYS menu 192 Fluid level 328 BAS 60 SYS menu, Bluetooth® settings 192 Gear ranges 143 Batteries, SmartKey SYS menu, display settings 192 Gear shifting malfunctions 146 Checking battery condition 78 SYS menu, language settings 193 Hill start assist system 246 Replacing 428 SYS menu, reset to factory Kickdown 142 Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* settings 193 Shifting procedure 139 (Canada only) Telephone menu* 222 Starting the engine 127 Checking battery condition 78 Volume 189 Transmission fluid 328 Replacing 428 Auto-dimming*, Rear view mirrors 100 Automatic transmission* Battery 448 Automatic central locking 80 Automatic shift program 144 Battery, vehicle 446 Activating/deactivating Gear selector lever 138 Charging 449 (Control system) 173 Gear selector lever control one-touch Discharged, Jump starting 451 Automatic climate control (3-zone) see Cli- gearshifting 145 Disconnecting 448 mate control system Gear selector lever positions 140 Message in display 399 Automatic headlamp mode 109, 172 Program mode selector switch 144 Reconnecting 450 Automatic lighting control, Interior Aux socket 220 Removing 449 lighting 115 Bead 356 Automatic shift program 144 Beverage holder see Cup holder

Information Provided by:Provided Information 488 Index

Bluetooth® C Certification label 462 Settings (Audio system) 192 California retail buyers and lessees, Change of address or ownership 12 Telephone* (Audio system) 222 important notice for 11 Checking tire pressure electronically Brake assist system (BAS) 60 Can holder see Cup holder Tire Pressure Monitoring System Brake fluid 324, 478, 480 Capacities and recommended (TPMS), (USA only) 344 Brake lamp fuel/lubricants 476 Children in the vehicle 51 High mounted 431 Cargo area see Trunk Air bags 51 Replacing bulbs 431, 436 Carpets, Cleaning and care of 371 Front passenger front air bag off Brake pads Catalytic converter 319 indicator lamp 45, 385 Message in display 399 CD Infant and child restraint systems 51 Brake warning lamp 27 CD changer* 208 LATCH-type child seat anchors 55 Brakes 312 CD player 160, 208 Override switch for rear door window Warning lamp 27, 376 MP3 playback options 220 operation 57 Break-in period 310 MP3, selecting a track 219 Tether attachment points 54 Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs Playback options 220 Cigarette lighter 292 Selecting a track 219 Climate control system 250, 259 Submenu overview 208 3-zone automatic climate control CD changer* 208 (Canada only) 259 CD player 160, 208 Air conditioning, Cooling 258, 267 Centigrade see Temperature display Air distribution 254, 263 mode 167 Air recirculation mode 257, 265 Central locking Air volume 254, 263 Automatic 80, 173 Air volume, rear 268 Locking/unlocking from inside 81 Automatic mode 253 Locking/unlocking switches 81 Deactivating/Reactivating 252 Central locking/unlocking switches 80 Defrosting 264 Information Provided by:Provided Information 489 Index

Dual-zone automatic climate Control system menu 151 Coolant level control 250 AUDIO 158 Checking 329 Front defroster 255 Menus overview 154 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 112 Rear climate control 268 Navi* 158 Replacing bulbs 431 Rear window defroster 256, 265 Service menu 164 Cruise control 241 Residual engine heat and Settings menu 165 Activating 242 ventilation 266 Standard display 156 Canceling 243 Setting the temperature 262 TEL* 160 Driving downhill 243 Temperature 253 Trip computer 156 Driving uphill 243 Windshield, defogging 255 Vehicle status message Setting current speed 242 Clock 151 memory 164 Setting to last stored speed Setting time 170 Control system submenus 153, 155 (“Resume” function) 245 Cockpit 24 Convenience 174 Cruising range, fuel 483 Cold weather performance 483 Instrument cluster 168 Cup holder COMAND* see separate COMAND Lighting 171 In front seat armrest 287 operating instructions Time/Date 170 In rear seat armrest 287 Combination switch 112 Vehicle 173 Curb weight 356 Corner-illuminating front fog Coolant 329 lamps* 112 Adding 329 High beam flasher 112 Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio Turn signals 131 and quantity 484 Windshield wipers 117 Checking level 329 Control system 151 Messages in display 405 Multifunction display 151 Temperature 321 Multifunction steering wheel 152 Temperature gauge 27, 148 Resetting to factory default 165 Information Provided by:Provided Information 490 Index

D Displays Downhill driving Date display, setting 170 Additional speedometer 169, 170 Cruise control 243 Daytime running lamp mode 110 Digital speedometer 158 Drink holder see Cup holder Setting 171 Maintenance service indicator 362 Drinking and driving 311 Deep water see Standing water Multifunction display 151 Driving 126 Defogging Outside temperature 158 Abroad 318 Windshield 255 Permanent display 169 Hydroplaning 315 Defrosting 264 Vehicle status message see In winter 317 Defrosting, Front 255 Multifunction display messages Instructions 126, 311 Delayed shut-off Vehicle status messages Problems 132 Interior lighting 173 memory 165 Safety systems 59 Department of Transportation see DOT Distance to empty (range), Through standing water 318 Difficulties Trip computer 157 Driving off 314 While driving 132 Document holder 289 Driving safety systems While starting 129 Door 4MATIC 65 Digital clock see clock Control panel 32 ABS 59 Digital speedometer 158 Entry lamps 116 BAS 60 Additional speedometer 169, 170 Inside door handle 79 EBP 61 Permanent display 169 Locking 72, 77 Electronic traction system 63 Dimensions, Vehicle 474 Locking with Tele Aid* 302 ESP® 62 Direction of rotation, Tires 334 Messages in display 406 Driving systems 241 Opening from inside vehicle 79 Cruise control 241 Opening from outside 72, 77 Driving safety systems 59 Unlocking 71, 76 Driving tips 142 Unlocking with Tele Aid* 301 Accelerator position 142 DOT 357 Kickdown 142 Information Provided by:Provided Information 491 Index

Dual-zone automatic climate control Emergency operations Engine Maximum cooling MAX COOL 256 Gear selector lever*, Unlocking 426 Adding engine oil 328 Dual-zone automatic climate control see Locking the vehicle 424 Belt layout 464 Climate control system Releasing from inside 271 Cleaning 366 Remote door lock* 302 Compartment 325 E Remote door unlock* 301 Coolant 329, 478, 484 Easy-entry/exit feature* Unlocking the trunk 425 Malfunction indicator lamp 27, 378 (Canada only) 95, 174 Unlocking the vehicle 424 Number 462, 463 EBP 61 Emergency tensioning device see ETD Oil 327, 476, 480 Electrical fuses see Fuses Emergency, In case of Residual heat and ventilation 266 Electrical outlet Battery, Jump starting 451 Starting 127 Glove box 293 First aid kit 420 Technical data 465 Rear passenger compartment 293 Flat tire 440 Turning off 134 Electrical system, Technical Data 473 Fuses 456 Engine coolant see Coolant Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP Instrument cluster, Indicator Engine oil 327 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® lamps 374–383 Adding 328 Electronic traction system 63 Roadside Assistance 12 Additives 480 Emergency call system 295 Roadside Assistance* (Tele Checking level (Dipstick) 327 Emergency calls, Tele Aid* 296 Aid*) 299 Consumption 327 Emergency operation (Limp-Home Towing the vehicle 453 Dipstick 327 Mode) 146 Emission control 320 Filler neck 327, 328 Emission control information label 463 Recommended engine oils and oil Emission control system warranties 10 filters 476

Information Provided by:Provided Information 492 Index

ESP® 62 F Four wheel electronic traction system Four wheel electronic traction system Fahrenheit see Temperature display (4MATIC) with ESP® 65 with ESP® 65 mode 167 4MATIC 65 Messages in display 389, 397, 398 First aid kit 420 Front air bags 39 Warning lamp 27, 376, 379, 380 Flat tire 440 Front lamps see headlamps ETD 49 Lowering the vehicle 445 Front passenger front air bag 39 Safety guidelines 38 Mounting the Minispare wheel 441 Messages in display 393 Ethanol fuel Preparing the vehicle 440 Front passenger front air bag off indicator At the gas station 322 Flexible fuel vehicles 482 lamp 29, 45, 385 Switching fuels 483 At the gas station 322 Front seats Exterior rear view mirrors Switching fuels 483 Heating* 91 Adjusting 97 Floormats* 294 Fuel 322, 478, 481 Auto-dimming on the driver’s Fluids Additives 481 side 99, 100 Automatic transmission fluid 476, Capacity, Fuel tank 478 Fold-in settings 175 477 Cruising range 483 Power folding* 98 Brake fluid 478, 480 E85 (Ethanol fuel) 478, 483 Capacities 476 Filling the tank 322 Engine coolant 329, 478, 484 Fuel filler flap and cap 322 Engine oil 328, 476, 480 Fuel reserve warning lamp 27, 150, Power steering fluid 478 380 Windshield washer and headlamp Gauge 27, 150 cleaning system 479, 486 Premium unleaded gasoline 478, Fog lamps 431 481 Messages in display 410 Requirements, Octane rating 482 Replacing bulbs 431, 432, 436 Switching (Flexible fuel vehicle) 483

Information Provided by:Provided Information 493 Index

Fuel cap G GPS Message in display 406 Garage door opener 303 Tele Aid* 295 Fuel consumption statistics Gasoline also see Fuel Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR From start 156 GAWR 357 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR Resetting 157 Gear range Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW Since last reset 157 Automatic transmission 143 GVW 357 Fuel filler flap 322 Limiting 143 GVWR 357 Locking/Unlocking 322 Shifting into optimal 145 Fuel tank Gear selector lever 126, 137 Capacity 478 Messages in display 392 Filler flap 322 Position, Automatic Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. transmission* 139, 151 Capacities 476 Shifting procedure 139 Fuses 456 Gear selector lever one-touch gearshifting Fuse box in engine compartment 457 Automatic transmission* 145 Fuse box in passenger Gear selector lever* 138 compartment 457 Gearshift pattern 138 Fuse box in trunk 458 Lock 127 Replacing 456 Position, Automatic transmission* 140 Unlocking in an emergency 426 Glove box 284 Aux socket 220 Power outlet 293 Gloves, Vehicle tool kit 420

Information Provided by:Provided Information 494 Index

H Headliner and shelf below rear window, I Halogen headlamp see Headlamps Cleaning and care of 371 Identification labels 462 Hands-free microphone 31 High beam flasher 112 Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) 463 Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 370 Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 431, Ignition 82, 84, 127 Hazard warning flasher 114 435 Switching on 82 Head restraints 89 Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 431, 433 Switching on, KEYLESS-GO* 84 Active head restraints 50 High beam headlamps Immobilizer 66 Adjustment 89 Indicator lamp 27 Infant and child restraint systems see Chil- Front seat 89 Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 431 dren in the vehicle Rear seat, Removing and Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 431, 433 Inside door handle 79 installing 90 Replacing bulbs for high beam flasher Instrument cluster 26, 147 Resetting activated active head (Bi-Xenon*) 435 Coolant temperature gauge 27, 148 restraints 427 High mounted brake lamp 431 Fuel gauge 27, 150 Headlamp cleaning system 112, 330 Hood 325 Illumination 148 Washer fluid 479, 486 Message in display 406 Lamps 374 Headlamps Opening 325 Multifunction display 151 Automatic control 109 Horn 25 Outside temperature indicator 149 Automatic headlamp mode 172 Hot weather performance 483 Setting the language (Audio Cleaning lenses 367 HVAC see Climate control system system) 193 Cleaning system 330 Hydroplaning 315 Interior lighting 114 Halogen 432 Activating automatic control 115 Manual headlamp mode 172 Deactivating automatic control 115 Messages in display 411 Delayed shut-off 173 Refilling washer fluid 330 In the rear 116 Replacing bulbs 431, 432 Reading lamps in the front 115, 116 Reading lamps in the rear 116 Information Provided by:Provided Information 495 Index

Interior rear view mirror K Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 73 Adjusting 97 Key, Mechanical 424 Battery check lamp 73, 77 Auto-dimming 99, 100 Loss of 79 Closing, Trunk 269 Interior storage spaces see Key, SmartKey 70 Factory setting 76 Storage compartments Battery check lamp 70, 72 Global locking and unlocking 77 Factory setting 71 Important notes on using J Global locking and unlocking 71 KEYLESS-GO* 75 Jack 421 Lock button 70 Locking and unlocking 73 Jump starting 451 Locking and unlocking 70 Opening button for trunk 73 Loss of 79 Panic button 58 Messages in display 408 Restoring to factory setting 78 Opening button for trunk 70 Selective setting 77 Panic button 58 Starting the engine 128 Remote control 70 Switching on ignition with 84 Restoring to factory setting 73 Unlock button 73 Selective setting 72 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Starting the engine 127 (Canada only) Steering wheel lock 82 Lock button 73 Switching on ignition with 82 Loss of 79 Turning off engine 135 Messages in display 407 Unlock button 70 Remote control 73 Turning off engine 135 Kickdown 142 Kilopascal 357

Information Provided by:Provided Information 496 Index

L Turn signals 27 Loading see Vehicle loading Labels 462 Language 193 Locator lighting 172 Certification 462 Language, Setting 168 Lock button Emission control information 463 LATCH-type child seat anchors see Door handle (KEYLESS-GO*, Canada Tire and Loading Information 335 Children in the vehicle only) 76, 125 Lamps, exterior 431 Lever Key, SmartKey 70 Light sensor 409 For cruise control 242 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Lamps, indicator and warning License plate lamps (Canada only) 73 ABS 27, 59, 374 Messages in display 411 Locking 133 Air bag Off 40 Replacing bulbs 431, 437 Vehicle in an emergency 425 Battery check lamp (SmartKey with Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 370 Locking knob 79 KEYLESS-GO* 77 Light sensor Loss of Battery check lamp (SmartKey) 72 Message in display 409 Key, Mechanical 79 Brake warning lamp 27 Lighter see Cigarette lighter Key, SmartKey 79 Brakes 376 Lighting 108 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Engine diagnostics 27, 378 Automatic headlamp mode 109 (Canada only) 79 Engine malfunction 27, 378 Corner-illuminating front fog Service and Warranty Information ESP® 27, 376, 379, 380 lamps* 112 Booklet 461 Front passenger front air bag off 29, Daytime running lamp mode 110 Low beam headlamps 45, 385, 386 Door entry lamps 116 Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 431 Fuel reserve 380 High beam flasher 112 Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 431, 433 High beam headlamps 27 Instrument cluster illumination 148 Lowering Instrument cluster 374–383 Interior 114 Vehicle 445 Maintenance service indicator 362 Manual headlamp mode 108 Lubricants 476 Seat belt telltale 27, 380 Trunk 116 Lumbar support* 91 SRS 27, 382 Limp-home mode 146 Information Provided by:Provided Information 497 Index

M Messages in display see Multifunction display messages Maintenance 11, 362 Multifunction display messages ABS 389, 398 Automatic Call (Tele Aid*) 302 Microphone, Hands-free 31 Battery, vehicle 399 Calling up service indicator Minispare wheel 422, 471 Brake fluid 400 display 363 Mounting 441 Brake pads 399 Clearing service indicator Mirrors Coolant 402 message 362 Activating exterior rear view mirror Coolant level 405 Maintenance System 362 parking position* Doors 406 Resetting service indicator 363 (Canada only) 101 EBP (Electronic Brake Service indicator message 362 Adjusting 97 Proportioning) 401 Service term exceeded 363 Auto-dimming* for rear view ESP® 389, 397, 398 Vehicles with E85 fuel 483 mirrors 100 Fog lamps 410 Manual headlamp mode 108 Exterior rear view mirrors 97 Front passenger front air bag 393 Manual transmission 136, 137 Interior rear view mirror 97 Fuel cap 406 Gearshift lever 126, 137 Modifications and alterations, Gear selector lever 392 Shift positions 137 Operating safety 15 Headlamps 411 Starting the engine 127 MON 478 Hood 406 Maximum load rating, Tires 357 MP3 Key, SmartKey 408 Maximum loaded Playback options 220 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* vehicle weight 340, 357 Selecting a folder 219 (Canada only) 407 Maximum tire Selecting a track 219 Lamps, exterior 409 inflation pressure 354, 357 Multifunction display 151 License plate lamps 411 Maximum tire load rating 353 Changing settings see Control system Light sensor 409 Memory function* (Canada only) 102 menus and Control system sub- Low tire pressure 418 Menus see Control system menus Parking brake 401 Parking lamps 411 Information Provided by:Provided Information 498 Index

Restraint systems 416 O P Run Flat Indicator 390 Occupant Classification System see OCS Paintwork, Cleaning 365 Side marker lamps 412 Occupant distribution 357 Panic alarm SRS 416 Occupant safety 34 Audible alarm and flashing exterior Tele Aid* 418 Air bags 36 lamps 58 TPMS* (Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- Children and air bags 51 Panic button 58 tem), (USA only) 392, 418 Children in the vehicle 51 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Trunk 419 Fastening the seat belt 105 panel* 276 Turn signals 413 Front passenger front air bag off indica- Cleaning 369 Windshield washer fluid 419 tor lamp 45 Opening/closing 277 Multifunction steering wheel 28, 152 Infant and child restraint systems 51 Synchronizing 278 Button operation 152 LATCH-type child seat anchors 55 Parcel net in front passenger Seat belts 38, 105 footwell 285 N OCS 41 Parking 133, 314 Navigation system* 158 Self-test 45 Parking brake 129, 134 See separate COMAND* operating Oil Message in display 401 instructions Filler neck 328 Parking lamps Neutral gear position, One-touch gearshifting Messages in display 411 Automatic transmission* 138, 140 Gear selector lever* 145 Replacing bulbs 431, 434, 436 Neutral gear position, Operating safety 15 Parking position* (Canada only) Manual transmission 137 Operating safety (Audio system) 177 Exterior rear view mirrors 101 New vehicle break-in 310 Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 367 Parts service 460 Normal occupant weight 357 Outside temperature indicator 27, 149 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see Number, Vehicle Identification (VIN) 463 Outside temperature see Displays Front passenger front air bag off indica- Overhead control panel 31 tor lamp Override switch 57 Information Provided by:Provided Information 499 Index

Passenger compartment 318 Practical hints 420 Reading lamps in the rear 116 Electrical outlet, glove box 293 Premium unleaded gasoline 478, 481 Rear bench seat, foldable* 281 Electrical outlet, rear seat Problems Rear climate control 268 ashtray 293 While driving 132 Rear door window Passenger safety see Occupant safety With vehicle 16 Blocking operation 57 Pedals 311 Product information 9 Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps Performance Production options weight 357 Rear lamps see Tail lamps Cold weather 483 Program mode 151 Rear seat ashtray see Ashtray Hot weather 483 Program mode see Automatic transmis- Rear seats Phone* see Telephone* sion*, Automatic shift program Adjustment 85 Plastic parts, cleaning 370 Program mode selector switch* Head restraints 89 Poly-V-belt drive 464 Automatic shift program 144 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Layout 464 Proper use of the vehicle 15 Rear window defroster 256, 265 Potential problems associated with under- PSI 358 Recommended inflation pressure 358 inflated and overinflated tires 347 Push-start see Tow-start Recovery services, Stolen vehicle Power assistance 311 (Tele Aid*) 302 R Power folding exterior rear view Refrigerant, Air conditioning 478, 480 Radio mirrors* 98 Refueling 322 Operation 188, 189, 192, 193, 194, Power tilt/sliding sunroof 273 Regular checks 324 222 Opening/closing 273 Remote Satellite radio*, operation 200 Synchronizing 275 Door lock with Tele Aid* 302 Selecting stations Power washer 365 Door unlock with Tele Aid* 301 (Control system) 159 Power windows 120 Trunk opening/closing* switch 269 Radio transmitters, control and Blocking of rear window operation 57 Remote control, SmartKey 70 operation 319 Cleaning 368 Remote control, SmartKey with Range (distance to empty) 157 Opening/closing 120 KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) 73 Reading lampsby:Provided Information in the front 115, 116 500 Index

Replacing bulbs 430 Tail lamps 431, 436 S Additional turn signals 431 Turn signal lamps 431 Safety Backup lamps 431, 436 Turn signal lamps (Bi-Xenon*) 436 Driving safety systems 59 Brake lamps 431 Turn signal lamps (Halogen) 434 Occupant 34 Corner-illuminating front fog Reporting safety defects 17 Reporting defects 17 lamp* 431 Reset to factory settings Safety belts see Seat belts Fog lamps 431, 436 (Audio system) 193 Satellite radio* Headlamp bulbs 432 Residual engine heat and ventilation 266 Calling SIRIUS Service Center 207 Headlamps 431 Restraint systems Channel update 207 High beam flasher Messages in display 416 Operation 200 (Bi-Xenon*) 431, 435 See Children in the vehicle Selecting program category 203 High beam flasher See SRS Showing program info 206 (Halogen) 431, 433 Reverse gear position, Automatic Storing channels 206 High beam headlamps transmission* 138, 140 Submenu overview 200 (Bi-Xenon*) 431 Reverse gear position, Tuning in channels 204 High beam headlamps Manual transmission 126 Seat belts 46 (Halogen) 431, 433 Rims 358 Children in the vehicle 51 High mounted brake lamp 431 And Tires 467 Cleaning 371 License plate lamps 431, 437 Tires and wheels 331 Fastening 46, 105 Low beam headlamps Roadside Assistance 12 Force limiter 49 (Bi-Xenon*) 431 Roadside Assistance* Messages in display 416 Low beam headlamps Tele Aid* 299 Proper use of 47, 106 (Halogen) 431, 433 RON 478 Safety guidelines 38 Parking lamps 431, 434, 436 Roof rack* 280 Telltale 27, 48, 380 Side marker lamps 431 Rubber parts, cleaning 370 Seating capacity 335 Standing lamps 431, 434, 436 Run Flat Indicator* (Canada only) 342 Information Provided by:Provided Information 501 Index

Seats 85 Setting Shifting Adjustment 85 Cruise control 242 Into reverse Easy entry/exit feature* Higher speed in cruise control 244 (manual transmission) 137 (Canada only) 95 Lower speed in cruise control 245 Manual transmission 126, 137 Head restraints 89 Temperature (interior) 262 Shifting, Automatic transmission* 138 Heating*, front seats 91 To last stored speed (“Resume” func- Side impact air bags 40 Lumbar support 91 tion) in cruise control 245 Side marker lamps Memory function* (Canada only) 102 Setting current speed 242 Cleaning lenses 367 Split rear bench seat* 281 Settings Messages in display 412 Selector lever see Gear selector lever* Control system menus and Replacing bulbs 431 Self-test submenus 154, 155 Side windows see Power windows OCS 45 Date 170 Sidewall 358 Tele Aid* 296 Daytime running lamp mode 171 SIRIUS satellite radio* see Satellite radio* Service and warranty information 10 Individual, Vehicle 165 SmartKey see Key, SmartKey Service intervals see Maintenance service Lighting (control system) 171 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* indicator Menus and submenus 153 (Canada only) see Key, SmartKey with Service life, Tires 332 Resetting all (control system) 166 KEYLESS-GO* (Canada only) Service menu 164 Resetting values in trip menu 157 Snow chains 361 Service see Maintenance Shelf below rear window, Cleaning and Spare wheel see Minispare wheel Service system see Maintenance, Mainte- care of 371 Speed settings nance System Shift lever position indicator 151 Cruise control 244, 245 Service, Parts 460 Shift program mode, Setting current 242 Automatic transmission* 144, 151 To last stored speed (“Resume” function) in Cruise control 245 Speedometer 168 Information Provided by:Provided Information 502 Index

SRS 47 Storage pockets 286 T Indicator lamp 27, 382 Storing tires 333 Tachometer 149 Messages in display 416 Submenus see Control system submenus Overspeed range 149 Standing lamps 434, 436 Summer opening feature 123 Tail lamps Replacing bulbs 431 Sun visors 289 Cleaning lenses 367 Standing water, Driving through 318 Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Replacing bulbs 431, 436 Starter switch 82 Sunshade Tar stains 365 Positions 82 Extending/retracting rear window Technical data Starting difficulties, Engine 129 sunshade 290 Flexible fuel vehicles 482 Starting, Engine 126 Switching Tele Aid* 295 Steering wheel 93, 94 Fuel (Flexible fuel vehicle) 483 Automatic Maintenance Call 302 Adjustment, electrical 94 Symbols used in this operator’s Call priority 301 Adjustment, manual 93 manual 14 Emergency calls 296 Buttons 28 System settings Hands-free microphone 31 Cleaning 371 Bluetooth® (Audio system) 192 Information 300 Easy entry/exit feature* Display (Audio system) 192 Information button* 300 (Canada only) 95 Setting the system language 193 Initiating an emergency call Power steering fluid 478 System settings (Audio system) manually 298 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 302 Menu overview 192 Messages in display 418 Storage compartments 283 Reset to factory settings 193 Remote door lock 302 Cup holder 287 Setting the system language 193 Remote door unlock* 301 Front armrest 284 Roadside Assistance button* 299, Parcel net 285 300 Rear armrest 286 Roadside Assistance* 299 Storage compartment in front SOS button 298 armrest 284 Stolen Vehicle Recovery Information Provided by:Provided Information 503 Index

services 302 Tire Identification Number see TIN Problems under-/overinflation 339 System self-check 296 Tire inflation pressure Retreads 331 Telephone* 28, 152 Air pressure 339, 356 Rotating 359 “911” emergency call Checking tire pressure electronically, Run Flat Indicator* (Audio system) 231 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Canada only) 342 Answering/ending a call 163 (TPMS), (USA only) 344 Service life 332 Hands-free microphone 31 Tires 331 Sizes 467 Operation 160 And Rims 467 Snow 360 Operation (Audio system) 222 And Wheels 331 Speed rating 316, 350, 358 Phone book 162 Care and maintenance 332 Storing 333 Redialing 163 Chains 361 Temperature 340, 355 Redialing (Instrument cluster control Cleaning 333 Terminology 356 system) 163 Cold tire inflation pressure 356 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Switching on/off (Audio system) 226 Direction of rotation 334 (TPMS)*, (USA only) 344 Temperature Driving instructions 315 Total load limit 358 Display mode 158 Important notes on tire inflation TPMS* (USA only) malfunction Interior temperature 253 pressure 340 telltale 383 Outside temperature indicator 27 Inflation pressure 339 Traction 316, 358 Tires 340 Information placard 335 Tread depth 333 Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 445 Inspection 332 Tread depth, Winter 360 Tilt/sliding sunroof see Power tilt/sliding Load rating 349, 358 Treadwear indicators 358 sunroof Load rating, Maximum 353, 357 Vehicle maximum load on 359 Time 170 Low tire pressure telltale 383 Wear pattern 359 TIN 358 Minispare wheel 422, 471 Winter 360 Tire and Loading Information Ply composition and material Placard 335 used 358 Information Provided by:Provided Information 504 Index

Tools 420 Trunk U Top tether Closing 269, 424 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Children in the vehicle 54 Closing trunk from inside 269 Standards 359 Towing eye bolt (vehicle tool kit) 420, Closing trunk from outside 269 Units, Setting 455 Emergency release 271 Speedometer 168 Towing the vehicle 453 Lighting 116 Uphill driving Tow-start 451, 453 Message in display 419 Cruise control 243 TPMS, Tire Pressure Monitoring System* Opening from inside 269 Upholstery (USA only) 344 Opening from outside 269 Cleaning 372 Traction 316, 355, 358 Unlocking in an emergency 424 Useful features 289 Transmission gear selector lever see Valet locking 272 V Gear selector lever* Tumbler holder see Cup holder Valet locking 272 Transmission see Automatic Turn signal lamps Vanity mirrors transmission* Cleaning lenses 367 In the sun visor 289 Traveling abroad 318 Replacing bulbs (Bi-Xenon*) 436 Vehicle Tread 358 Replacing bulbs (Halogen) 434 Battery 446 Tread depth, Tires 333 Replacing bulbs (rear) 436 Breaking-in period 310 Tread depth, Winter tires 360 Turn signals 131 Care 364 Treadwear indicators 358 Additional in mirrors 431 Dimensions 474 Trip computer 156 Bulbs 431 Individual settings 165, 166 Trip odometer Bulbs (Bi-Xenon) 436 Locking/unlocking 70, 73 Resetting 157 Bulbs (Halogen) 434 Locking/unlocking in an Indicator lamp 27 emergency 424 Messages in display 413 Lowering 445 Service battery 446

Information Provided by:Provided Information Towing 453 505 Index

Washing 364, 366 W Windshield washer fluid 479, 486 Weights 475 Warning sounds Mixing ratio 486 With flexible fuel 482 Drivers seat belts 48 Refilling 330 Vehicle data recording 18 Seat belt telltale 381 Wiping with 119 Vehicle jack 421 Warranty coverage 461 Windshield wipers 117 Vehicle loading 280, 334 Washing the vehicle 364 Cleaning wiper blades 368 Instructions 282 Wear pattern, Tires 359 Replacing wiper blades 438 Load limit 335 Weights, Vehicle 475 Single wipe 118 Roof rack* 280 Wheels Winter driving 360 Split rear bench seat* 281 Change 440 Snow chains 361 Terminology 356 Collapsible wheel chock 423 Tires 360 Vehicle maximum load on the tire 359 Minispare wheel 422, 471 Winter driving instructions 317 Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen Removing 444 Winter tires 360 (Tele Aid*) 302 Rims and Tires 467 Wood trims, Cleaning 372 Vehicle status message memory 164 Sizes 467 Wrench, wheel (vehicle tool kit) 420 Vehicle tool kit 420 Tightening torque 445 VIN 463 Tires and wheels 331 Window curtain air bags 40, 41 Windows see Power windows Windshield Cleaning 368 Cleaning wiper blades 368 Defogging 255

Information Provided by:Provided Information 506 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle. For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.

Warning! G

To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury. If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing. Press time June 15, 2007 GSP/TID Printed in U.S.A

Information Provided by:Provided Information Information Provided by:Provided Information